Home

TEK TDS 8000, CSA 8000 Service

1. Right side cover 4 15 Torxdrive T screw 9 Cover removal Figure 6 5 6 15 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures Line Fuses and AC power 6 16 cord connector 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed Locate the power switch line fuses and AC power cord connector in Figure 6 6 page 6 17 2 The instrument has a built in soft power off function that safely powers off the instrument when you press the On Standby switch You must power off the instrument using the Windows 98 shutdown process before depressing the front panel On Standby switch 3 Power off the rear panel power switch before servicing the line fuses or power cord CAUTION When powering off the instrument use the Windows 98 shut down procedure Choose Shutdown from the Start menu Powering down the instrument without using the Windows 98 shut down procedure can corrupt the software on the hard disk 4 Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its bottom is down on the work surface and its rear is facing you If you are servicing the line fuses do the next step if you are servicing the line cord skip to step 6 5 Remove line fuses Find the fuse caps on the rear panel Now remove both fuse cap
2. ME Icon Label Locations Monitor SVGA OUT B amp 5 232 Network CLWOMG eee oo PS2 1 PS2 USB Audiolineout ese Audio line Removable hard drive GD dive scorta disc gmi tft ci B wth 7 1 y q mo Y 5 Ac 0 0 OOO o GPIB IEEE STD 488 PORT SCOPE ONLY VGA OUT PCMCIA TYPE2 TYPE 3 26 ON i GPIB GPIB IEEE STD 488 PORT Monitor SCOPE ONLY VGA OUT PCMCIA Card slot TYPE 2 TYPE 3 1P roduct ships with a USB keyboard that plugs into the USB port and a USB mouse that plugs into the back of the keyboard Figure 2 3 Locations of peripheral connectors on rear panel Power On the Instrument Follow these steps to power on the instrument for the first time 1 Check that the line fuses are correct for your application Both fuses must be the same rating and type Fuse types require a unique cap and fuseholder See Table 2 2 and Figure 2 4 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Installation 2 6 Table 2
3. Amplitude Zero Baseline Null gps ILE H I EJ ES ii ei ue aeu 25 LII I lB lIllLl 4dLt Sampler ECB Curtain Bc Ident Sampler SRD Bias Figure 9 4 80E04 TDR Sampling module block diagram 9 4 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Diagrams 220 GHz optical BW 50 Single mode ohm reverse terminated to absorb finite reflections from relay and filter network this reduces raw LE conversion gain by 2x Average Power Monitor User Optical a RIFOCS male Input NRZ DATA Lower noise sampler Tuneable to achieve 0C192 Reference Receiver Lem 8 Filter 2 Coaxial only unfiltered path gt 20 GHz or OC Reference Receiver 2 Diode 10 Sampler USER UC PANEL ef Plugin Figure 9 5 80C01 Optical sampling block diagram CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Diagrams 220 GHz optical BW 50 ohm reverse terminated to absorb finite reflections from relay and filter pes network this reduces raw a LE amp mm conversion gain by 2x User Optical 50 550 42040 Input NRZ RIFOCS male DATA Average Power Monitor N Single mode Single mode version Filter to achieve system OC12 Reference Receiver Lower noise sampler tuneabl
4. 4 7 Perform the Hardware and Operating System Tests 4 15 Performance Tests 4 19 Prerequisites devia dois See aaa Adel ae ee oes 4 19 Equipment RE SERERE EE 4 19 CSA8000 TDS8000 Test Records 4 23 CSA8000 TDS8000 Main Instrument Test Record 4 24 80E00 Electrical Modules Test Record 4 25 80C00 Optical Modules Test Record 4 28 Main Instrument 2222 a Ree ee 4 33 Prerequisites RA ER As BATA A LS CUR 4 33 Time interval accuracy short term optimized and locked to internal 10 MHz reference modes 4 34 External direct trigger level accuracy 4 37 External direct trigger sensitivity 4 40 External direct trigger delay jitter short term optimized and locked to internal 10 MHz reference modes oe PA Cen ve P ed 4 43 External prescaled trigger delay jitter short term optimized mode and locked to internal 10 MHz reference mode 4 47 External prescaled trigger sensitivity 4 50 Electrical Sampling Modules 4 53 Prereq
5. Large module chassis T 10 Torxdrive Large module chassis removal screw 4 Figure 6 31 Small and Large module chassis removal 6 54 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures 5 Remove the module slot doors See Figures 6 32 amp 6 33 pages 6 56 amp 6 57 6 Orient the small or large module chassis Set the chassis so the module slot cavities with springs and slot guides are facing you a Remove both slot door springs by prying the spring arm from the small slots located on the sides of the module slot Use a pair of tweezers to pull the spring arms out from the slot NOTE There is a right and left spring note locations of the springs for later reassembly b Push the module slot door slighting in while lifting the door out of the chassis CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 55 Removal and Installation Procedures Module door Large module chassis Figure 6 32 Module door spring removal 6 56 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures Spring arm Large module chassis 55 Module door Small module chassis Figure 6 33 Module slot door removal 6 57 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures 7 Remove the module ejector l
6. Figure 6 21 Fan assembly removal 6 36 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures Front and Rear Power 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed Find the modules to Distribution Boards be removed in the locator diagram nternal Modules Figure 6 8 page 6 19 Additional modules to be removed m Trim all m Bottom cover m Left and Right covers 2 Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its left side is down on the work surface and its right side is facing you 3 Remove the Front power distribution board See Figure 6 22 page 6 37 a Grasp the Front power distribution board and pull it out from the instrument to disconnect it from the following connectors J2 Power supply board J102 Electrical front end board and J202 Acquisition board b Remove the Rear power distribution board Grasp the Rear Power Distribution board and pull it out from the instrument to disconnect it from the following connectors J201 Processor board J1 Power supply board J301 Electrical front end board and J102 Acquisition board 4 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps a and b to reinstall the front and rear power distribution circuit boards lt Rear power distribution circuit board Front power distribution circuit board Figure 6 22 Front amp rear power distribution board removal CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instrumen
7. iJ 1 pop hepato Control elements amp resources Operating Instructions Overview To enable full text search 11 12 Fi d Sup Widerd 13 To use the online help Cont If you cannot find the information in the Contents or Index tabs ofthe online finder you may want to enable full text Search From the application menu bar select Help and then select Contents amp Index See right From the online help finder see below choose the Find tab Contents fnd ERN HOM MERE pies m togae Waleed of saaha by Pegen pan use Fed ie ik Ica To the noer cich hamt ire ch capa 7 Duarkwwre mach ome A e Choose the method for word list generation and select next or finish Once the word list generation finishes future accesses of the find tab will immediately access a pane for searching with full text search without requiring the word to be regenerated Control elements amp resources 741 7 m 5 8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 2 21 Operating Instructions Overview To Access Oper ating System 2 22 Help To use the online help Cont 14
8. EMO ae Figure 4 32 Example of the display zoomed in to 10 mV div and 10 ps div at the crossing point 5096 on the recovered clock signal C3 4 110 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 80A01 Trigger Prescale Limiting Preamplifier Module These procedures check those characteristics that relate to 80A01 module and are listed as checked specifications Refer to Table 1 11 on page 1 11 Prerequisites Be sure you have performed the following prerequisites and the Prerequisites on page 4 19 before doing any procedures in this section m Install the 80A01 module in left most of the small compartments in the front panel of the CSA8000 or TDS8000 instrument m Install a 80 module in the small module compartment immediately to the right of the installed 80A01 module NOTE Use a calibrated torque wrench when connecting the terminators adapters attenuator and power sensor in this setup Use 8 x 0 3 inch pounds of torque STOP Throughout these procedures when steps call for the display of setup dialog boxes you can display them from the Setup menu in the menu bar at the top of the screen These procedures assume you will display and dismiss the setup dialog boxes as needed System Trigger Sensitivity These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the signal acquisition and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications Refer to T
9. SMA cable from DC calibration output 80E00 C3 input Figure 4 2 Hookup for electrical functional tests 4 Setthe DC CALIBRATOR OUTPUT a Push the Vertical MENU front panel button This displays the Vert Setup dialog box b Enter a level of 200 mV in the DC CAL box Push the Vertical MENU front panel button again to dismiss the Vert Setup dialog box 5 Select the channel to test Push the channel button for the channel you want to test The button lights and the channel display comes on See Figure 4 3 VERTICAL Eel O s Channel Q buttons Ce A SOME Figure 4 3 Channel button location 4 8 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Brief Procedures 6 Verify that the channel is operational Confirm that the following statements are true m The vertical scale readout for the channel under test shows a setting of 100 mV and DC level is at about 2 divisions above center screen front panel vertical POSITION knob for the channel you are testing moves the DC offset level up and down the screen when rotated Return the DC level to 2 divisions above center screen before continuing m Turning the vertical SCALE knob to 50 mV changes the amplitude of the DC level to about 4 divisions above center screen and returning the knob to 100 mV returns the amplitude to about 2 divisions 7 Verify that the channel acquires in all acquisition mo
10. T 10 screw 2 lt Brass washer 2 i Spring tab gt a Spring arm Ejector lever 4 7 5 CES D Stud post Slider standoff e lt gt Pivot lt gt lt standoff lt gt 2 Ejector handle e N Small module Sees 8 Large module chassis Figure 6 34 Module ejector handles removal 6 59 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures Spring arm position Figure 6 35 Spring arm position 6 60 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures Electrical Modules 1 Orient the sampling module Set the sampling module so its left side is down on the work surface and its right side is facing you CAUTION Static discharge can damage any semiconductor in the instrument or N sampling module To prevent damage from static discharge wear wrist and foot grounding straps while handling sampling module chassis Service should be performed in a static free work station by a qualified service technician Minimize handling of static sensitive components 2 Remove the cover See Figure 6 36 page 6 61 a Remove two phillips screws that secure the front panel to the cover Remove the front panel b Remove the four phillips screws that secure the
11. 6 15 Figure 6 6 Line fuses and line cord removal 6 17 Figure 6 7 External modules 6 18 Figure 6 8 Internal modules 6 19 Figure 6 9 Acquisition modules 6 20 Figure 6 10 Front panel assembly removal 6 23 Figure 6 11 J1 flex cable connector removal 6 24 Figure 6 12 Front panel board amp keyboard removal 6 25 Figure 6 13 Display 1 6 27 Figure 6 14 Touch panel amp LCD assembly removal 6 28 Figure 6 15 Display adaptor board removal 6 29 Figure 6 16 Standby On switch flex circuit removal 6 30 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Table of Contents Figure 6 17 Floppy disk drive removal 6 32 Figure 6 18 Hard drive disk removal 6 33 Figure 6 19 Removing the hard disk drive from the cartridge 6 33 Figure 6 20 CD drive amp bracket removal 6 35 Figure 6 21 Fan assembly removal 6 36 Figure 6 22 Front amp rear power distribution board removal 6 37 Figure 6 23 Low voltage power supply removal 6 39 Figure 6 24 NLX assembly removal 6 41 Figure 6 25 Riser adapter amp NLX board remov
12. Figure 4 19 Power reference hookup CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 67 Electrical Sampling Modules Ref Characterization Follow this procedure to characterize the reference signals Measurements 2 Set the Synthesized signal generator to 0 dBm Table 4 5 Power reference Frequency Reference Level dBm Reference level with 2 4 mm female to fe adapters dBm male adapter loss dB 50 MHz 4GHz 8 GHz 12 GHz 16 GHz 20 GHz 24 GHz 28 GHz 32 GHz 36 GHz 40 GHz 44 GHz 48 GHz 50 GHz 3 Setthe signal frequency and the power meter frequency to each of the frequencies listed in the Frequency column Table 4 5 4 Record the readings on the power meter in the Reference Level dBm column 4 68 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Electrical Sampling Modules Adapter Characterization Install the test hookup to characterize the adapter Setup 1 Connect the 10 dB attenuator to the Synthesized signal generator Connect the remaining end of the cable to the 1088 attenuator Connect the remaining end of the 10 dB attenuator to a 2 4 mm female to female adapter Connect the remaining end of the 2 4 mm female to female adapter to the power sensor Connect the remaining end of the power sensor to the power meter See Figure 4 20 on page 4 69 Synthesized signal generator Output 1048 Attenuator 2 4 mm Male
13. Small phillips screw 2 Figure 6 17 Floppy disk drive removal 1 Locate module to be removed Locate the Hard Disk Drive in the locator diagram Internal Modules Figure 6 8 page 6 19 CAUTION Do not remove the replaceable hard disk drive when the mainframe is powered on The replaceable hard disk drive may be permanently damaged if it is removed while the mainframe is powered on Always power down the mainframe before removing the replaceable hard disk drive 2 Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its bottom is down on the work surface and its rear panel is facing you 3 Remove the hard disk drive See Figure 6 18 page 6 33 Verify that the chassis is powered down b Push the hard disk drive cover in and the hard drive will disconnect from the latch c Grasp the hard disk drive assembly and slide it out of the instrument CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures Reinstallation Do in reverse steps b to reinstall the hard disk drive assembly The hard disk drive will push in to lock and push in again to unlock Depress 7 ug up IZ Remove the j hard disk drive Figure 6 18 Hard drive disk removal 5 Remove the hard disk drive from the cartridge See Figure 6 19 page 6 33 a Remove the four 0 phillips screws that fasten the hard disk drive to the cartridge b Carefully remove the hard disk d
14. Figure 10 1 External parts 10 7 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Fig amp index number 2 1 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 10 8 Tektronix part number 211 1050 00 650 4018 05 119 6304 00 437 0479 00 211 1081 00 174 3925 00 679 4378 00 174 4320 00 671 4657 00 407 4706 00 211 1079 00 119 6106 00 174 4241 00 361 1762 00 679 4761 00 679 4760 00 614 0968 00 679 4689 00 260 2724 00 366 0770 00 366 0771 00 366 0772 00 333 4339 00 650 3938 00 259 0155 00 650 4186 00 174 4189 00 650 4187 00 679 4479 00 174 3618 00 437 0486 00 174 4188 00 679 4379 00 174 4231 00 Serial no effective Serial no discont d Qty amp description 8 SCREW MACHINE 6 32 X 0 312 L PNH STL CAD T15 RHDD ASSEMBLY W O SW ITEMS 3 THROUGH 7 DISK DRIVE WINCHESTER 2 5 IN 6 0GB SINGLE PLATTER CABINET ASSY REMOVEABLE HARD DISK DRIVE HOLDER SCREW MACHINE M3 X 0 5 X 3 5MM CA ASSY SP RIBBON 28 AWG 1 0 1 2 X 22 HARD DRIVE CKT BD SUBASSY HARD DISK DRIVE INTERFACE CA ASSY FLAT FLEX 9 753L FLOPPY DRIVE CABLE amp FRONT PANEL CIRCUIT BD ASSY PROCESSOR BRACKET FLOPPY DRIVE 6 064 X 5 075 ALUMINUM SCREW MACHINE 2 6 X 0 45 MM 3 0L PNH STL PHILLIP S DISK DRIVE FLOPP Y 3 5INCH 1 44 MB 0 5 IN DDDS CA ASSY RIBBON BUS IDC 32 AWG 17 00L 60P OS PROCESS
15. Ly Display adaptor board f 2 Y 0 Standby On switch flex circuit E NEL 9 Back view Figure 6 16 Standby On switch flex circuit removal 6 30 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures Floppy Disk Drive 1 Locate modules to be removed Locate the Floppy Disk Drive in the locator diagram Internal Modules Figure 6 8 page 6 19 Additional modules to be removed m Trim front panel amp top m Front Panel assembly m Display assembly 2 Remove the floppy disk drive Use Figure 6 17 page 6 32 as a guide A 0 phillips screwdriver is required for this procedure 3 Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its bottom is down on the work surface and its front panel is facing you a Remove the two small phillips screws that secure floppy disk drive assembly to the bracket Use the access hole located on the outer chassis to remove one of the small phillips screws b Slide the floppy drive out toward the front of the instrument far enough to allow you to disconnect the ribbon cable connector c Remove the floppy drive from the instrument 4 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps a through c to reinstall the floppy disk drive CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 31 Removal and Installation Procedures 6 32 Hard Disk Drive A Ribbon cable Access hole 2
16. 9 5 Figure 9 6 80C01 Optical sampling with clock recovery b lock Fae hn e n ene Wie e ws 9 6 Figure 9 7 80C02 Optical sampling block diagram 9 7 Figure 9 8 80C02 Optical sampling with clock recovery block diagram 2 eI rr er he nee 9 8 Figure 9 9 80C03 Optical sampling block diagram 9 9 Figure 9 10 80C03 Optical sampling with clock recovery block diagram 4e see en ve eyes SI I TR e nr eue 9 10 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules vii Table of Contents viii Figure 9 11 80C04 Optical sampling block diagram 9 11 Figure 9 12 80C04 Optical sampling with CR 1 clock recovery block diagram eder e re e mm ww 9 12 Figure 9 13 80401 block diagram 9 13 Figure 9 14 80C06 Optical sampling block diagram 9 14 Figure 9 15 80A01 block diagram 9 15 Figure 10 1 External parts 10 7 Figure 10 2 Front panel and drives 10 9 Figure 10 3 Power supply 10 11 Figure 10 4 Acquisition 10 13 Figure 10 5 Coaxial cables 10 15 Figure 10 6 Electrical modules 10 17 Figure 10 7 Optical
17. 30 Wims Vertical equivale nt 80C05 module Maximum RMS Typical RMS8 20 GHz setting lt 25 UWims 15 30 GHz setting lt 35 UWims lt 25 UWims 40 GHz setting 10 UWrms 50 uWims 80C06 module Maximum RMS Typical 58 50 GHz setting 192 uW ms 150 uWins OC 12 5TM 4 In the 622 08 Mb s NRZ setting the scalar frequency response is 622 Mb s Reference verified to fall within fourth order Bessel Thompson reference receiver Receiver setting boundary limits frequency response The OC 12 STM 4 nominal scalar frequency response matches the ITU 622 08 Reference Receiver Nominal curve with the following tolerance MHz Frequency Lower 0 000 0 50 93 3 0 61 186 6 0 95 279 9 1 52 373 2 2 36 466 7 3 50 559 9 5 67 622 1 7 25 653 2 8 08 746 5 10 74 839 8 13 55 933 1 16 41 12442 26 11 dB Nominal 0 00 0 11 0 45 1 02 1 86 3 00 4 51 5 71 6 37 8 54 10 93 13 41 21 45 Upper 0 50 0 39 0 05 0 52 1 36 2 50 3 35 4 17 4 66 6 35 8 31 10 41 16 78 1 26 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 80C00 Modules Specifications Table 1 18 Optical modules Acquisition Cont Name Characteristics 0 48 5 16 Scalar frequency response falls within Industry Standard Bessel 2 488 Gb s Reference Thompson reference receiver boundary limits Recei tti SONET OC 48 STM 16 frequency response b
18. amp description code Mfr part number 119 4516 00 1 CONNECTOR OPTO ADAPTER FC PC ATTEN 0 608 2491 10 LOSS 35DB RPTB 0 2DB RIFOCS APC 10 119 4517 00 1 ADAPTER SMA TFS3030 2 5MM AMT 10 TK2491 10 119 4518 00 1 ADAPTER SC TFS3030 ASC 10 TK2491 5 10 119 4546 00 1 ADAPTER DIN 47256 AD 234 TK2491 AD 234 119 4556 00 1 ADAPTER HP PC OPTICAL CONNECTOR UNIVERSAL TK2491 PROPRIETARY CONNECTOR INTERFACE 10 INFORMATION AHP 10 119 4557 00 1 ADAPTER UNIV SMA 905 906 AS M 90 TK2491 PROPRIETARY INFORMATION ASM 90 119 4558 00 1 ADAPTER UNIV DIAMOND 3 5 5 00 TK2491 PROPRIETARY INFORMATION AMS 00 119 4513 00 1 CONNECTOR OPTO ADAPTER ST ATTEN 0 608 RTN TK2491 ATS 16 LOSS 35DB RPTB 0 2DBRIFOCS ATS 16 10 22 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules
19. 10 18 Figure 10 8 80401 module 10 19 Figure 10 9 Accessories 10 20 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Table of Contents List of Tables Table 1 1 System Signal acquisition 1 1 Table 1 2 System Timebase 1 2 Table 1 3 System Trigger 1 3 Table 1 4 System Environmental 1 6 Table 1 5 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Power consumption and cooling eser hr emere ach e TY REIS 8 wes ag 1 6 Table 1 6 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Display 1 7 Table 1 7 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Ports 1 7 Table 1 8 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Data storage 1 8 Table 1 9 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Mechanical 1 8 Table 1 10 Certifications and compliances 1 9 Table 1 11 Electrical sampling modules Descriptions 1 11 Table 1 12 Electrical sampling modules Signal acquisition 1 12 Table 1 13 Electrical sampling module 80E04 system 1 14 Table 1 14 Electrical sampling modules Timebase system 1 15 Table 1 15 Electrical sampling modules Power consumption 1 15 Table 1 16 Electrical sampling modules Mechanical 1 16 Table 1 17 Optical modules Descriptions 1 17 Table 1
20. List of Figures Figure 2 1 Compartments for sampling modules 2 3 Figure 2 2 Maximum inputs in three configurations 2 3 Figure 2 3 Locations of peripheral connectors on rear panel 2 5 Figure 2 4 Line fuse and power cord connector locations 155595505566 Be a a bret I VR ee ase 2 6 Figure 2 5 On Standby switch location 2 7 Figure 2 6 Sampling module 80E04 shown 2 23 Figure 2 7 Sampling module 80C01 CR shown 2 26 Figure 2 8 80401 module front panel 2 27 Figure 4 1 Compensation dialog box 4 5 Figure 4 2 Hookup for electrical functional tests 4 8 Figure 4 3 Channel button location 4 8 Figure 4 4 Channel button location 4 10 Figure 4 5 Optical channel verification 4 11 Figure 4 6 Hookup for the time base tests 4 12 Figure 4 7 Channel button location 4 13 Figure 4 8 Main time base verification 4 14 Figure 4 9 Mag time base verification 4 15 Figure 4 10 Time interval accuracy test hookup 4 34 Figure 4 11 External direct trigger test hookup 4 37 Figure 4 12 External direct trigger sensitivity test hookup 4 40
21. RF Switch c e c c c c XN Figure 9 10 80003 Optical sampling with clock recovery block diagram 9 10 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Diagrams Average Power gt 30 GHz optical BW not reverse terminated Single mode Fiber Fiber arb User Optical RIFOCS male Input NRZ DATA Lower noise sampler tuneable to achieve OC 192 or 10 66 Gb Ref Receiver rates without filter RF Switch Coaxial only unfiltered path gt 30 GHz or OC 192 Reference Receiver Rates 2 Diode Sampler 10 USERA WO PANEL of Plugsim Figure 9 11 80C04 Optical sampling block diagram CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 9 11 Diagrams 230 GHz optical BW 50 ohm reverse terminated to absorb finite reflections Fiber from relay and filter network this reduces raw OQ arb 24 2 1 Optical Spit 4 i conversion gain by 2x SC e Average Power Monitor Single mode Single mode version User Optical Input NRZ RIFOCS mal DATA Lower noise sampler tuneable to achieve 0C192 or 10 66 Gb Ref Receiver rates without filter 2 Diode Sampler USER VO PANEL of Plugsin O E with TLA AGC amp 9 95328 GHz resonant filter Figure 9 12 80C04 Optical sampling with CR 1 clock recovery block diagram 9 12 CSA8000 amp TDS8000
22. Processor board edge connector Figure 6 24 NLX assembly removal 4 Remove the Riser Adapter NLX boards See Figure 6 25 page 6 43 a Remove the two T 15 Torxdrive screws that secure Riser Adapter board to the NLX support bracket b Disconnect the ribbon cable connectors from the floppy drive hard drive and CD drive CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 641 Removal and Installation Procedures c Remove the floppy drive assembly from the NLX board assembly d Grasp the Riser board and pull it straight out to disconnect J510 edge card connector from the NLX board Remove the Riser Adapter board from the NLX board assembly e Remove the four T 15 Torxdrive screws that secure NLX board to the NLX support bracket f Remove six 3 16 nut posts that secure the three connectors to the rear of the support bracket Then remove the NLX board from the support bracket g Remove the NLX board from the support bracket 5 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps 3 and 4 to reinstall the NLX board 6 42 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures T 15 Torx screw EL Floppy drive cable aes T 15 Torx screw 2 Hard drive cable connector CD drive cable connector NLX support bracket Figure 6 25 Riser adapter amp NLX board removal CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 43 Removal and Inst
23. CSA8000 TDS8000 000000009 00 S 69 25973 Channel 1 20 Airline Shorting Cap Figure 4 23 TDR reflected rise time hookup 3 Press the DEFAULT SETUP button on CSA8000 TDS8000 front panel 4 Set up the CSA8000 TDS8000 as follows a Inthe TDR Setup dialog box click on C1 Preset b There should be a positive pulse about 1 ns long for a 10 cm airline The reflection from the short is located at the falling edge of the pulse This is the edge to be measured Adjust the horizontal position knob to bring the falling edge to the center vertical graticule CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 75 Electrical Sampling Modules In the Horz Setup dialog box set Record Length to 2000 points m set Horizontal Reference to 50 set Scale to 500 ps division while using the horizontal position knob to keep the falling edge centered d Inthe Acq Setup dialog box W set Acquisition Mode to Average 128 samples m under Stop After check Condition and select Average Complete from the pull down menu e the Meas Setup dialog box make sure the channel under test is selected in the Source menu m select Measl then choose Select Meas gt Timing gt Fall Tests Follow this procedure to make the fall time checks 1 Press the CLEAR DATA button on the CSA8000 TDS8000 front panel 2 Press
24. Signal acquisition Cont Specifications Characteristics Analog bandwidth Bandwidth 80E01 50 GHz 80E02 12 5 GHz typical 80E03 and 80E04 20 GHz typical Step response Sampling module Aberrations step transition So E aberrations typical 80E02 80E03 and 80E04 3 or less over the zone 10 ns to 20 ps before step transition 10 5 or less for the first 300 ps following step transition 3 or less overthe zone 300 ps to 5 ns following step transition 1 or less over the zone 5 ns to 100 ns following step transition 0 5 after 100 ns following step transition 80E01 3 or less over the zone 10 ns to 20 ps before step transition 41296 5 or less for the first 300 ps following step transition 45 596 396 or less over the zone 300 ps to 3 ns following step transition 1 or less over the zone 3 ns to 100 ns following step transition 0 5 after 100 ns following step transition Random noise Sampling module Noise typical ispl displayed 80E01 1 8 mVams 8002 400 uVgus 80E03 and 80E04 600 5 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 13 80E00 Modules Specifications 1 14 Table 1 12 Electrical sampling modules Signal acquisition Cont Specifications Characteristics Random noise Sampling module Noise 80 01 lt 2 3 mVams 80 02 lt 800 mVams 80E03 and 80E 04 lt 1 2 mVnus Offset range
25. 01 80009 0 01 00779 TK1943 22526 0 01 0J9P9 26003 24931 80009 26805 0 01 0 01 06009 14594 0 25 6Y 440 TK1943 TK1943 060D9 80009 50356 0 01 1943 0 01 55769 Mfr part number BX80524P 500128 119 6459 00 LT4276 039 0074 01 OBD 679 4667 00 OBD 554043 3 386 7147 00 61555 200CA 211 0887 00 441 2172 00 119 5806 00 28 R306 1 131 0269 00 2084 0000 02 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 650 4086 00 5610 120 062 N A MT8LSDT864AG 10 7 441 2183 00 407 4709 00 174 4231 00 671 4377 00 CD 224E 903 211 1070 00 441 2184 00 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION MC 4516CD646 10 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List Figure 10 3 Power supply 10 11 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List dcin Tektronix part Serial no Serial no Mfr number number effective discontd Qty Name amp description code Mfr part number 4 1 441 2176 00 1 CHASSIS ASSY LARGE MODULE 0 050 AL 0 9P9 441 2176 00 2 211 1050 00 21 SCREW MACHINE 6 32 X 0 312 L PNH STL CAD PLT T15 0 01 OBD 3 671 4483 00 1 CIRCUIT BD ASSY OPTICAL FRONT END 80009 671 4483 00 4 174 4046 00 1 CA ASSY SP RIBBON BUS PROCESSOR IDC 32 AWG 06009 174 4046 00 5 351 1068 00 4 GUIDE CARD GUIDE 32559 1000 6 129 1516 00 3 SPACER POST E
26. 1 Vertical operating range defines the maximum range over which the offset plus peak input signal can operate The offset may be limited as a function of vertical sensitivity and dynamic range such that no signal exceeding the maximum operating range can be displayed Vertical nondestruct range defines the maximum range over which offset plus peak input signal can operate without irreversible damage to the instrument Operation to instrument specification is not guarantied outside of the vertical operating range 3 Input Signal Ranges in IEEE std 1057 section 2 2 1 EEE std 1057 section 4 8 2 Transition Duration of Step Response Calculated from 0 35 bandwidth risetime product 5 std 1057 section 4 6 Analog Bandwidth 6 std 1057 section 4 8 4 Overshoot and Precursors Step transition occurs at the point of minimum radius of the waveform curvature after the 50 amplitude point of the step leading edge Table 1 13 Electrical sampling module 80E04 TDR system Specifications Characteristics Number of TDR chan 80E04 2 one per channel nels TDR polarity and op 80E 04 Positive polarity negative polarity and TDR off are eration mode selec independently selectable for each channel tions Maximum input volt 80E 04 Do not apply input voltage during TDR operation age TDR amplitude 80E 04 250 mV each polarity typical CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 30200 M
27. 711 mm 28 0 in Depth 787 mm 31 0 in CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules System Specifications Certifications Table 1 10 Certifications and compliances Category Standards or description EC Declaration of Conformity Meets intent of Directive 89 336 E for Electromagnetic Compatibility when configured with EMC sampling head modules designed for use with this instrument as identified in this manual Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official J ournal of the European Union EN 61326 EMC Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Laboratory use Class A Radiated and Conducted E missions IEC 1000 4 2 Performance Criterion B1 2 IEC 1000 4 3 Performance Criterion A1 IEC 1000 4 4 Performance Criterion B1 IEC 1000 4 5 Performance Criterion B1 IEC 1000 4 6 Performance Criterion A1 IEC 1000 4 11 Performance Criterion B1 1 Performance Criteria C for USB keyboard and mouse Note that operation of the USB keyboard and mouse can be restored by unplugging and then reconnecting the USB connector at the rear panel of the main instrument Horizontal timing susceptibility of the optical sampling modules and their internal clock recovery trigger signals usually increase the horizontal timing Jitter when external electromagnetic fields are applied For fields up to 3 V m the increase in the horizontal high frequency RMS jitter is typically
28. 80C00 Modules Specificati 1005 Table 1 18 Optical modules Acquisition Cont Name Optical return loss Characteristics Module Loss 80C01 gt 30 dB for single mode fiber 80C02 gt 30 dB for single mode fiber 80C03 gt 14 dB for multimode fiber gt 24 dB for single mode fiber 80 04 80C05 and 80 06 30 dB for single mode fiber Absolute maximum nondestructive optical input 80C01 80C02 80C03 and 80C04 5 mW average power 10 mW peak power at wavelength with highest relative responsively 80C05 W th 0 mW average power 30 eak power at wavelength ighest relative responsive 80C06 eak power at wavelength ighest relative responsive 1 20 mW average power 60 p h wavelength Range 1100 nm to 1650 nm 1100 nm to 1650 nm 700 nm to 1650 nm 1100 nm to 1650 nm 1520 nm to 1580 nm 1520 nm to 1580 nm 1550 nm and 1310 nm 20 nm 1550 nm and 1310 nm 20 nm range typical Calibrated wavelengths 80C03 780 nm all 20 nm 1550 nm 1310 nm 850 nm and 80C 04 1550 nm and 1310 nm 20 nm 80C05 amp 80C06 1550 nm 20 nm CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 19 80C00 Modules Specifications Table 1 18 Optical modules Acquisition Cont Name Characteristics Dark level 80C01 OC 12 STM 4 OC 48 STM 16
29. Windows 98 press to open En D MN USB connector for mouse or gt 207 Hn keyboard and mouse PS 2 connectors for mouse and keyboard Upper VGA port to connect a second monitor for side by side display Lower VGA port to connect a monitor for oscilloscope display Parallel port Centronics to EE 9 connect printer or other device GPIB portto connectto controller RJ 45 connector to connect to network gt Lj 1 serial port Card Bus slots for two PCMCIA type 1 cards two type 2 cards or one type 3 card 2 16 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Operating Instructions How to Use Online Help A major part of documentation for the instrument you are servicing is the online help system If your instrument is running you may be able to use online help to quickly get operating information To access use the procedure steps that follow Overview To use the online help Prerequisites 1 instrument must be powered up and running For brief 2 Move your mouse pointer and let it rest over a control description of thatis a menu name a menu item tool bar button controls tool bar readout etc When you perform this step the help system pops up a short definition or a label ofthe control See right For
30. set All Timebases Mode to Short Term Jitter Test Follow this procedure to make the external prescale check 1 Inthe Meas Setup dialog box a make sure the channel under test is selected in the Source menu b select Meas 1 and then choose Select Meas Amplitude Amplitude select Meas 2 and then choose Select Meas gt Eye Pattern Optical gt RMS Jitter Dismiss the database notification that pops up d check the Use Wfm Database box in the Source tab e check Display Database in the Wfm Database dialog box 2 Adjust the synthesizer signal generator level until the amplitude measure ment readout on the instrument screen indicates the amplitude is 800 mV 4 48 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Main Instrument 3 In the Horiz dialog box a setthe Horizontal Scale to 20 ps division and position the rising edge until it goes through the center line of the display Verify that the the RMS Jitter read out on the instrument screen is less than 1 5 ps b under Timebases set Mode to Lock Int 10 MHz and position the rising edge until it goes through the center of the display crossing of the center horizontal and vertical graticule Verify that the RMS Jitter is less than 2 5 ps 4 Repeat the setup from 7e and test for all channels in all 80E00 series modules installed End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 49 Main Instrument Exte
31. 0 1 negative aberration Min HiRef 0 1 Check that the aberrations calculated in step f for the region gt 5 ns after the edge are within 1 1 If recording data on the Test Record record the largest positive or negative value Repeat the Setup and Test procedures for the TDR negative edge polarity To do this check select negative edge polarity after selecting TDR Preset in Setup step 5a on page 4 78 No other changes to the procedures are needed since in rho mode the display does not invert when the edge polarity is changed 5 Repeat the Setup and Test procedures for channel 2 both polarities End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Optical Sampling Modules The following performance verification procedures for the optical sampling modules check the characteristics that are shown as checked specifications symbol in Table 1 18 and Table 1 19 of the Optical Modules Specifications starting on page 1 18 Be sure you have performed the appropriate Prerequisites on page 4 19 before doing any procedures in this section Dark Level amp Vertical Equivalent Optical Noise This procedure checks the dark level which is the offset in the optical channel caused by thermal variations or finite leakage current This procedure also checks the vertical equivalent optical noise The checks are made with vertical offset set to zero and no optical signal input to the op
32. 0 707 Vpc The expression is simplified by the cancellation of the R and the movement of the squared term inside the log expression to a multiple outside the log expression ve R V V log Yoo n 2 X 10 x log Xu 20 X log v R 4 88 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Optical Sampling Modules therefore at Y 3 dB 0 707 Vpc In the CSA8000 and TDS8000 instruments the vertical units displayed for an optical module are not in voltage but are in watts which is a unit of power The O E converter inside the module outputs a voltage swing whose amplitude is linearly dependent on the incoming optical power swing In this condition the voltage applied at the electrical sampler already represents Optical Power in its linear form as opposed to having to square the voltage and divide by R For the optical sampling modules then the bandwidth where the displayed optical power is one half that approaching DC is Power Powerpc ag x tog es The Vrin such a system is one half 0 5 as opposed to 0 707 The optical bandwidth therefore corresponds to the traditional electrical bandwidth at 6 dB During testing of optical modules via impulse testing the resulting impulse waveform is converted to frequency via Fourier transform and the bandwidth is defined as _ vertical swing frequency vertical swing 9 DC This definition is used for 2 5
33. 15 16 Click the minimize button to reduce the User Interface Application to an icon on the operating system toolbar See upper right Click the Start button to pop up the Start menu and then select Help from the menu See lower right The online help for the Windows operating system displays When your done with the online help you can dismiss it To restore the user interface application to the screen click its icon in the tool bar Tip To switch between online help and the applica tion you can hold down the ALT key while you press Tab repeatedly to alternate between bringing help to the front and the application End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Control elements amp resources Click to Minimize to the toolbar Tektronix 5 x 1 00 V E Mie waveform C3 50 00m V div Click for Windows 98 Help Operating Instructions 80E00 Electrical Sampling Module Operation NOTE These are not comprehensive operating instructions consult the documen tation map on page 2 12 to find other sources of operating instructions Each sampling module contains two identical input channels 80E01 has one channel This section describes channel controls connectors and indicators Figure 2 6 shows the front panel of the sampling module and identifies the buttons lights and connectors CAUTION To prevent damage to your sampling module or inst
34. 15 x aim METTE Aca Mode 2 Tg E nema Dieci 5 TM 1500 Guide re awapo 1 20AM 18 8 00 Figure 4 27 Proper positioning of the impulse for optimum curve download 4 Using a controller such as a PC Macintosh or workstation attached to the TDS8000 or CSA800 instrument via GPIB download the waveform NOTE Alternatively you can use the Save Waveform Copy Waveform or a network connection to transfer a waveform curve to a spreadsheet ASCII file or other application Refer to the CSA8000 Communications Signal Analyzer amp TDS8000 Digital Sampling Oscilloscope User Manual for more information about these methods of transferring waveform data 5 Using the available controller software such as Labview perform an Fourier Transform on the waveform this transforms the time domain impulse response to a scalar frequency response 6 Normalize the Fourier Transform result such that DC or low frequency is 0 dB 7 Plotthe frequency response 8 Check that the optical sampling module meets the performance requirements for the bandwidth setting chosen 4 94 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Optical Sampling Modules 9 Repeat steps 2 through 8 for the remaining bandwidth settings for the optical module under test refer
35. 192 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 87 Optical Sampling Modules Minimum Optical Bandwidth amp Reference Receiver Frequency Response Before performing the checks for minimum optical bandwidth and reference receiver frequency response you need to have an understanding of what optical bandwidth is and how it is measured Traditionally the bandwidth of a device or system is defined as the frequency at which the power out of the same device or system is one half as compared with a frequency near DC In the voltage domain the power dissipated into a resistive load for example a 50 termination of a sampler is the 2 where is the RMS of the voltage swing seen at the resistive load and R is the resistance value A logarithmic scale using decibels is typically used to describe a frequency dependent response of a system A value expressed in terms of a decibel relative to a reference is defined as dB 10 log a reference For electrical bandwidths the power ratio is used so dB 10 1 Power i x 108 Power pc when Power 1 2 10 x log 4 3 dB In terms of voltage and resistance the bandwidth is expressed as 2 E R 3 dB 10 log 2 Vpc R where Vr is the RMS of the voltage swing response at the bandwidth frequency and Vpc is the RMS voltage swing response at a frequency approaching DC Further math yields that Vr
36. 80C00 Optical 80A01 Trigger Prescale Preamplifier Module Installation Check the Environmental Requirements Install the Sampling Connect the Peripherals seess sa ilc Let eee ee ate Power On the Instrument Powering Off the Instrument Software Installation Description eiie iem etr ee Software Release Notes Operating System Windows 98 Reinstall Only System Diagnostics celi em ye eee RE Operating Instructions Documentation Map 3 tos ac e Sed se aoe Wes Raw ae User Interface Map Complete Control and Display Front Panel Map Quick Access to Most Often Used Features Display Map Single Graticule View Front Panel VO bg Reb leas ego Rear PanelI O Map i RR Geb ehe ed eg How to Use Online Help 80E00 Electrical Sampling Module Operation Signal Conne
37. A Riser board N Processor board Display adapter board Low voltage power supply assembly 600000000 CU Front panel board Rear power distribution board Front panel keypad Standby On switch Front panel assembly Front power Display module distribution assembly board Figure 6 8 Internal modules CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 19 Removal and Installation Procedures Large interface circuit board Acquisition assembly Sz a us o ED D Acquisition circuit board 9 Acquisition modules Figure 6 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 20 Removal and Installation Procedures Procedures for Modules You should have completed the Procedures for external modules before doing many of the procedures in this collection The procedures found here are listed in disassembly order Front Panel Assembly 1 Front Panel assembly Front Panel Board Front Panel Keypad Display assembly Display Adapter Board Standby On Switch Flex Circuit Floppy Disk Drive Hard Disk Drive CD Drive Front and Rear Power Distribution Boards Low Voltage Power Supply NLX Board Microprocessor PC Processor Board Fan assembly Acquisition assembly Large Module Interface Board Module Slot Doors Electrical Modules Optic
38. External direct trigger delay jitter short term optimized and locked to internal 10 MHz reference modes Setup These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the system trigger and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications Refer to Table 1 3 page 1 3 Equipment required Synthesized signal generator Item 13 0 5 meter precision SMA cable Item 10 1 0 meter precision SMA cable Item 11 Power divider Item 9 80E0X sampling module Prerequisites As listed on page 4 19 and under Prerequisites on page 4 34 Install the test hookup 1 Install the 80 module into the left most small module compartment of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument see Figure 4 13 on page 4 43 2 Connect the synthesized signal generator to a 1 0 meter cable 3 Connect the remaining end of the 1 0 meter cable to a SMA power divider Connect two 0 5 meter cables to the two remaining SMA power divider connectors 4 Connect one of the 0 5 meter cables to Channel 1 of the S0EOX module Connect the remaining 0 5 meter cable to the TRIGGER DIRECT INPUT CSA8000 TDS 8000 Synthesized signal generator Channel 1 1 0 Meter precision cable RF Output l TRIGGER 0 5 Meter precision cables DIRECT INPUT Power divider Figure 4 13 External direct trigger jitter test hookup CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments an
39. Reference Receiver E Aes Fiber Channel frequency response boundary limits are described in setting frequency responses ANSI FC PC For convenience the scalar frequency response of the output amplitude for sinusoidal swept optical input has been interpreted from the Bessel Thompson transfer function and listed below MHz dB Frequency Lower Nominal Upper 0 000 0 50 0 00 0 50 159 5 0 61 0 11 0 39 318 9 0 95 0 45 0 05 478 4 152 1 02 0 52 637 9 2 36 1 86 1 36 797 4 3 50 3 00 2 50 956 8 5 67 4 51 3 35 1063 7 25 5 71 4 17 1116 8 08 6 37 4 66 1275 10 74 8 54 6 35 1435 13 55 10 93 8 31 1595 16 41 13 41 10 41 2126 26 11 21 45 16 78 Single mode fiber Corning SMF 28 specs 2 The optical input powers below nondestructive levels may exceed saturation and compression limits of the module 3 Theoptical wavelengths that the product accepts optical inputs and still provides a reasonable 25 of peak optimum wavelength conversion gain Vertical accuracy specifications are referenced to the internal optical power meter reading for a given optical input and are limited to a temperature range within 5 C of previous channel compensation and an ambient temperature within 20 C to 35 C 5 Optical bandwidth is the frequency at which the responsivity of the optical to electrical conversion process is reduced by 50 6 dB 6 This specification is limited to the instrument operating in an am
40. The voltage and timing references inside the instrument are very stable over time and should not need routine adjustment The only time you should perform the Adjustment Procedures is if the instrument fails any of the Mainframe perfor mance verification checks starting on page 4 33 Adjustment Environment The instrument must be adjusted in a 20 to 30 C ambient temperature environment The instrument and signal source must warm up at least 20 minutes in this environment before you begin the adjustment procedure Adjustment After Repair After removal and replacement of a module due to electrical failure you must either perform the adjustment procedure or not depending on the module replaced See Table 5 1 Table 5 1 Adjustments required for module replaced Module replaced Adjustment required Front panel assembly No Acquisition board Yes Processor board No NLX processor assembly No Display panel or display No system Power supply No Interconnect boards No Fans No CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 5 1 Adjustment Procedures Required Equipment Instrumentation Setup The adjustment procedure requires the specific test equipment and materials listed in Table 5 2 Table 5 2 Required equipment and materials Category Signal source Meter Instrument controller only one of these configura tions required Specific equipment required Quantity Signal
41. pling module compartments Number of large sam 2 compartments for a total of 2 channels pling module compartments Small Sampling Mod Tekprobe Sampling Level 3 Hot switching is not permitted on this ule Interface interface Large Sampling Mod Tekprobe Sampling Level 3 Hot switching is not permitted on this ule Interface interface 1 Total channels x 8 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 1 System Specifications Table 1 2 System Timebase Description Sampling rate Record length Characteristics DC 200 kHz maximum dictated by trigger rate and actual holdoff setting If trigger rate is less than the maximum or the requested holdoff exceeds the minimum the trigger rate and or holdoff will dictate the sampling rate 20 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 and 4000 samples Horizontal scale range Horizontal position range 1 ps div to 5 ms div in 1 2 5 steps or 1 ps increments Maximum record lengths apply at certain ranges per table below Scale set to an integer multiple of Maximum record length 1 ps div 1000 2 ps div 2000 4 ps div 4000 50 ms maximum Horizontal resolution Horizontal position setting resolution Horizontal modes Time internal ac curacy short term optimized mode Time internal ac curacy locked to in ternal 10 MHz refer ence mode 10 fs minimum 1 ps minimum Two modes Short Term Optimized
42. 060D9 Mfr part number 174 4348 00 174 4233 00 174 4347 00 174 4138 00 174 4132 00 174 4133 00 174 4137 00 174 4234 00 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List Coaxial cables Figure 10 5 10 15 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Fig amp Index number 6 1 12 13 14 10 16 Tektronix part number 211 0088 00 386 7293 00 384 1138 00 391 0239 00 211 0088 00 366 0804 00 366 0804 00 211 0087 00 214 4081 00 380 1132 00 333 4340 00 335 0151 00 335 0152 00 335 0153 00 380 1138 00 333 4371 00 335 0339 00 Serial no effective Serial no discont d Qty amp description 3 SCREW MACHINE 2 56 X 0 281 FLH 82 DEG STL BK OXD POZ PLATE FRICTION EXTENSION SHAFT 5 215 L X 0 124 OD EPOXY GL LOCK SCREW MOUNTING BLOCK SCREW MACHINE 2 56 X 0 281 FLH 82 DEG STL BK OXD POZ KNOB PUSH BUTTON 0 11 OD 0 33L DELRIN GRAY 80E01 KNOB PUSH BUTTON 0 11 OD 0 33L DELRIN GRAY 80E02 80E03 80E04 SCREW MACHINE 2 56 X 0 188 FLH 82 DEG SST POZ TG SCR LOCKDWN ALUMINUM HOUSING SAMPLING HEAD AL 80E02 PANEL FRONT ALUMINUM CHRO MATE W TEK SILVERGRAY MARKER IDENT LABEL 0 010 P OLY W ADHESIVE 80E02 MARKER IDENT LABEL 0 010 POLY
43. 12 200 4556 00 1 COVER BOTTOM RIGHT 0 050 ALUMINUM 0 9 9 200 4556 00 13 200 4625 00 1 COVER BOTTOM 0 060 AL VINYL CLAD INCLUDING FEET 0 9 9 200 4625 00 ITEMS 13 amp 14 M 348 1515 00 1 FEET CABINET CABINET FEET BLACK GLASS FIBRE 76096 63 526 REINFORCED PLASTIC SET OF 4 FEET W SCREWS 15 101 0150 00 1 TRIM ACQUSITION PCABS TK6181 101015000 16 200 4519 00 1 COVER FRONT PCABS 17 420L X 8 670W X 2 000 TK6181 200 4519 00 17 101 0151 00 1 TRIM FRONT PCABS 17 200W X 8 450H SILVER GRAY TK6181 101 0151 00 18 260 2719 00 1 SWITCH KEYPAD ELASTOMERIC FRONT PANEL ON OFF TK2376 260 2719 00 19 335 0103 00 1 MARKER IDENT LABEL MAIN 0 500 X 0 05 335 0103 00 8 510 LEXAN W ADHESIVE CS A8000 19 335 0180 00 1 MARKER IDENT 0 500 X 8 510 LEXAN W ADHESIVE MAIN 0 805 335 0103 00 FRAME TDS8000 20 200 4555 00 1 COVER TOP LEFT 0 050 ALUMINUM 0J9P9 200 4555 00 21 200 4521 00 1 COVER LEFT PCABS 13 654L X 8 250W BLUE TK6181 200 4521 00 22 200 4520 00 1 COVER TOP PCABS 17 200L X 13 550W BLUE TK6181 200 4520 00 10 6 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List oe 15 Y 9 LN WX ARS N NS SS An V oN
44. 34 i Connect the synthesized signal generator to a 1 0 meter cable m Connect the remaining end of the 1 0 meter cable to a SMA power divider Connect two 0 5 meter cables to the two remaining SMA power divider connectors 4 Connect one of the 0 5 meter cables to Channel 1 of the S0EOX module Connect the remaining 0 5 meter cable to the TRIGGER DIRECT INPUT CSA8000 TDS 8000 0 gp 000 Qoo 05 alt 000 0 000 Synthesized signal generator 000000009 00 0000 Channel 1 1 0 Meter precision cable RF Output TRIGGER E 0 5 Meter precision cables DIRECT INPUT Power divider Figure 4 10 Time interval accuracy test hookup 5 Setthe synthesized signal generator frequency to 1 GHz 6 Setthe Synthesized output to 800 mV peak to peak 400 mV displayed 4 34 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Main Instrument 7 Setupthe CSA8000 TDS8000 as follows a Select Default Setup from the Utilities menu on the menu bar at top of display b Select C1 from the Waveform Selector menu on the controls bar at the bottom of the display left corner In the Trig Setup dialog box m select External Direct select Metastablility Reject W select Auto Mode d In the Vert Setup dialog box set Scale to 100 mV division set Offset to 0 e In the Horz Setup dialog box set Scale to 200 ps
45. 80C04 Serial DATA output 30 ps Serial CLOCK output 30 ps 1 16th CLOCK output 300 ps clock timing jitter 4 Optical power meter range Optical power meter accuracy typical 80 01 8 0 ps RMS maximum 4 0 ps RMS typica 80C02 2 0 ps RMS maximum 1 0 ps RMS typical 80C03 8 0 ps RMS maximum 4 0 ps RMS typic 80C04 2 0 ps RMS maximum 1 0 ps RMS typical 80C01 80C02 80C03 80C04 4 dBm to 30 dBm typical 80 05 13 dBm to 21 dBm typical 80C 06 13 dBm to 21 dBm typical 5 of reading connector uncertainty at the calibrated wavelengths See Table 1 18 page 1 18 1 These powers the average optical input coupled into the external Optical Sampling Module optical input connector The range is defined for recovered clock and data with a resulting BER of 1 10 19 or less a 50 duty cycle of the incoming data also referred to as 50 mark density a PRBS pattern of 223 1 and an extinction ratio of 8 2 dB at eye center 2 Output is 50 Q AC coupled specification is for output amplitude at the bulkhead outputs and does not include RF loss of attached cables 3 The clock jitter is applicable to both the external electrical output and the system jitter experienced when the recovered clock is the source of the waveform trigger for the system CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 33 80C00 Modules Specifi
46. 80E 04 only 50 O airline Maury Microwave model number 8042D 7 Terminator 50 coaxial terminator K male Anritsu Wiltron 28K50 8 Adapter SMA 1 male to 2 SMA female Tektronix part number 015 1016 00 9 Power divider 50 Q 3 SMA female connectors Tektronix Part number 015 0565 00 10 Cable coaxial 2 each 50 20 in 0 5m male to male SMA connectors Tektronix Part number 174 1427 00 11 Cable coaxial 12 Terminator cap 13 Synthesized signal generator 14 Power meter 80E 01 only 15 Power sensor 80 01 only 16 Adapter 80E01 only 17 Adapter 80E01 only 18 Adapter 2 each 19 Adapter 2 each 20 Attenuator 80201 only 21 Cable special 80E01 only 22 Attenuator 23 Sampling module 24 Optical attenuator variable 25 Optical Impulser 26 Lasertransmitter 27 Pulse pattern generator 50 39 37 in 1 0m male to male SMA connectors 50 60 in 1 5m male to male SMA connectors Cap short circuit 3 5 mm SMA male Signal generator 50 MHz to 50 GHz Power meter Power sensor w attached cable 2 4 mm male to male connectors 2 4 mm female to female connectors SMA female to BNC male connectors BNC to dual banana plugs 10 dB female to male SMA connectors Phase and power stability 2X attenuator 50 O SMA connectors Tektronix 80C02 Sampling Module Single mode input and output 0 to 60 dB 1550 nm impulse 2 5 Gb s SONET SDH laser transmitter gt 10 Gb s pulse pattern gener
47. CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 3 3 Theory of Operation 3 4 80 04 Electrical TDR Sampling Module The 80E04 TDR Sampling module is a two channel low noise 17 5 ps rise time sampler Each channel is also capable of generating its own Time Domain Reflectometry TDR step The 80204 sampling module risetime is 17 5 ps For the 80E04 a single strobe delivered from the instrument mainframe to both acquisition channels controls the timing of the strobe assertion to both channels If channel to channel deskew is zero the sampling coincidence between channels is very close Acquisition deskew function is carried out by making separate acquisitions over acquisition windows Each electrical channel features a Tekpobe Level 2 probe power connector for attachment of a real time probe The control of this probe is a mainframe function All module calibration signals are derived from a 2 5 V precision voltage reference internal to the sampling module Settings derived from this reference are stored in a non volatile EEPROM in the sampling module although the responsibility for the execution of these settings is with the mainframe When used in the acquisition mode that is with the TDR step generator turned off each channel functions as a normal sampling input Both channels are strobed simultaneously from a single strobe generator contained within the sampling module so time coincidence between the two channels is s
48. Figure 4 13 External direct trigger jitter test hookup 4 43 Figure 4 14 External prescaled test hookup 4 47 Figure 4 15 External prescaled trigger sensitivity test hookup 4 50 Figure 4 16 Input impedance test hookup 4 54 Figure 4 17 Vertical DC accuracy test hookup 4 57 Figure 4 18 Rise Time hookup 4 64 Figure 4 19 Power reference 4 67 Figure 4 20 Adapter characterization hookup 4 69 Figure 4 21 Measure reference signals 4 70 Figure 4 22 80E01 reference signals hookup 4 72 Figure 4 23 TDR reflected rise time hookup 4 75 Figure 4 24 TDR system step response aberrations hookup 4 78 Figure 4 25 Dark Level and Vertical Equivalent Optical Noise test hookup 4 83 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Table of Contents vi Figure 4 26 Minimum optical bandwidth and reference receiver frequency response hookup 4 90 Figure 4 27 Proper positioning of the impulse for optimum curve download 4 94 Figure 4 28 Minimum optical bandwidth and reference receiver frequency response hookup 4 100 Figure 4 29 80C01 and 80C03 clock
49. Select C1 from the Waveform Selector menu on the controls bar at the bottom of the display left corner or press the Channel 1 push button on the front panel 4 64 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Electrical Sampling Modules In the Trig Setup dialog box set Source to Internal Clock 200 kHz In the Setup dialog box W set Acquisition Mode to Average 64 samples m under Stop After check Condition and select Average Complete from the pull down menu In the Horz Setup dialog box m set Record Length to 2000 points W set Scale to 2 us division W set Position to O this will revert to a minimum non zero value m set Horizontal Reference to 0 In the Meas Setup dialog box for each measurement make sure the channel under test is selected in the Source menu select Meas 1 and then choose Select Meas gt Amplitude gt High select Meas 2 and then choose Select Meas gt Amplitude gt Low m select Meas 3 and then choose Select Meas gt Timing gt Rise select Meas 3 turn on check Statistics check box at bottom of dialog box and set Weighting to 500 Test Follow this procedure to make the rise time accuracy checks 1 Bi 292 Press the CLEAR DATA button on the front panel Press the RUN STOP button on the front panel Several cycles of a pulsed waveform should be displayed In the Meas Setup dialog box for Meas3 Rise a b c click the HiLo t
50. Separate the assembly by carefully prying the Touch panel outer assembly from the Display inner assembly Insert a flat bladed screwdriver in the access notches to push out on the Touch panel assembly CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 27 Removal and Installation Procedures Access notches top and bottom 2 Touch panel 1 LCD module Figure 6 14 Touch panel amp LCD assembly removal 5 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the Display assembly Display Adapter Board Locate module to be removed Locate the fan assembly in the locator diagram Internal Modules Figure 6 7 page 6 18 Additional modules to be removed m Trim front panel amp top m Display assembly 2 Remove the Display Adapter Board See Figure 6 15 pages 6 28 a Disconnect J1 J7 J8 J9 and J10 cable from the Display Adapter board b Remove the two T 15 Torxdrive screws that secure the Display Adapter circuit board to the Display assembly Remove the Display Adapter from the assembly 3 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps a and b to reinstall the board 6 28 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures Display module Ge 110 0 J1 Q NES 18 DT ES adaptor board T 15 Torxdrive Back view screw 2 Fi
51. after doing steps I and 2 a module is clean upon inspection skip the remaining steps 3 Ifsteps 1 and 2 do not remove all the dust or dirt the instrument may be spray washed using a solution of 75 isopropyl alcohol by doing steps 4 through 8 4 Gain access to the parts to be cleaned by removing easily accessible shields and panels see Removal and Installation Procedures 5 Spray wash dirty parts with the isopropyl alcohol and wait 60 seconds for the majority of the alcohol to evaporate 6 Use hot 120 F to 140 F deionized water to thoroughly rinse them 7 Dry all parts with low pressure deionized air 8 Dry all components and assemblies in an oven or drying compartment using low temperature 125 F to 150 F circulating air CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 5 Maintenance 6 6 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures This subsection contains procedures for removal and installation of all mechani cal and electrical modules Preparation WARNING Before doing this or any other procedure in this manual read the N Safety Summary found at the beginning of this manual Also to prevent possible injury to service personnel or damage to this instrument s components read Installation in Section 2 and Preventing ESD in this section This subsection contains the following items Preparatory information that you need to properl
52. amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 37 Main Instrument 6 Setthe synthesized output to 1600 mV peak to peak 800 mV displayed 7 Set up the CSA8000 TDS8000 as follows a Select Default Setup from the Utilities menu on the menu bar at top of display b Select C1 from the Waveform Selector menu on the controls bar at the bottom of the display left corner c Inthe Trig Setup dialog box select External Direct select Metastablility Reject select Auto Mode d Inthe Vert Setup dialog box set Scale to 100 mV division set Offset to 0 e Inthe Horz Setup dialog box set Scale to 200 ps division m set Horizontal Reference to 0 set Position to 19 ns set All Timebases Mode to Short Term Jitter Test Follow this procedure to make the direct trigger level accuracy check 1 Inthe Meas Setup dialog box a make sure the channel under test is selected in the Source menu b select Meas 1 and then choose Select Meas Amplitude Amplitude 2 Adjust the synthesizer signal generator level until the amplitude measure ment readout on the instrument screen indicates the amplitude is 800 mV NOTE A stable trigger is one that is consistent that is one that results in a uniform regular display triggered on the selected slope positive or negative This display should not have its trigger point switching between opposite slopes nor should it roll across the screen The following step
53. and 80 04 precision 3 5 mm connector 80201 precision 2 4 mm connector 2 4 mm male to 2 92 mm K female adapter 011 0157 xx is supplied Number of input 80E01 1 channels 80202 80E03 80E 04 2 5004050 Vertical dynamic range 1 Vpp offset 500 mV Vertical operating range maximum 1 6 V Vertical nondestruct range 2 Maximum Input Voltage Vertical number of digitized bits Vertical sensitivity range Compensation temperature range DC voltage accuracy single point within 5 C of 80E01 2 0 V DC4peak AC 80202 80E03 80E 04 3 0 V DC peak 14 bits full scale The range of available full scale input settings 10 mV to 1 V full scale x 5 C about temperature where compensation was performed If compartment is changed on the mainframe a sampling module extender is employed or the length of the sampling module extender is changed the channel must be recompensated E2 mV 0 007 assigned offset 0 02 vertical value assigned offset compensated temperature DC vertical 10 voltage deviation from linear least squares fit Rise time4 Sampling module Rise time 80E01 7 ps typical 0 35 bandwidth risetime product 80E02 lt 28 ps 80E03 and 80E04 lt 17 5 ps CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 30200 Modules Specifications Table 1 12 Electrical sampling modules
54. arrow cursor It is recommended that you store this compensation result in the module as the Stored User values To store the compensation results in the module do the following procedure a Inthe Select Action section of the Compensation dialog box select Save b In the Storage section make sure User is selected Click the Execute button This saves the compensation results in the module 7 Click Close to close the Compensation dialog box 8 In the Vert Setup dialog box click the Optical gt gt button This displays fields for setting up the vertical optical parameters 9 Select a bandwidth or filter in the Vert Setup dialog box 10 Press the CLEAR DATA button on the TDS8000 or CSA8000 front panel NOTE If the Vert Setup dialog box covers the Histogram statistics readout at the right side of the display click in the Setups title bar and drag the dialog box to the left until you can see the Histogram statistics CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 85 Optical Sampling Modules 4 86 11 After a few seconds note the Mean and the Std Dev results displayed on the right side of the display for the selected bandwidth or filter The mean of the histogram is the dark level value and the standard deviation of the histogram is the maximum RMS vertical equivalent optical noise value Compare these values to the bandwidth or filter mean and standard deviation listed in Table 4 7 for the o
55. controlled by the PPC processor 80 01 80202 80 03 and The 80201 30202 and 80E03 and are two channel low noise 12 5 20 and Electrical Sampling 50 GHz samplers respectively The 80E02 sampling module has a 28 ps rise Modules time the 80E03 17 5 ps and the 80E01 7 ps For the 80E02 and 80E03 a single strobe delivered from the instrument mainframe to both acquisition channels controls the timing of the strobe assertion to both channels If channel to channel deskew is zero the sampling coincidence between channels is very close Acquisition deskew function is carried out by making separate acquisitions over individual acquisition windows For the 80E01 an individual strobe delivered from the instrument mainframe to the acquisition channel controls the timing of the strobe assertion to the channel Acquisition deskew function is carried out by moving the strobe timing for the channel to a unique acquisition window Each electrical channel features a Tekpobe Level 2 probe power connector for attachment of a real time probe The control of this probe is a mainframe function module calibration signals are derived from a 2 5 V precision voltage reference internal to the sampling module Settings derived from this reference are stored in a non volatile EEPROM in the sampling module although the responsibility for the execution of these settings is with the mainframe For major functional circuit blocks refer to Figure 9 3
56. within the operating temperature range specified The instrument must be in an environment with temperature altitude humidity and vibration within the operating limits described in these specifications The 80A01 Trigger Prescale Preamplifier module is a single channel 8 14 GHz AC coupled limiting preamplifier It increases the trigger sensitivity of the 8000 Series instruments to 200 up to 12 5 GHz typical Table 1 22 Module characteristics Specifications Mainframe interface Input and output Characteristics Tekprobe S ampling Level 3 Hot switching is not permitted Female SMA connectors Input power 10 dBm to 45 dBm AC coupled Output power 10 dBm maximum saturation Frequency Range 8 GHz to 14 GHz typical 80401 Enhancement 200 mV System Prescale Trigger Sensitivity toTrigger Sensitivity Output voltage 8 12 5 GHz input voltage 200 MV pk pk to 1 1 12 5 14 GHz input voltage 200 MV pk pk t0 1 Vok pk 1 Vpk pk typical Input output 50 AC coupled typical impedance Input output V5 WR 2 0 1 maximum from 8 14 GHz typical Power requirements 2 35 W CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 37 80A01 Module Specifications Table 1 22 Cont Module characteristics Specifications Characteristics Maximum input volt 1 1 Vpk pk age swing Noise figure 5 dB maximum 1 See Input Voltage Swing specificati
57. 0 uW div Set Position to 0 0 div Set Channel Offset to 0 0 W Click the Optical gt gt button in the lower left part of the Vet Setup dialog box Set Wavelength to 1550 nm Set the Bandwidth or Filter to the highest bandwidth setting available for the optical sampling module that you are testing 80 01 80 02 80 03 80 04 80 05 Filter to None Bandwidth to 20 000 GHz Filter to None Bandwidth to 30 000 GHz Filter to 2X GBE Bandwidth inactive Filter to None Bandwidth to 30 000 GHz Filter to None Bandwidth to 40 000 GHz Position the cursor in the title bar of the Setups dialog box and drag the box to the right side of the display 13 Use the Horizontal POSITION control to position the impulse at the first horizontal division This ensures that post impulse aberrations are included in the record See Figure 4 27 14 Adjust the attenuation of the variable optical attenuator until it produces an impulse pulse amplitude of 1 5 mWp p to 2 5 mWp p if you are testing an 80 01 80 02 or 80C04 Optical Sampling Module Adjust the attenuator until a 200 yWp p pulse amplitude is achieved if you are testing an 80C03 Optical Sampling Module Adjust the attenuator until a 10 mW p p pulse amplitude is achieved if you are testing an 80C05 optical sampling module 4 92 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Optical Sampling Modules Procedure Follow this procedure to make the minimum optical bandwidth a
58. 000 0 50 0 00 40 50 373 3 0 61 0 11 40 39 746 5 0 95 0 45 0 05 1119 7 1 52 1 02 0 52 1493 1 2 36 1 86 1 36 1866 3 3 50 3 00 2 50 2239 5 5 67 4 51 3 35 2488 3 7 25 5 71 4 17 2612 8 8 08 6 37 4 66 2986 0 10 74 8 54 6 35 3359 3 13 55 10 93 8 31 3732 6 16 41 13 41 10 41 4976 7 26 11 21 45 16 78 80C01 80C 02 OC 192 STM 64 MHz 08 80 04 80C 05 Frequency Lower Nominal Upper 0 000 0 85 0 00 0 85 1493 2 0 96 0 11 0 74 2986 0 1 30 0 45 0 40 4418 8 1 87 1 02 0 17 5972 4 2 11 1 86 1 01 7465 0 3 86 3 00 2 16 8958 0 6 19 4 51 2 83 9953 28 7 87 5 71 3 55 10451 2 8 75 6 37 3 99 11944 0 11 53 8 54 5 56 13437 2 14 45 10 93 7 41 14930 4 17 41 13 41 9 41 4 96 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Optical Sampling Modules Table 4 9 Reference receiver frequency response limits Cont Optical sampling module Limits 80C04 FEC10664 MHz dB Frequency Lower Nominal Upper 0 000 0 85 0 00 0 85 1493 2 0 96 0 11 0 74 2986 0 1 30 0 45 0 40 4418 8 1 87 1 02 0 17 5972 4 2 11 1 86 1 01 7465 0 3 86 3 00 2 16 8958 0 6 19 4 51 2 83 9953 28 7 87 5 71 3 55 10451 2 8 75 6 37 3 99 11944 0 11 53 8 54 5 56 13437 2 14 45 10 93 7 41 14930 4 17 41 13 41 9 41 FC1063 MHz dB Frequency Lower Nominal Upper 0 000 0 50 0 00 0 50 159 5 0 61 0 11 0 39 318 9 0 95 0 45 0 05 478 4 1
59. 10 664 9 95328 7 465G Hz 7 998GHz For convenience the scalar frequency response of the output amplitude for sinusoidal swept optical input has been interpreted from the published Bessel Thompson transfer function the frequencies scaled as described above and then listed below MHz dB Frequency Lower Nominal Upper 0 0 85 0 0 85 1599 8 0 96 0 11 0 74 3199 2 1 30 0 45 0 40 4798 6 1 87 1 02 0 17 6398 9 2 11 1 86 1 01 7998 0 3 86 3 00 2 16 9597 7 6 19 4 51 2 83 10664 0 7 87 5 71 3 55 11197 5 8 75 6 37 3 99 12796 9 11 53 8 54 5 56 14396 7 14 45 10 93 7 41 15996 5 17 41 13 41 9 41 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 29 80C00 Modules Specifications 1 30 Table 1 18 Optical modules Acquisition Cont Name 2 50 Gb s 2X GBE Reference Receiver setting frequency response GBE 1 25 606 Reference Receiver setting frequency response Characteristics Scalar frequency response falls within Industry Standard Bessel Thompson reference receiver boundary limits 2 50 Gb s frequency response boundary limits are derived by simply scaling all frequency values by 2X as described in IEEE 802 37 section 38 6 5 this section refers to ITU G 957 for tolerances For conve nience the scalar frequency response of the output amplitude for sinusoidal swept optical input has been interpreted from the Bessel Thompson transfer function and listed be
60. 4 kg 13 oz Overall dimensions Height 25 mm 1 0 in Width 79 mm 3 1 in Depth 135 5 3 Does connectors connector savers connector covers push buttons or lock down hardware protruding from the front or rear panels Construction material Chassis aluminum alloy Front panel plastic laminate Circuit boards glass laminate Cabinet sleeve aluminum Cabinet covers aluminum 1 16 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 80C00 Modules Specifications 80C00 Optical Modules This section contains specifications for the 80 01 80C02 80 03 80C04 80C05 and 80C06 Optical Sampling modules specifications are guaranteed unless noted as typical Typical specifications are provided for your conve nience but are not guaranteed Except for limits noted typical specifications that are marked with the symbol are checked in the Performance Verification section of the service manual All specifications apply to the 80 01 80C02 80C03 80C04 80 05 and 80C06 Optical Sampling modules unless noted otherwise To meet specifica tions three conditions must first be met m The instrument must have been calibrated adjusted at an ambient tempera ture between 20 C and 30 m The instrument must have been operating continuously for 20 minutes within the operating temperature range specified m The instrument must be in an environment with temperature
61. 52 1 02 0 52 637 9 2 36 1 86 1 36 797 4 3 50 3 00 2 50 956 8 5 67 4 51 3 35 1063 7 25 5 71 4 17 1116 8 08 6 37 4 66 1275 10 74 8 54 6 35 1435 13 55 10 93 8 31 1595 16 41 13 41 10 41 2126 26 11 21 45 16 78 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 97 Optical Sampling Modules Table 4 9 Reference receiver frequency response limits Cont Optical sampling module Filter Limits 80C03 GBE MHz dB Frequency Lower Nominal Upper 0 000 0 50 0 00 40 50 187 5 0 61 0 11 0 39 375 0 95 0 45 0 05 562 5 1 52 1 02 0 52 750 2 36 1 86 1 36 937 5 3 50 3 00 2 50 1125 5 67 4 51 3 35 1250 7 25 5 71 4 17 1312 5 8 08 6 37 4 66 1500 10 74 8 54 6 35 1687 5 13 55 10 93 8 31 1875 16 41 13 41 10 41 2500 26 11 21 45 16 78 80C 03 2X GBE 2 50 Gb s MHz dB Frequency Lower Nominal upper 0 000 0 50 0 00 0 50 375 0 61 0 11 0 39 750 0 95 0 45 0 05 1125 1 52 1 02 0 52 1500 2 36 1 86 1 36 1875 3 50 3 00 2 50 2250 5 67 4 51 3 35 2500 7 25 5 71 4 17 2625 8 08 6 37 4 66 3000 10 74 8 54 6 35 3375 13 55 10 93 8 31 3750 16 41 13 41 10 41 5000 26 11 21 45 16 78 NOTE Because of interpolation errors in the FFT calculation of the impulse response the 80C06 module is not tested like the modules in the previous section Instead we intergrate the impulse response to generate a step and then measure the 10 to 90 rise
62. 7 Press the SELECT ON OFF button on the 80COX Optical Sampling Module so that the adjacent indicator lights This turns on Channel 1 C1 on the 80COX CR Optical Sampling Module 8 In the Setup menu select Acquire and make the following changes in the Acq Setup dialog box a Select Average as the acquisition mode b Setthe number of samples to 64 Samples 9 Inthe Trig Setup dialog box do the following a Select External Direct for the trigger source b Select Auto for Mode Select the rising edge for Slope d Click the Set to 50 button to set the trigger point midway on the rising signal 10 In the Horiz Setup dialog box do the following a Setthe Scale to 1 000 ns div This setting will make it easier to initially locate the optical pulse later in the procedure b Setthe Position to 18 000 ns This setting will make it easier to locate the first optical pulse later in the procedure c Setthe Record Length to 2000 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 91 Optical Sampling Modules 11 In the Disp Setup dialog box do the following a In the Style section select Normal b Check Show Vectors NOTE If the Scale Position and Channel Offset control boxes are not displayed in the following step click the Basic gt gt button in the lower left part of the Vert Setup dialog box 12 In the Vert Setup dialog box do the the following a b Set the Scale to 500
63. 80E03 amp 80E04 none 1 2 mV C2 Vert scale 1 mV 80 02 none 800 uV 1 mV 80E03 amp 80E 04 none 1 2 mV TDR system reflected rise time 80E04 models only Cl TDR Polarity setto none 35 ps Set to none 35 ps C2 TDR Polarity setto none 35 ps Set to none 35 ps TDR system step response aberrations 80E04 models only C1 positive polarity 0 0 zone from 10 ns to 20 ps xi Hs from 400 ps to 5 ns 1 1 from 5 ns on ie C1 negative polarity zone from 10 ns to 20 ps2 3 3 from 400 ps to 5 ns3 3 3 from 5 ns on3 1 1 C2 positive polarity zone from 10 ns to 20 ps2 3 3 from 400 ps to 5 ns3 3 3 from 5 ns on3 1 1 C2 negative polarity zone from 10 ns to 20 ps 3 3 from 400 ps to 5 ns 3 3 from 5 ns on3 1 1 1 rise time of the 80 03 80203 80204 module is computed from the measured rise time See the procedure 2 Before step transition 3 After step transition CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 27 Performance Tests 80 00 Optical Modules Test Record Photocopy this and the next three pages and use them to record the performance test results for your 80 00 Test Record 80C00 Test Record Module Model 80C01 80C02 80C03 Module Serial Number Certificate Number Te
64. 83301 LAKE OSWEGO OR 97035 ROCKFORD IL 611045181 CONCORDVILLE PA 19331 NEW BRITAIN CT 06051 BEAVERTON OR 97077 7077 TOKYO 108 HILLSBORO OR 97124 TIGARD OR 97224 ALAMEDA CA 94501 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List Manufacturers cross index cont Mfr code TK1943 TK2172 TK2250 TK2338 TK2376 TK2491 TK2539 TK2548 TK2563 TK2582 TK2601 TK2647 TK6173 TK6181 TK6253 Manufacturer NEILSEN MANUFACTURING INC WYLE ELECTRONICS INC ARROW ELECTRONICS INC ACC MATERIALS CONDUCTIVE RUBBER TECH RIFOCS CORPORATION ROYAL CASE COMPANY INC XEROX CORPORATION REVTEK INC TUFF CAT USA LLC MAXTEK COMPONENTS CORPORATION INSTRUMENT SPECIALTIES CO INC MULTI FINELINE ELECTRONIX INC MFLEX IMC PLASTICS INC VOLEX INTERCONNECT INC Address 3501 PORTLAND RD NE 10300 SW NIMBUS AVE BLDG P SUITE B 9500 SW NIMBUS AVE BLDG E ED SNYDER BLDG 38 302 22125 17TH AVE SE SUITE 117 1340 FLYNN RD 315 S MONTGOMERY PO BOX 2231 14181 SW MILLIKAN WAY 4288 SE INTERNATIONAL WAY 814 HAYDEN MEADOWS DRIVE 13335 SW TERMAN RD PO BOX 428 C O TEMCO NW 1336 SE 51ST STREET DBA MFLEX 1301 N DYNAMICS STREET 19400 SW TETON AVE 646 CARRIBEAN DR CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules City state zip code SALEM OR 97303 PORTLAND OR 97223 BEAVERTON OR 97008 7163 BEAVERTON OR 97077 BOTHELL WA 98021 CAM
65. Dismiss the QAPlus Win diagnostics Select Exit in the File menu 6 Restart your UI application Select Program then the Tektronix TDSCSA8000 User Application and then the TDSCSA8000 Application in the Windows 98 Start menu End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 17 Brief Procedures 4 18 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Performance Tests This chapter contains performance verification procedures for the specifications marked with the symbol The following equipment or a suitable equivalent is required to complete these procedures The procedures are arranged in three sections Main Instrument Electrical Sampling Modules Optical Sampling Modules and the 80A01 Trigger Prescale Limiting Preamplifier Module They check all the characteristics that are designated as checked in Specifications Prerequisites The tests in this section comprise an extensive valid confirmation of perfor mance and functionality when the following requirements are met The cabinet must be installed on the instrument m You must have performed and passed the procedure Perform the Diagnos tics found on page 4 3 and the procedure Perform the Functional Tests found on page 4 7 WM compensation must have been done within the recommended calibration interval and at a temperature within 2 C of the present operating tempera ture If at the time you did the procedures Perform
66. GHz 40 GHz 44 GHz 48 GHz 50 GHz CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 71 Electrical Sampling Modules 80 01 Test Setup Install the test hookup to measure the 80E01 performance 1 Install the 80E01 module into the left most small module compartment of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument see Figure 4 22 2 Connect one end of the cable to the Synthesized signal generator Connect the remaining end of the cable to the 1088 attenuator 3 Connect the remaining end of the 10 dB attenuator to the 80E01 sampling module See Figure 4 22 on page 4 72 NOTE Use a torque wrench while connecting the adapters power sensor in this setup Use 8 0 3 inch pounds of torque CSA8000 TDS 8000 Synthesized signal generator bone 33 3 IC J o Channel 1 RF Output 10dB Attenuator Cable special power phase stability Figure 4 22 80E01 reference signals hookup 4 Set up the CSA8000 TDS8000 as follows a Select Cl from the Waveform Selector menu on the controls bar at the bottom of the display left corner b In the Trig Setup dialog box set Source to Internal Clock 200 KHz In the Acq Setup dialog box set Acquisition Mode to Envelope m under Stop After check Condition and select Average Complete from the pull down menu 4 72 5 8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampli
67. GPIB port of the instrument connect the remaining end to the GPIB port of a PC CAUTION Do not have any user interface dialogs active Dialogs such as Compensation System properties will prevent the instrument from responding to GPIB commands 4 Enter the following GPIB commands a SYSTem PROTect OFF b SYSTem PROPerties CH 1 8 SERialnum serialNum string Example SYST PROP CH3 SER 010123 NOTE For a 2 channel sampling module either channel can be specified in step b For an 80E01 sampling module use only the lower numbered channel number such as or CH3 SYSTem PROTect ON CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures 5 Verify the serial number change Pull down the Utility menu and then select System Properties Sampling Modules Click on the channel you want to verify eg C3 or C4 This display will confirm the sampling module serial number Optical Modules 1 Orient the optical sampling module Set the optical sampling module so its left side is down on the work surface and its right side is facing you 2 Remove the cover See Figure 6 37 a Remove the seven T 10 Torxdrive screws 80C02 has eleven T 10 Torxdrive screws four 10 Torxdrive screws on the top cover that secure the cover to the module chassis b Lift the rear of the cover up and slide back about inch then lift the non optical connector side up toward the optical
68. Locate module to be removed Locate the NLX Board in the locator diagram Internal Modules Figure 6 8 page 6 8 Additional modules to be removed m Trim all m Bottom cover m Left and Right covers Remove the NLX Board assembly See Figure 6 24 page 6 41 Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its bottom 1s down on the work surface and its top panel is facing you a Remove the two 1 15 Torxdrive screws that secure the floppy disk drive assembly into the front chassis Slide the floppy drive assembly with cable attached out toward the rear of the instrument Place floppy drive assembly on top of the hard CD drive bracket Remove the five T 15 Torxdrive screws that secure NLX board assembly to the chassis Remove the five T 15 Torxdrive screws that secure NLX board assembly to the rear chassis Grasp the front edge of the NLX board assembly and pull up on the assembly to disconnect the Riser Adapter from the PC Processor board s edge connector Remove the NLX board assembly from the instrument CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures Hard CD drive bracket Place floppy drive assembly on top of hard CD drive bracket NLX board lt 4 SES assembly Riser adapter board Leave floppy drive cable attached Remove floppy drive assembly from front chassis
69. Modules Main Instrument 5 Setthe synthesized signal generator frequency to 2 GHz 500 ps period 6 Setthe synthesized output to 1600 mV peak to peak 800 mV displayed 7 Make the following settings to the CSA8000 TDS8000 a Select Default Setup from the Utilities menu on the menu bar at top of display b Select C1 from the Waveform Selector menu on the controls bar at the bottom of the display left corner In the Trig Setup dialog box select External Prescaler select Metastablility Reject W select Auto Mode d In the Vert Setup dialog box set Scale to 100 mV division set Offset to 0 e Inthe Horz Setup dialog box set Scale to 200 ps division W set Position to 19 ns m set Horizontal Reference to 0 set All Timebases Mode to Short Term Jitter Test Follow this procedure to make the prescaled trigger sensitivity check 1 In the Meas Setup dialog box a make sure the channel under test is selected in the Source menu b select Meas 1 and then choose Select Meas Amplitude Amplitude select Meas 2 and then choose Select Meas gt Timing gt Frequency 2 Setthe signal generator frequency to 2 0 GHz 3 Adjust the synthesizer signal generator level until the amplitude measure ment readout on the instrument screen indicates the amplitude is 800 mV for the 2 GHz check For the 3 5 and 10 GHz checks adjust for 600 mV 4 Adjust the Horizontal Scale to allow two full periods to
70. Modules Optical Sampling Modules a Select External Direct for the trigger source b Select Normal for Mode Select the rising edge for Slope d Click the Set to 50 button to set the trigger point midway on the rising signal 9 Inthe Horiz Setup dialog box do the following a Setthe Scale to 1 000 ns div This setting will make it easier to initially locate the optical pulse later in the procedure b Setthe Position to 30 000 ns This setting will make it easier to locate the first optical pulse later in the procedure Setthe Record Length to 2000 d Setthe timebase to short term jitter 10 In the Disp Setup dialog box do the following a Inthe Style section select Normal b Check Show Vectors 11 In the Vert Setup dialog box do the the following a Setthe Scale to 500 0 uW div b Set Position to 0 0 div c Set Channel Offset to 0 0 W d Click the Optical gt gt button in the lower left part of the Vet Setup dialog box e Set Wavelength to 1550 nm f Setthe Bandwidth to 50 GHz 12 Use the Horizontal POSITION control to position the impulse at the second horizontal division 13 Use the Horizontal POSITION and SCALE controls to decrease the Horizontal SCALE to 20 ps div to position the impulse at the second horizontal division 14 Use the Vertical SCALE control to increase the vertical scale to 2 mW div 15 Adjust the attenuation of the variable optical attenuator to an impulse a
71. NAME PLATE COMPANY OADN8 DELTA PRODUCTS CORP DPZ 0GZV8 HUBER amp SUHNER INC 0 9 9 GEROME MFG CO INC 0 01 STAUFFER SUPPLY CO 0 05 NORTH STAR NAMEPLATE INC 0 25 Q amp D PLASTICS INC 12136 PHC INDUSTRIES INC 16179 M A COM INC 1AW87 LEWIS SCREW CO 1DM20 PARLEX CORP 20944 ANRITSU COMPANY 22526 FCI BERG ELECTRONICS INC 22670 GM NAMEPLATE INCORPORATED 24931 FCI BERG ELECTRONICS INC 26003 MARTEK POWER MDI Address CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPT PO BOX 3608 SEMICONDUCTOR GROUP 13500 N CENTRAL EXPRESSWAY PO BOX 655303 3600 SUNSET AVENUE 120 SHERMAN AVE 9175 DEERING AVE SEMICONDUCTOR PRODUCTS SECTOR 5005 E MCDOWELL ROAD 2904 ORCHARD PARKWAY SOUTH 6001 THOMAS MALLEN RD 3000 COLUMBIA HOUSE BLVD SUITE 1 20 PO BOX 39100 5825 N TRIPP AVE P O BOX 804238 3191 CASITAS AVENUE 4405 CUSHING PARKWAY 19 THOMPSON DRIVE PO BOX 737 403 NORTH MAIN 810 SE SHERMAN 5750 NE MOORE COURT 1812 16TH AVENUE PO BOX 487 1643 HADDON AVE PO BOX 1448 1011 PAWTUCKER BLVD PO BOX 3295 4300 SOUTH RACINE AVENUE 7 INDUSTRIAL WAY 685 J ARVIS DRIVE 825 OLD TRAIL ROAD 2040 15TH AVE WEST RF COAXIAL DIV 2100 EARLYWOOD DR PO BOX 547 4115 SPENCER STREET CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules The table titled Manufacturers Cross Index shows codes names and addresses of manufacturers or vendors of components listed in the parts list City state zip code HARRISBURG PA 17105 3608 D
72. OC192 There is one Reference Receiver setup selectable for 9 95328 Gb s SONET SDH standard There is no clock recovery option available For major functional circuit blocks refer to Figure 9 13 on page 9 13 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Theory of Operation 80C06 Optical Sampling 80C06 module is designed to test long wavelength 1100 1650nm signals Module This module is intended to be used as a test and measurement tool for high bandwidth telecommunications with its high optical bandwidth gt 50 GHz m 50 GHz Ther is only a single lowpass bandwidth selection available no Reference Receiver setups selectable There is no clock recovery option available For major functional circuit blocks refer to Figure 9 14 on page 9 14 80A01 Trigger Prescale 80A01 module is designed to increase the sensitivity of the prescale trigger Preamplifier Modules input of the CSA8000 TDS8000 instruments to x 200 mVpy py The major function block of the module an high sensitivity high gain RF amplifier The input and output to this amplifier are routed to two identical SMA female connectors labelled Input and Output at the module front panel The module receives power from the main instrument through a single connector at the rear of the module The power LED indicates the module is receiving power through the interface connector For major functional circuit blocks refer to Figure 9 15 on
73. STATIC ISOLATION UNIT 80E0X STANDARD ACCESSORIES MANUAL TECH SAMPLING MODULE USER TERMINATOR COA SHORT CIRCUIT SMA MALE 80E01 TERMINATOR COA SHORT CIRCUIT SMA MALE 80E02 80E03 AND 80E04 ADPTR RF PRCN 2 4MM OR 1 85MM MALE TO 2 92MM FEMALE 80E0X OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ASSY SSP ELEC 1 METER LONG EXTENDER ASSY SSP ELEC 2 METER LONG EXTENDER ATTENUATOR FIX 2 1 ATTENUATION 50 OHM SERIES SMA CONNECTORS ATTENUATOR FIX 5 1 ATTENUATION 50 OHM SERIES SMA CONNECTORS 80 0 STANDARD ACCESSORIES MANUAL TECH OPTICAL MODULE USER 80 0 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ADAPTER D4 TFS3030 AD4 20 ADAPTER BICONIC TFS3030 AB1 25 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mfr code 20944 060D9 060D9 02660 98291 16179 16179 64537 80009 TK2601 TK2548 04956 80009 80009 80009 TK2548 0GZV8 0GZV8 20944 060D9 060D9 16179 16179 TK2548 TK2491 TK2491 Mfr part number 34VKF50 012 1568 00 012 1569 00 131 7053 50 674 6324 990 2082 4573 06 2082 4573 14 02935 016 1791 00 067 1338 00 071 0438 00 MHH2064AT DL 11 P6202 SIU 800 071 0434 00 645 50 0 1 645 50 0 1 34VKF50 012 1568 00 012 1569 00 2082 4573 06 2082 4573 14 071 0435 00 AD4 20 ABI 25 10 21 Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Cont Fig amp index Tektronix Serial no Serial no Mfr number part number effective discontd Qty
74. Tests Follow this procedure to make the aberration checks 1 Check aberrations in the range of 10 ns to 20 ps before the edge aberrations within 4 396 a b Set the Horizontal Position to 0 minimum Change the Horizontal Scale to 50 ps division while adjusting Horizon tal Position to keep the rising edge of the first step waveform on screen Press the front panel FINE button to turn it on Adjust the Horizontal Position knob so the waveform crosses the center vertical graticule at the 10 amplitude point of the rising edge Since the waveform is 2 major divisions high at 500 mp div the waveform should be crossing the center vertical graticule at 9 minor divisions below the center horizontal graticule This defines the ending reference point for pre transition aberration measurements Press the FINE button to turn it off In the Meas Setup dialog box m select Measl then choose Select Meas gt Amplitude gt Max m selectthe Region tab m set Gate G2 to 4696 m turn Gates on check In the Meas Setup dialog box select Meas2 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 79 Electrical Sampling Modules 4 80 m make sure the channel under test is selected in the Source menu choose Select Meas gt Amplitude gt Min m select the Region tab set Gate G2 to 46 W set Gates on check The Max and Min measurements are now set to include the region of 250 ps to 20 ps before the ed
75. a ow gt wn CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Figure 6 10 Front panel assembly removal Removal and Installation Procedures 6 24 Front Panel Board Front Panel Keypad Black stripe toward connector Screwdriver Figure 6 11 J1 flex cable connector removal 1 Locate module to be removed Locate the Front Panel assembly Figure 6 10 page 6 23 Additional modules to be removed m Front Panel Knobs m Trim front panel m Front Panel assembly 2 Remove the Front Panel board See Figure 6 12 page 6 25 a Remove the eight T 15 Torxdrive screws that secure the Front panel board to the Front panel assembly b Pry the board up off the alignment studs Place a flat bladed screwdriver in the pry point access holes to pry the board up from the assembly c Remove the board from the assembly 3 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps a through c to reinstall the front panel board E Locate module to be removed Locate the Front Panel assembly Figure 6 10 page 6 23 Additional modules to be removed CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures 2 Remove the Front Panel keypad See Figure 6 12 page 6 25 a stud Front Panel Knobs Trim front panel Front Panel assembly Front Panel Board Pull on each of the keypad support guides to separate the keypad from the Front panel board Use a pair of tweezers or eq
76. accessories that ship with the instrument not those shipped with any electrical or optical sampling modules ordered Each sampling module ships individually in their own package Consult the User manual found in the shipping package for any module you ordered m 80E01 80 02 80 03 amp 80204 Electrical Sampling Module User Manual m 80 00 Series Optical Sampling Modules User Manual m 80A01 Trigger Prescale Preamplifier Module User Manual Partno 071 0434 00 Partno 071 0435 01 Part no 071 0438 00 Table 7 2 Standard accessories Item m Certificate of Traceable Calibration for product at initial shipment m Business reply card m 1 Windows 98 compatible keyboard m 1 Windows 98 compatible mouse m 1 Instrument front cover 1 Accessory pouch m 2 Touchscreen styluses m 1ESD wrist strap with 6 foot coiled cord CSA8000 8 TDS8000 Online Help part of application software CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 548000 amp TDS8000 Reference m CSA8000 8 TDS8000 Programmer Online Guide part of application software CSA8000 amp TDS8000 System Rebuild CD includes a Certificate of authenticity for software and a restore license m Power cord Part number Not Orderable Not Orderable 119 6297 00 119 6298 00 200 4519 00 016 1441 00 119 6107 00 006 3415 04 NotApplicable 071 0433 00 071 0437 00 NotApplicable 063 3415 XX Order by Option Number 7 2 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instrument
77. altitude humidity and vibration within the operating limits described in these specifications NOTE Sampling Interface refers to both the electrical sampling module interface and the optical module interface unless otherwise specified Table 1 17 Optical modules Descriptions Name Characteristics 80C01 Long wavelength 1100 nm 1650 nm Unamplified O E converter with two user selectable optical bandwidths 12 5 GHz gt 20 GHz or three user selectable reference receiver responses OC 12 STM 4 for 622 08 Mb s Sonet S DH standards OC 48 STM 16 for 2 488 Gb s Sonet SDH standards and OC 192 STM 64 for 9 953 Gb s Sonet SDH standards Long wavelength 1100 nm 1650 nm Unamplified O E converter with three user selectable optical bandwidths 12 5 GHz 20 GHz gt 30 GHz or user selectable reference receiver response OC 192 STM 64 for 9 953 Gb s Sonet SDH standards 80C02 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 17 80C00 Modules Specifications Table 1 17 Optical modules Descriptions Cont Name Characteristics 80C03 Broad wavelength 700 nm 1650 nm Amplified O E converter with optical bandwidth of gt 2 5 GHz The 2 5 Gb s OC 48 STM 16 and 2 5 GHz modes all use a physical path that has OC48 STM 16 reference receiver type response Two other selectable reference receiver responses FC1063 for the 1 0625 Gb s fibre channel standard and GBE forthe 1 25 60 5 gigabit ethernet
78. and electrostatic discharge Never apply a DC or peak voltage greater than the Maximum Input Voltage Swing see page 1 38 of your module Only operate the instrument and module in a static controlled environment TRIGGER PRESCALE LIMITING PREAMPLIFIER 8 14 GHZ OUTPUT INPUT ae AC COUPLED 500 1 1 V pk pk MAX Output connector Input connector Figure 2 8 80A01 module front panel CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 2 27 Operating Instructions Signal Connector Connect a trigger signal that you need to preamplify to the input connector Connect the preamplified output signal from the output connector to the prescale trigger input of the oscilloscope Connector Care Refer to Connector Care on page 2 24 2 28 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Theory of Operation This section describes the electrical operation of the instrument and sampling modules Figure 9 1 on page 9 1 shows the module interconnections Logic Conventions The instrument contains many digital logic circuits This manual refers to these circuits with standard logic symbols and terms Unless otherwise stated all logic functions are described using the positive logic convention the more positive of the two logic levels is the high 1 state and the more negative level is the low 0 state Signal states may also be described as true meaning their active state or false meaning their nonactive
79. bottom of the display left corner In the Trig Setup dialog box set Trigger Source to Internal Clock 200 KHz In the Acq Setup dialog box W set Acquisition Mode to Sample m under Stop After check Condition and select Number of Acquisi tions from the pull down menu Enter 96 for the number of acquisitions In the Horz Setup dialog box set Record length to 1000 points set Scale to 1 ps division W set Position to O this will revert to a minium non zero value m set Horizontal Reference to 0 In the Vert Setup dialog box set Scale to 2 mV division if testing with an 80E01 module set to 1 mV division for all other modules W set Offset to 0 mV Test Follow this procedure to make the Random noise checks 1 WfmbDatabase menu click Display Database select 2 Histogram menu select vertical Enable Histogram 4 62 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Electrical Sampling Modules 3 Position the right and left side histogram window to the cover all the horizontal divisions 4 5 6 7 8 9 80 01 80 02 80E03 80E04 lt lt lt A Position the top histogram window three divisions above the center line Position the bottom histogram window three divisions below the center line Press the CLEAR DATA button on the front panel Press the RUN STOP button on the front panel Record the noise V STD DEV reading Check noise V fo
80. bulb temperature of 29 C at or below 50 C upper limits derates to 25 relative humidity at 50 C non condensing Nonoperating no floppy disk in floppy drive 5 to 90 with a maximum wet bulb temperature of 29 C at or below 60 C upper limits derates to 20 relative humidity at 60 C non condensing Altitude Operating 3 048 m 10 000 ft Nonoperating 12 190 m 40 000 ft Electrostatic dis Up to 8 kV with no change to control settings or impairment of normal charge susceptibility operation Up to 15 kV with no damage that prevents recovery of normal operation Table 1 5 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Power consumption and cooling Characteristics 600 watts Six fans with speed regulated by internal temperature sensors Specifications Power requirements Cooling requirements A 2 51 mm clearance must be maintained on the bottom left side and right side of the instrument for forced air flow It should never be operated on a bench with the feet removed nor have any object placed nearby where it may be drawn against the air vents No clearance is required on the front back and top 1 6 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules System Specifications Table 1 6 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Display Specifications Characteristics Display type 211 2 mm wide x 1 58 4 mm high 264 mm 10 4 inch diagonal liquid crystal active matrix color display LCD Display resolution 6
81. edge of the fan heatsink down on the microprocessor and fasten the remaining bracket to the assembly Connect the fan power cable J401 from the NLX board CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures Fan and heatsink Microprocessor Push down and pull out to release clamp Nu 401 power cable Push down and pull out to release clamp See ge 5 CS E d Figure 6 26 Microprocessor removal CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 45 Removal and Installation Procedures 6 46 PC Processor Board 1 Locate module to be removed Locate the PC Processor Board assembly in the locator diagram Internal Modules Figure 6 8 page 6 19 Remove the following in this order Trim all Bottom cover Left and Right covers Hard Disk and CD Drive Floppy Disk Drive NLX Board Front and Rear Power Distribution Boards Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its bottom is down on the work surface and its top panel is facing you Remove the PC Processor board assembly See Figure 6 27 page 6 47 a b Disconnect J190 and J691 ribbon cables from the PC processor board Remove the nine T 15 Torxdrive screws securing the PC processor board to the chassis support Remove the five T 15 Torxdrive screws securing the PC processor board assembly to the rear chassis Remove the PC Processor Board See Figure 6 27 page 6 4
82. extensive confirmation of performance is desired do the Perfor mance Tests beginning on page 4 19 after doing the procedures just referenced Advantages These procedures add direct checking of warranted specifica tions They require more time to perform and suitable test equipment is required See Equipment Required beginning on page 4 19 If you are not familiar with operating this instrument read the CSA8000 TDS8000 user manuals These manuals contain instructions that will acquaint you with the use of the front panel controls and the menu system CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 1 Performance Verification Procedures 4 2 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Brief Procedures There are three procedures in this section that provide a quick way to confirm basic functionality and proper adjustment m Perform the Diagnostics Perform the Compensation m Perform the Functional Tests These procedures require little or no test equipment see the description on page 4 1 for information on when to use these procedures Perform the Diagnostics Do the following steps to run the internal routines that confirm basic functional ity and proper adjustment Equipment required None Prerequisites First all sampling modules to be diagnosed must be installed as outlined in their user manuals Second power on the instrument and allow a 20 minute warm up before doing this proced
83. generator 50 MHz to 1 GHz 1 ppm frequency accuracy Digital Multimeter with 6 5 plus digits PC compatible computer with National Instruments GPIB Controller card and software running Windows 95 98 or NT National Instruments USB GPIB Controller card for Windows 98 and National Instruments NI 488 2 for Windows software to install in the instrument 1 Divider Power 50 SMA male Tektronix 015 0565 00 Adapter SMA male to 2 SMA female Tektronix 015 1016 00 Adapter SMA male to BNC female Tektronix 015 0554 00 Adapter BNC to dual banana plug Tektronix 103 0095 00 Coaxial cables 500 male to male SMA connectors 3ea GPIB cables GPIB cable 1 m minimum length Tektronix 002 0991 01 1 1 Depending on other USB devices attached to the instrument a USB hub may also be required Consult your National Instruments documentation for more information Set the National Instruments GPIB Interface command software to allow GPIB communications between the PC controller and CSA8000 TDS8000 device under test DUT Before you can execute the adjustment program you need to set up and configure the instrumentation Make connections according to the following diagrams See Figure 5 1 To perform this procedure you must have the specific equipment listed in Table 5 2 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Adjustment Procedures Main Instrument Adjustments Once the ins
84. instrument application a Display the Task Manager by pressing CTRL ALT and Delete b Select TDS7000 and then touch End Task c Display the Task Manager by pressing CTRL ALT and Delete d Select Windowsscopeservices and then touch End TAsk Exit all other applications and exit all windows Click Start Programs gt QAPlus Win QAPlus Win Touch OK and select the tests you want to perform m To restore the instrument to normal operating condition reboot the instrument after QAPlus Win diagnostic tests are complete instrument Diagnostics If the instrument passes all the QAPlus Win tests the primary tree calls for you to run the instrument Diagnostics The instrument Diagnostics are a comprehensive software test that checks the functionality of the instrument If the instrument Diagnostics test fails the instrument is defective To run the instrument Diagnostics do the following steps 1 Turn off all other applications 2 From the menu bar touch Utilities and then select Instrument Diagnostics Diagnostics The instrument executes a set of internal diagnostics at every power up The results can be viewed from the Utilities gt Diagnostics dialog To execute diagnostics Refer to Perform Diagnostics on page to 4 3 Firmware Updates Firmware updates are easy to do Simply install the firmware CD in your instrument and follow the displayed instructions or the instructions that accompa ny the CD If you
85. menu switches are also read by the PPC processor board The processor sends any changes in menu selections to the processor system The ON STBY switch is one of the menu switches However it is not read by the front panel board but passes through the front panel board to the low voltage power supply The hard drive and CD Rom provides access to stored waveform data and to load software to customized your instrument with your measurement needs The GPIB allows for external control of the instrument You can make hardcopies on the GPIB RS 232 and Centronics ports Other ports from the front panel board PC cardbus x 2 cal adjust lock Outputs from the NLX board SVGA USB 1 sound serial 2 parallel Ethernet mouse keyboard The low voltage power supply is a switching power converter with active power factor control It supplies power to all of the circuitry in the instrument The principal POWER switch located on the rear panel controls all power to the instrument including the Low Voltage Power Supply The ON STBY switch CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Theory of Operation located on the front panel also controls all of the power to the instrument except for part of the circuitry in the Low Voltage Power Supply The power supply sends a power fail PF warning to the processor system if the power is going down Fans The fan assembly provides forced air cooling for the instrument The fans are
86. on the CSA8000 TDS8000 and set it up as follows a Select C3 from the Waveform Selector menu on the controls bar at the bottom of the display left corner b Inthe Vert Setup dialog box set External Attenuation to 6 dB Then set Scale to 100 mV div and Offset to 0 0V c Inthe Trig Setup dialog box select External Prescale Clock d the Horz Setup dialog box CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 80A01 Trigger Preamplifier Module set Scale to 50 ps division set Position to 0 set Horizontal Reference to 0 e Inthe Acq Setup dialog box set Acquisition Mode to Average and the average count to 16 samples Test Follow this procedure to make the enhanced trigger sensitivity check 1 Set the sinewave generator output voltage to 10 dBm Set the generator output to on 2 For each frequency in the list that follows check that the amplitude readout is as listed Frequency Setting Meas Pk Pk Readout 8 GHz 779 9 GHz 800 mV 10 GHz 800 mV 11 GHz gt 1 05 12 GHz gt 1 05 End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 113 80A01 Trigger Preamplifier Module 4 114 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Adjustment Procedures This chapter contains an adjustment procedure for your instrument The purpose of this procedure is to return the instrument conformance to its specifications Adjustment Interval
87. optical bandwidth limits 4 95 Table 4 9 Reference receiver frequency response limits 4 96 Table 4 10 Clock recovery settings 4 107 Table 5 1 Adjustments required for module replaced 5 1 Table 5 2 Required equipment and materials 5 2 Table 6 1 External inspection check list 6 3 Table 6 2 Internal inspection checklist 6 4 Table 6 3 Tools required for module removal 6 8 Table 6 4 Failure symptoms and possible causes 6 67 Table 6 5 Power supply voltages 6 73 Table 6 6 Action required for module replaced 6 76 Table 6 7 BIOS error messages 6 77 Table 6 8 Beep codes 6 79 Table 7 1 Available sampling modules 7 1 Table 7 2 Standard accessories 7 2 Table 7 3 Optional accessories 7 3 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules General Safety Summary Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures While using this product you may need to access
88. page 4 59 Calculate Y ax b for all x Calculate the deviation of Measured V Y for all x CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Electrical Sampling Modules Table 4 3 Data for calculation of gain and linearity Input Vin Measured upper V mV Deviation limit Vin m 450 350 250 150 50 50 150 250 350 450 NR NRI NINE E pim 27568 L1 JL Lig qp __ e e 10 Change all settings in the setup to Channel 2 and then repeat steps 1 through 9 until all DC vertical voltage accuracy single point compensated calcula tions listed in Table 4 3 on page 4 61 are checked End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 61 Electrical Sampling Modules Random noise displayed These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the signal acquisition and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications Refer to Table 1 12 page 1 12 Equipment No external equipment required required Prerequisites As listed on page 4 19 and under Prerequisites on page 4 53 Setup No test equipment hook up is required 1 Set up CSA8000 TDS8000 as follows a Select C1 from the Waveform Selector menu on the controls bar at the
89. parity error occurred on an off board card This error is followed by an address 6 77 Troubleshooting Table 6 7 BIOS error messages Cont Error message Explanation On Board Parity Error A parity error occurred in onboard memory This error is followed by an address Parity Error A parity error occurred in onboard memory at an unknown address NVRAM CMOS PASSWORD cleared by J umper NVRAM CMOS and passwords have been cleared The system should be powered down and the jumper removed CTRL N Pressed CMOS is ignored and is cleared User must enter Setup BIOS Beep Codes 6 78 When an error occurs during the power on self test POST the BIOS displays an error message describing the problem The BIOS also issues a beep code one long tone followed by two short tones during POST if the video configuration fails a faulty video card or no card installed or if an external ROM module does not properly checksum to zero An external ROM module for example a video BIOS can also issue audible errors usually consisting of one long tone followed by a series of short tones For more information on the beep codes check the documentation for the device There are several POST routines that issue a POST terminal error and shut down the system if they fail Before shutting down the system the terminal error handler issues a beep code see Table 6 8 signifying the test point error writes the err
90. recovery optical sensitivity range and recovered clock timing jitter hookup 4 104 Figure 4 30 Example of the display when the clock signal from the 80COX CR Optical Sampling Module is not synchronous with the data rate input from the pulse pattern generator Note the unstable washed out clock signal Compare this with Figure 4 31 in which the clock signal is synchronized 4 108 Figure 4 31 Example of the display when the clock signal from the 80COX CR Optical Sampling Module is synchronous with the data rate input from the pulse pattern generator Note the stable clock signal waveform Compare this with Figure 4 30 in which the clock signal is not synchronized e e a re e era et tins 4 109 Figure 4 32 Example of the display zoomed in to 10 mV div and 10 ps div at the crossing point 50 on the recovered clock signal C3 4 110 Figure 4 33 80 00 test 4 112 Figure 5 1 Adjustment setup using the DMM 5 3 Figure 5 2 Adjustment setup using the signal generator 5 5 Figure 6 1 Knob removal 6 9 Figure 6 2 Trim 1 6 11 Figure 6 3 Bottom cover removal 6 12 Figure 6 4 Cover 1 6 14 Figure 6 5 Cover 1
91. sampling module when following these instructions NOTE Failing to install the 50 ohm terminations on 80 00 sampling module input connectors can yield erroneous compensation failures or results 2 Verify that the compensation routines pass a The compensation may take several minutes to complete Verify that Pass appears as Status for the main instrument and for all sampling modules listed in the Compensation dialog box when compensation completes If instead Fail appears as Status rerun the compensation If Fail status continues after rerunning compensation and you have allowed warm up to occur the module or main instrument may need service If you want to save the compensation constants generated by this compensation click the Save option button under Select Action Click the Execute button to save the compensation End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Brief Procedures Perform the Functional Tests These procedures use the DC CALIBRATION OUTPUT and the INTERNAL CLOCK OUTPUT connectors to further verify that the instrument functions properly An SMA cable and a 10x attenuator are required to do these test procedures The purpose of these procedures is to confirm that the instrument functions properly The equipment required is intentionally kept to a minimum STOP These procedures verify functions that is they verify that the instrument features operate They do not v
92. serial number string e g 010100 SYST PROT ON 4 These commands take effect immediately and can be verified by viewing the mainframe properties Utilities gt Sysem Properties CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 79 Troubleshooting Update Restore the NLX Board CMOS If the CMOS parameters become corrupted restore the CMOS memory using the following procedures CAUTION Only install CMOS parameters from Tektronix CMOS parameters from other manufactures may make your instrument inoperable This procedure will allow the you to restore the CMOS settings with or without LAN local area network Resnonet command will restore the CMOS with the LAN disabled Resnet command will restore restore the CMOS with the LAN enabled If the instrument is running normally or in safe mode 1 2 6 80 Select Run from the Start menu From the Run dialog box type one of the following commands C resnet to enable the network C resnonet to disable the network Restart the computer and hold down F2 while it reboots to get into the BIOS Setup Utility menu In the Bios Setup Utility menu a select Advanced using the right arrow b select Peripheral Configuration using the down arrow press Enter Confirm the LAN Device configurations m Enabled if resnet was run m Disable if resnonet was run Press CTRL ALT Delete to reboot the computer CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments an
93. setting lt 25 ps OC 192 setting 47 ps 10 ps 80C06 module 50 GHz setting lt 9 6 ps CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 23 80C00 Modules Specifications 1 24 Table 1 18 Optical modules Acquisition Cont Name Time domain vertical response aberrations For peak optical signal input 5 MWpp except 80C03 200 uWpp Characteristics 80C01 OC 12 STM 4 setting lt 5 all typical OC 48 STM 16 setting lt 5 OC 192 STM 64 setting lt 10 12 5 GHz setting lt 10 20 GHz setting lt 15 80C02 OC 192 STM 64 setting lt 10 all typical 12 5 GHz setting lt 15 20 GHz setting lt 20 30 GHz setting lt 30 80C03 All settings lt 5 p to p typical 80C04 OC 192 STM 64 setting lt 10 all typical 10 66 Gb s setting lt 10 20 GHz setting lt 20 30 GHz setting lt 30 80005 0 192 setting lt 5 2 5 typical 20 GHz setting lt 10 5 typical 30 GHz setting lt 10 5 typical 40 GHz setting lt 15 10 typical 80C 06 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 50 GHz setting lt 10 5 typical 80C00 Modules Specifications Table 1 18 Optical modules Acquisition Cont Name Characteristics Vertical equivalent 80C01 module Maximum RMS Typical RMS8 optical noise OC 12 5TM 4 setting lt 12 lt 8 0 OC 48 STM 16 setting lt 12 lt 8 uW ms OC 192 S TM 64 setting 12 uWms lt 8 uWims 1
94. the Diagnostics and Perform the Functional Tests you also did the Perform the Compensation procedure page 4 5 consider this prerequisite met The instrument must have been last adjusted at an ambient temperature between 20 C and 30 C must have been operating for a warm up period of at least 20 minutes and must be operating at an ambient tempera tures as follows These procedures cover all instrument models Please disregard checks that do not apply to the specific model you are testing Equipment Required Procedures starting on page 4 33 use external traceable signal sources to directly check warranted characteristics Table 4 1 lists the required equipment CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 19 Performance Tests Table 4 1 Equipment Required Item number and description l Digital multimeter Minimum requirements Four wire ohm meter 0 2596 accuracy for volt and ohm measurements Part number or model Keithley 2000 20 2 DC power supply Variable amplitude to 104 V accuracy to 0 196 Data Precision 8200 3 Calibration step generator Calibration fixture sampling module cal unit Tektronix part number 067 1338 0X 4 Terminator cap Shorting 34 GHz precision 3 5 mm female Tektronix part number 011 0150 00 5 Cable delay coaxial Coaxial cable 50 Q 500 ps with 3 5 mm male Tektronix part number 015 0564 00 each end 6 0 inch length 6 Airline
95. the RUN STOP button on the CSA8000 TDS8000 front panel 3 Check that the measured fall time reflected rise time is lt 35 ps for the positive edge polarity 4 Inthe TDR Setup dialog box change C1 polarity to negative edge pictured as a falling slope NOTE Since this display is in units of rho the waveform will not invert when the edge polarity is changed so the waveform will not appear to change significantly 5 Press the CLEAR DATA button 6 Press the RUN STOP button 7 Check that the measured fall time reflected rise time is lt 35 ps for the negative edge polarity 4 76 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Electrical Sampling Modules Do not create a new hh file add new methods to the existing files Need to keep the same Topic IDs to make sure the they have the same IDs as the engineering s software 8 Repeat the Setup and Test sections for channel 2 End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 77 Electrical Sampling Modules TDR system step response aberrations 80E04 These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the TDR system 80E04 only and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications Refer to Table 1 13 page 1 14 Equipment Terminator 50 coaxial terminator K male Item 7 required Prerequisites As listed on page 4 19 and under Prerequisites on page 4 53 Setup Install th
96. the rear of the instrument then lift up and out of the instrument 4 Reinstallation Do in reverse order substeps g through 1 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 49 Removal and Installation Procedures T 15 Torxdrive J 6 ribbon cable Ps screw 6 disconnect from Large T 15 Torxdrive module circuit board long screw 3 10 ribbon cable disconnect from J 930 Acquisition processor board 277 circuit board 25 connector for trigger probe power ribbon cable jJ 6 J 18 coaxial cables disconnect from S mall module interface board LP SMB cables disconnect from trigger hybrid Small module interface board Small module interface board Coaxial cables disconnect from front panel connectors Large Module Interface circuit board lt Trigger prescale SMA nut DC calibration output disconnect coaxial cable from back of connector 25 trigger probe power ribbon cable disconnect from Small module interface board External 10MHz reference Internal clock output input disconnect coaxial cable disconnect coaxial cable from back of connector from back of connector Figure 6 29 Acquisition circuit board assembly removal 6 50 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures Large Module Interface 1 Locate module to be removed Locate the Large module Interface circuit Circuit Boar
97. titles and then Click a topic to highlight it Click the Display button to open the topic in a help window CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 2 19 Operating Instructions Overview To use the online help Cont For instruction 9 You can display step by step setup instructions for procedures setups you want to make From the application menu bar select Help and then select Setup Guide See right 10 Selecta procedure from the list that displays The procedure will display in a help window that 5 sized and located to minimize interference with the controls needed to perform it See below yer UMS He Es pis Pais Se 2 20 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules eso us traido Uncle wc NAT To scquisitian Ducum E EJ a Sem 2 an Du Ful Sop T you eked args wee the i Button Cink Iz ccm C _ Select a Afr zizania caren Leia i Shen k aH Easier Furia Pian Sep Ackoni Far burn in eri ston uique bon onikan
98. want to order a firmware update contact your Tektronix service center CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 75 Troubleshooting After Repair 6 76 After removal and replacement of a module due to electrical failure you must perform the adjustment or software update as indicated in Table 6 6 Table 6 6 Action required for module replaced Module replaced Adjustment required Software update required Front panel assembly No None Acquisition board Yes Boot ROM and authorization code PPC processor board Yes Boot ROM and authorization code NLX processor assembly No Windows instrument application Display panel or display system None Power supply Yes None Interconnect boards No None Fans No None CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Troubleshooting BIOS Error Messages Table 6 7 lists error messages displayed by the BIOS Table 6 7 BIOS error messages Error message GA20 Error Pri Master HDD Error Pri Slave HDD Error Sec Master HDD Error Sec Slave HDD Error A Drive Error B Drive Error Cache Memory Error CMOS Battery Low CMOS Display Type Wrong CMOS Checksum Bad Explanation An error occurred with Gate A20 when switching to protected mode during the memory test Could not read sector from corresponding drive No response from diskette drive An error occurred while testing L2 cache Memory may be bad Replace the batte
99. 0 25 105 1131 00 2 LEVER EJ ECT 0 048 THK SSTL LARGE MODULE TK1943 105 1131 00 26 214 4891 00 6 SPRING TORSION 0 304 X 0 256 X 1 152 8X345 RO7SPRGI 27 355 0297 00 2 STUD SHOULDERED 4 40 X 1 050L SST TK0588 355 0297 00 28 200 4561 00 2 COVER 0 036 SST LARGE MODULES TK1943 200 4561 00 10 12 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List 4 ky NS N S WA BONY o 7 4 r Figure 10 4 Acquisition 10 13 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Fig amp index number 5 1 10 14 Tektronix part number 174 4348 00 174 4233 00 174 4347 00 174 4138 00 174 4132 00 174 4133 00 174 4137 00 174 4234 00 Serial no effective Serial no discont d WwW UC amp description CA ASSY RF COAXIAL 50 OHM RG 316 12 00L MCX RTANG PLUG 50 OHM TO MCX RTANG PLUG CA ASSY RF COAXIAL 50 OHM DSUB TO MCX B RO7CABLI CA ASSY RF COAXIAL 50 OHM RG 316 7 500L X D SUB CABLE ASSY RF COAXIAL 50 OHM OPTICAL BD TO ACQ BD CABLE ASSY RF COAXIAL 50 OHM 7 5 L SMB TO PELTOLA CABLE ASSY RF COAXIAL 50 OHM 14 0 L MCX TO PELTOLA CABLE ASSY RF COAXIAL 50 OHM D SUB TO ACQ BD CA ASSY RF COAXIAL 50 OHM SMB TO MCX RO7CABL2 Mfr code 060D9 060D9 060D9 060D9 060D9 060D9 060D9
100. 0 192 5 64 12 5 GHz settings 10 uW 2 vertical offset 20 GHz settings 10 uW 4 vertical offset 80C02 0 192 5 64 12 5 GHz settings 10 uW 2 vertical offset 20 GHz 30 GHz settings 10 uW 4 vertical 80C03 All settings 500 nW 2 vertical 8004 0 192 5 64 10 66 Gb s settings 10 uW 2 vertical 20 GHz 30 GHz settings 10 uW 4 vertical 80C05 0C192 10 uW 2 vertical 20 GHz settings 30 uW 4 vertical offset 30 GHz settings 30 uW 4 vertical offset 40 GHz settings 30 uW 4 vertical offset 80C 06 50 GHz settings 25 uW 4 vertical offset To achieve these levels perform a dark level compensation keep the trigger rate and vertical offset same as during the compensation and if the ambient temperature changes more than 1 C perform another dark level compensation Main instrument Module Maximum Minimum display vertical scale 80C01 1 mW per division 10 uW per division CUI 80C02 1 mW per division 10 uW per division 80 03 100 uW division 1 uW per division 80C 04 1 mW per division 10 uW per division 80C05 3 mW per division 30 uW per division 80C 06 6 mW per division 60 uW per division Full scale vertical on the display of the main instrumentis 10 divisions Maximum full scale and minimum full scale are therefore 10 times the values listed above Vertical scale is adjustable in a 1 2 5 sequence Be
101. 00000009 00 Qoon09000 OPTICAL INPUT OPTICAL OUTPUT OPTICAL OUTPUT DIRECT INPUT TRIGGER DIRECT Fiber optic cable Fiber optic cable 50 Coaxial cable Figure 4 28 Minimum optical bandwidth and reference receiver frequency response hookup 2 Connect a fiber optic cable between the output of the optical impulse generator and the input of the OA5002 variable optical attenuator 3 Connect a fiber optic cable between the output of the OA5002 variable optical attenuator and the optical output of the optical sampling module 4 Connect a 50 coaxial cable from the rear trigger SYN on the optical impulse generator to the TRIGGER DIRECT input on the TDS8000 or CSA8000 5 Start with about 30 dB of attenuation on the variable attenuator NOTE To avoid dispersing the narrow optical impulse signal keep all fiber lengths as short as possible Lengths that are 2 to 3 meters long are acceptable 6 Press the SELECT ON OFF button on the 80C06 Optical Sampling Module so that the adjacent indicator lights This turns on Channel 1 C1 on the 80C06 Optical Sampling Module 7 Inthe Setup menu select Acquire and make the following changes in the Acq Setup dialog box a Select Sample as the acquisition mode 8 Inthe Trig Setup dialog box do the following 4 100 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling
102. 01 and 80C03 Optical Sampling Modules NOTE The clock recovery optical sensitivity range and recovered clock timing jitter for the 80 02 and the 80C04 Optical Sampling modules currently cannot be checked by the user If you want these parameters checked you must return the optical sampling module to Tektronix Inc for verification Tektronix CS A8000 TDS 8000 Tektronix 80E02 Sampling Module item 23 Tektronix 045002 variable optical attenuator item 24 Advantest D3186 12 Gb Pattern Generator item 27 J DS Uniphase 420B Laser Transmitter item 26 Single mode fiber optic cable 2 m FC to FC connectors item 30 Attenuator 2X 6 dB pad 50 O SMA item 22 Cable coaxial 2 ns delay SMA male connector on each end item 29 Equipment required Prerequisites See page 4 19 Before performing this procedure be sure you have completed the Dark level amp Vertical Equivalent Optical Noise procedure on page 4 83 Setup Install the test hookup see Figure 4 29 and preset the CSA8000 TDS8000 controls 1 Install the 80COX Optical Sampling Module into Channel 1 of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument 2 Install the 80E02 Sampling Module into Channels 3 and 4 of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument Channel 1 and Channel 2 are disabled when an optical sampling module is installed in the upper Channel 1 3 Install 2X SMA electrical attenuators on the inputs of the 80E02 Sampling Module to prevent saturation 4
103. 18 Optical modules Acquisition 1 18 Table 1 19 Optical modules Clock recovery option CR 1 32 Table 1 20 Optical modules Mechanical 1 34 Table 1 21 Optical modules Environmental 1 35 Table 1 22 Module characteristics 1 37 Table 1 23 Environmental specifications 1 38 Table 1 24 Mechanical specifications 1 38 Table 1 25 Electromagnetic specifications 1 39 Table 2 1 Additional accessory connection information 2 4 Table 2 2 Linef seS 222222555555 24 won rn 2 6 Table 4 1 Equipment Required 4 24 CSA8000 TDS8000 Test Record 4 25 80E00 Test Record 4 25 80 00 Test Record 4 28 Table 4 2 DC Voltage measurement accuracy 4 58 Table 4 3 Data for calculation of gain and linearity 4 61 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules ix Table of Contents Table 4 4 Computed rise time 4 66 Table 4 5 Power reference 4 68 Table 4 6 DUT device under test reference response 4 71 Table 4 7 Dark level and vertical equivalent optical noise limits 4 87 Table 4 8 Minimum
104. 2 Line fuses Cap amp fuseholder Fuse type Fuse part number part number 0 25 x 1 250 inch 8 A fast blow 250 V 159 0046 00 200 2264 00 5x20 mm 6 3 A fast blow 250 V 159 0381 00 200 2265 00 80 PowerSwitch Fuses AC Power Figure 2 4 Line fuse and power cord connector locations rear panel CAUTION Connect the keyboard mouse and other accessories before applying power to the product Connecting the accessories after powering on the instrument can damage the accessories Two exceptions are the USB keyboard and mouse that ships with the instrument Both can be plugged or unplugged without first turning power off 2 Connect the keyboard and mouse observing the caution above Note that the instrument ships with a USB keyboard which plugs into the USB port see Figure 2 3 on page 2 5 for location and a USB mouse which plugs into the back of the USB keyboard NOTE Connection of the keyboard and mouse is optional You can operate most features without them using the front panel controls and the touchscreen 3 Connect the power cord 4 If you have an external monitor connect the power cord and power on the monitor 5 Turn the Power switch on at the rear panel See Figure 2 4 on page 2 6 for switch location 6 Push the On Standby switch to power on the instrument see Figure 2 5 for the switch location CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules I
105. 2 5 GHz setting lt 12 uWims 8 uM ms 20 GHz setting 25 JW ms lt 15 uWims 80C01 CR module Maximum RMS Typical RMS8 OC 12 STM 4 setting lt 15 uW ms lt 10 uWms OC 48 STM 16 setting 15 uWims lt 10 uWims OC 192 STM 64 setting 15 uWims 10 uWims 12 5 GHz setting 15 uWims lt 10 uWims 20 GHz setting lt 25 uWims lt 15 uWims 80C02 module OC 192 STM 64 setting 10 uWims lt 6 12 5 GHz setting 10 uWims 6 uM ms 20 GHz setting 15 uWims lt 10 uWims 30 GHz setting lt 30 uWrims lt 20 Ws 80C02 CR module OC 192 STM 64 setting 12 uWims lt 7 UWims 12 5 GHz setting lt 12 uW ms lt 7 UWims 20 GHz setting 20 uWims lt 15 uWims 30 GHz setting 40 uWims 30 Ws 80C03 amp 80C03 CR modules FC1063 setting 1 0 75 UWims GBE setting 1 0 75 UWims OC 48 STM 16 setting 1 5 1 uWims 80C04 module OC 192 S TM 64 setting 10 UWims 6 uW rs FEC 10 66 Gb s setting 10 uWims 6 uW ms 20 GHz setting 15 uWims 10 30 GHz setting 30 uWrms 20 Ws 80 04 1 amp 80C04 CR2 module OC 192 STM 64 setting 12 uWims lt 7 ms FEC 10 66 Gb s setting lt 12 lt 7 Ws 20 GHz setting lt 20 uWims lt 15 uWims CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 25 80C00 Modules Specifications Table 1 18 Optical modules Acquisition Cont Characteristics Vertical equivalent 30 GHz setting optical noise 40
106. 33 4339 00 650 3938 00 259 0155 00 650 4186 00 174 4189 00 650 4187 00 679 4479 00 OBD 437 0486 00 174 4188 00 679 4379 00 174 4231 00 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List 7 Ly e KS SU CCS A 74 N T 7 Ss De CGN s E Figure 10 2 Front panel and drives 10 9 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Fig amp index Tektronix part number number 3 1 119 6490 00 1A 119 6459 00 2 214 3903 00 3 039 0074 01 4 211 1050 00 5 679 4667 00 6 211 1050 00 7 213 1061 00 8 386 7147 00 9 131 6680 00 10 211 0887 00 11 441 2172 00 12 119 5806 00 13 131 1315 01 14 131 0269 00 15 131 0850 00 16 210 0457 00 17 210 0465 00 18 650 4086 00 19 210 1443 00 20 136 0140 00 21 156 4827 00 22 441 2183 00 23 407 4709 00 24 174 4231 00 25 671 4377 00 26 119 5728 00 27 211 1070 00 28 441 2184 00 29 211 0720 00 30 156 4828 00 10 10 Serial no effective Serial no discont d Qty amp description 1 rn IC PROCESSOR CMOS MICROPROCESSOR CELERON 533 MHZ 66MHZ BUS SOCKET 370 COMPATIB FAN CHIP COOLER 12VDC 80MA 4400RP M 30DBA 64MM X 51MM X 31MM W HE
107. 4 4 VERTICAL MENU A POSITION 57 OFFSET Channel lt buttons 3 A SCALE N Bs Figure 4 4 Channel button location 4 Verify that the channel is operational Confirm that the following statements are true The vertical scale readout for the channel under test shows a setting of 1 mW and a baseline trace at about center screen See Figure 4 5 on page 4 11 m Turning the Vertical OFFSET front panel knob counterclockwise offsets the baseline towards the bottom of the screen turning the knob clockwise offsets the baseline towards the top of the screen and returning the knob to 0 000 offset returns the baseline to center screen 4 10 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Brief Procedures Woi e ni c T na a ine T eme sulin o Baseline T Vertical offset Control bar Toe je mp e po oen m oss ped Pe nme Vertical offset setting Figure 4 5 Optical channel verification 5 Verify that the channel acquires in all acquisition modes Push the front panel button Acquisition MENU to display the Acq Setup dialog box Click each of the three acquisition modes and confirm that the following statements are true m Sample mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen Note that t
108. 40 horizontal by 480 vertical pixels Pixel pitch Pixels are 0 33 mm horizontal and 0 22 mm vertical Table 1 7 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Ports Specifications Video outputs Parallel port IEEE 1284 Characteristics Two 15 pin D subminiature connectors on the rear panel Useable to connect external monitors that provide a duplicate of the primary and or a second monitor on which to view other applications Support atleast the basic requirements of the P C99 specification 25 pin D subminature connector on the rear panel Supports the following modes Standard mode output only Bi directional PS 2 compatible Bi directional Enhanced Parallel Port IEEE 1284 standard Mode 1 or Mode 2 v1 7 Bi directional high speed Extended Capabilities P ort ECP Serial Port 9 pin D subminature serial port connector using NS 16C550 compatible UARTS supporting transfer speeds up to 115 2 kbits sec PS 2 Keyboard and Mouse Interface PS 2 compatible keyboard and mouse connectors LAN interface RJ 45 LAN connector supporting 10 base T and 100 base T External audio con nectors External audio jacks for MIC IN and LINE OUT USB interface GPIB interface Interal clock trigger out One USB connector the second USB is disable because of internal use Complies with IEEE 488 2 Square wave out from 50 O back termination synchronized to the TDR internal clock drive signal Refer to Trigger System Interna
109. 6 279 9 373 2 466 7 559 9 622 1 653 2 746 5 839 8 933 1 1244 2 Nominal response dB 0 00 0 11 0 45 1 02 1 86 3 00 4 51 5 71 6 37 8 54 10 93 13 41 21 45 48 5 16 2 488 Gb s Reference Receiver setting frequency response 80001 and 80C03 modules only Frequency MHz 0 000 373 3 746 5 1119 7 1493 1 1866 3 2239 5 2488 3 2612 8 2986 0 3359 3 3732 6 4976 7 Nominal response dB 0 00 0 11 0 45 1 02 1 86 3 00 4 51 5 71 6 37 8 54 10 93 13 41 21 45 0 50 0 61 0 95 1 52 2 36 3 50 5 67 71 25 8 08 10 74 13 55 16 41 26 11 0 50 0 61 0 95 1 52 2 36 3 50 5 67 1 25 8 08 10 74 13 55 16 41 26 11 0 50 0 39 0 05 0 52 1 36 2 50 3 35 4 17 4 66 6 35 8 31 10 41 16 78 0 50 0 39 0 05 0 52 1 36 2 50 3 35 4 17 4 66 6 35 8 31 10 41 16 78 4 30 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Performance Tests 80C00 Test Record Cont Incoming Performance Test Minimum Incoming Maximum OC192 STM 64 9 953 Gb s Reference Receiver setting frequency response 80C01 80C02 and 80C04 or 80C05 modules only Frequency MHz 0 000 Nominal response dB 0 00 0 85 0 85 14
110. 7 a d e Remove the two 3 16 nut posts that secure RS 232 connector to the rear of the support bracket Remove the two 5 16 nut posts that secure the sub D connector to the rear of the support bracket Remove the two phillips screws that secure the PCMCIA Personal card memory card interface adapter to the pc processor board Remove the PCMCIA from the PC processor board Disconnect J930 ribbon cable connector from the PC processor board Then remove the PC processor board from the instrument Reinstallation Do in reverse steps 3 and 4 to reinstall the PC processor assembly CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures 691 1690 T 15 Torx screw 9 CO v Phillips screw 2 PC Processor board 930 d m 6 3 16 Nut post 2 a ESS NN 5 SS oN i gt RS y DON Disconnect from J 930 Figure 6 27 Processor board removal CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 47 Removal and Installation Procedures Acquisition Assembly 1 Locate module to be removed Locate the Acquisition assembly in the locator diagram Figure 6 9 page 6 20 Remove the Acquisition assembly following in this order m Trim m Bottom cover m Left and Right
111. 73 Electrical Sampling Modules 4 74 11 12 13 14 Calculate the DUT response as the difference between the 50E01 Measured level column and the Reference RF level column in Table 4 6 as 80E01 Measured level Reference RF level Record the calculation results in the DUT Response column Table 4 6 on page 4 71 Calculate all frequencies listed in the Frequency column Table 4 6 on page 4 71 Find the maximum and minimum power points between the 50 MHz and 50 GHz points in the DUT Response column Table 4 6 on page 4 71 The maximum power minus the power at 50 MHz should be greater than 2 3 dB The minimum power minus the power at 50 MHz should be greater than 2 3 dB The specification is 3 0 dB referenced to the 50 MHz End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Electrical Sampling Modules TDR system reflected rise time 80204 Setup These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the TDR system 80204 only and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications Refer to Table 1 13 page 1 14 Equipment Airline Item 6 required Terminator cap shorting Item 12 Prerequisites As listed on page 4 19 and under Prerequisites on page 4 53 Install the test hookup 1 Connecta shorting terminator cap to the female connector of the airline See Figure 4 23 2 Connect the airline to channel 1 of the module
112. 8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules xvii Preface xviii CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules System Specifications This section contains the specifications for the CSA8000 Communications Sig nal Analyzer and the TDS8000 Digital Sampling Oscilloscope specifica tions are guaranteed unless noted as typical Typical specifications are provided for your convenience but are not guaranteed Specifications that are marked with the symbol are checked in Performance Verification chapter of the service manual an optional accessory specifications apply to the instrument and sampling modules unless noted otherwise To meet specifications three conditions must first be met m The instrument must have been calibrated adjusted at an ambient tempera ture between 20 C and 430 The instrument must have been operating continuously for 20 minutes within the operating temperature range specified The instrument must be in an environment with temperature altitude humidity and vibration with the operating limits described in these specifications NOTE Sampling Interface refers to both the small module compartments and the large module compartments unless otherwise specified Table 1 1 System Signal acquisition Description Characteristics Number of input 8 acquisition channels maximum channels Number of small sam 4 compartments for a total of 8 channels
113. 932 0 11 0 96 0 74 2986 0 0 45 1 30 0 40 4418 8 1 02 1 87 30 17 5972 4 1 86 2 71 1 01 7465 0 3 00 3 86 2 16 8958 0 4 51 6 19 2 83 9953 28 5 71 7 87 3 55 10451 2 6 37 8 75 3 99 11944 0 8 54 11 53 5 56 13437 2 10 93 14 45 7 41 14930 4 13 41 17 41 9 41 FC10664 Reference Receiver setting frequency response 80004 module only Frequency MHz 0 000 Nominal response dB 0 00 0 85 0 85 1493 2 0 11 0 96 0 74 2986 0 0 45 1 30 0 40 4418 8 1 02 1 87 30 17 5972 4 1 86 2 71 1 01 7465 0 3 00 3 86 2 16 8958 0 4 51 6 19 2 83 9953 28 5 71 7 87 3 55 10451 2 6 37 8 75 3 99 11944 0 8 54 11 53 5 56 13437 2 10 93 14 45 7 41 14930 4 13 41 17 41 9 41 2 50 Gb s 2X GBE Reference Receiver setting frequency response 80C03 only Frequency MHz 0 000 Nominal response dB 0 00 0 50 0 50 375 0 11 0 61 0 39 750 0 45 0 95 0 05 1125 1 02 1 52 0 52 1500 1 86 2 36 1 36 1875 3 00 3 50 2 50 2250 4 51 5 67 3 35 2500 5 71 7 25 4 17 2625 6 37 8 08 4 66 3000 8 54 10 74 6 35 3375 10 93 13 55 8 31 3750 13 41 16 41 10 41 5000 21 45 26 11 16 78 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 31 Performance Tests 80C00 Test Record Cont Incoming Performance Test Minimum Incoming Maximum GBE 1 25 Gb s Reference Receiver setting frequency res
114. ALLAS TX 75272 5303 WAUKEGAN IL 60087 3214 HAMDEN CT 06514 6514 CHATSWORTH CA 91311 PHOENIX AZ 85008 4229 SAN J OSE CA 95134 2009 SPOKANE WA 99204 VANCOUVER WA 98661 INDIANAPOLIS IN 46239 CHICAGO IL 60646 LOS ANGELES CA 90039 2410 FREMONT CA 94538 ESSEX JUNCTION VT 05452 3408 NEWBERG OR 97132 PORTLAND OR 97214 4657 HILLSBORO OR 97124 6474 FOREST GROVE OR 97116 0487 CAMDEN NJ 08103 LOWELL MA 01853 3295 CHICAGO IL 60609 SALEM NH 03079 MORGAN HILLS CA 95037 ETTERS PA 17319 9769 SEATTLE WA 98119 2783 FRANKLIN IN 46131 TORRANCE CA 90503 2489 10 3 Mechanical Parts List Manufacturers cross index cont Mfr code 26805 2K262 2733 32559 34649 3M099 46628 50356 5Y400 64537 6Y440 61058 64537 71400 14594 16096 78189 7X318 80009 86928 8X345 93907 94222 98291 54091 55769 TK0588 TK1163 TK1916 10 4 Manufacturer M A COM OMNI SPECTRA INC BOYD CORPORATION BELDEN WIRE amp CABLE COMPANY BIVAR INC INTEL CORPORATION PORTLAND SCREW COMPANY LOGITECH INC TEAC AMERICA INC TRIAX METAL PRODUCTS INC KDI TRIANGLE CORPORATION MICRON SEMICONDUCTOR PRODUCTS INC MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CORP OF AMERICA KDI TRIANGLE CORPORATION BUSSMANN COMPONENT RESOURCES INC ELMA ELECTRONICS INC SHAKEPROOF KASO PLASTICS INC TEKTRONIX INC SEASTROM MFG CO INC NORTHWEST SPRING MFG CO CAMCAR DIV OF TEXTRON INC SOUTHCO INC ITT CANNON RF
115. ARILLO CA 93012 SHERMAN TX 75070 BEAVERTON OR 97005 PORTLAND OR 97222 PORTLAND OR 97217 BEAVERTON OR 97075 0428 HILLSBORO OR 97123 ANAHEIM CA 92806 TUALATIN OR 97062 SUNNYVALE CA 94089 1108 10 5 Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Fig amp index Tektronix part Serial no Serial no Mfr number number effective discont d Qty Name amp description code Mfr part number 1 1 016 1441 00 1 POUCH PLASTIC PLASTIC POUCH 80009 016 1441 00 2 211 1050 00 12 SCREW MACHINE 6 32 X 0 312 L PNH STL CAD T15 0 01 OBD 3 355 0298 00 4 STUD SNAP 0 570 DIA 0 165 THK STAINLESS STEEL TK0588 355 0298 00 4 348 1648 00 4 FOOT REAR W CORD WRAP THERMOPLASTIC TK6181 348164800 5 211 0720 00 4 SCR ASSEM WSHR 6 32 X 0 500 P NH STL CDPL T 15 0 01 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 6 161 0230 01 1 CABLE ASSY PWR 3 18 AWG 92 L S VT TK2432 ORDER BY DESC STANDARD ACCESSORY 7 159 0046 00 2 FUSE CARTRIDGE 3AG 8A 250V 15SEC CER 71400 ABC 8 159 0381 00 2 FUSE CARTRIDGE 5 X 20 MM 6 3A 250V FAST BLOW HIGH 71400 GDA 63 BREAKING CAPACITY UL REC SEMKO 8 200 2264 00 2 CAP FUSEHOLDER 3AG FUSES AMERICAN 61935 FEK 031 1666 200 2265 00 2 CAP FUSEHOLDER 5 X 20MM FUSES EUROPEAN 61935 FEK 031 1663 9 200 4522 00 1 COVER RIGHT PCABS 13 645L X 8 250W BLUE TK6181 200 4522 00 10 212 0232 00 2 SCREW MACHINE 8 32 X 1 125L PNH STL BLACK 0 01 OBD OXIDE T 20 11 367 0477 00 1 HANDLE CARRYING POLYPROPYLENE VINYL GRIP 12136 PT3170
116. ATSINK amp CLIP FOR CELERON SCREW J ACK 4 40 X 0 312 LONG 0 188 H HEX HEAD STAND OFF 4 40 INT THD X 0 312 THD EXT 4 40 NLX BOARD MODIFY MOTHER BOARD NLX PROCESSOR SCREW MACHINE 6 32 X 0 312 L PNH STL CAD PLT T15 CKT BD SUBASSY RISER SCREW MACHINE 6 32 X 0 312 L PNH STL CAD PLT T15 J ACKSCREW 6 32 X 0 320 EXT THD M3 5 X 0 6 6 INT THD X 0 215L GPIB PANEL I O ALUMINUM POWER PC PROCESSOR CONN HDR CARDBUS HDR SMD MALE RTANG 2 X 34 SCREW METRIC M2 X 0 4 X 16 MM L PH PHILLIPS DRIVE CHASSIS ASSY 0 05 ALUM 13 65 X 16 50 X 3 55 POWER SUPPLY CUSTOM AC DC 375W 85 275VAC CONN RF J ACK BNC PNL 50 OHM FEMALE STR PELTOLA CONN RCPT ELEC BRASS CONN J ACK RF SMA FEEDTHRU DUAL FEMALE STR 50 OHM 0 25 MTG W 0 375HEX 0 59 X 0 24 MLG GOLD SS NUT PL ASSEM WA 6 32 X 0 312 STL CD PLW LOCKWASHER NUT PLAIN HEX 0 25 32 X 0 375 BRS CD PL CABLE ASSEMBLY ELECT ANTI STATIC CONNECTION WASHER FLAT 0 25 ID X 0 375 OD X 0 265 NYLON J ACK TIP BANANA CHARCOAL GRAY IC MEMORY CMOS SDRAM 8MEG X 64 MC 458CB 646 A10 DIMM168 CHASSIS REAR DRIVE BAY HDD amp CD ROM AL amp STEEL BRACKET CD ROM STEEL CABLE ASSY CABLE ASSEMBY CD ROM CIRCUIT BD ASSY CD ROM INTERFACE DISK DRIVE OPTICAL 644MB CD ROM 16 7 MB SEC SCREW M2 X 2MM PNH PHL STL NI PLT CHASSIS NLX ALUMINUM W HARDWARE SCR ASSEM WSHR 6 32 0 500 PNH STL CDPL T 15 IC MEMORY CMOS SDRAM 16MEG X 64 SYNC UNBUFFERED 3 3V MC 4516C D646 A10 DIMM 168 Mfr code 34649 80009 05791 80009 0
117. CB 1 077 0 250 HEX 12L 14 STEEL TK0588 129 1516 00 7 210 0457 00 20 NUTPL ASSEM WA 6 32 X 0 312 5 CD OKBOl ORDER BY PLW LOCKWASHER DESCRIPTION 8 174 4045 00 2 CA ASSY SP RIBBON BUS ACQUISITION IDC 32 AWG 06009 174 4045 00 9 671 4482 00 1 CIRCUIT BD ASSY SMALL MODULE INTERFACE 80009 671 4482 00 10 679 4481 00 1 CKT BD SUBASSY ACQ BOARD 80009 679 4481 00 11 650 4153 00 1 COMBO ASSEMBLY ACQP EFE J ANUS 80009 650 4153 00 12 351 1067 00 8 GUIDE CARD GUIDE E 300 32559 E 300 13 174 4043 00 1 CA ASSY SP ELEC DISCRETE TRIGGER PROBE POWER 06009 174 4043 00 M 211 0815 00 3 SCREW MACHINE 6 32 X 1 750 P NH STL ZINC T 15 3M099 211 0815 00 15 174 4322 00 1 ASSY RF RFS 0 1410D 50 OHM SMAJACK XSMAJACK 06009 174 4322 00 16 441 2175 00 1 CHASSIS ASSY SMALL MODULE 0 050 AL 0J9P9 441 2175 00 17 211 0373 00 18 SCREW MACHINE 4 40 X 0 250 P NH STL CD PLT T10 93907 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 18 355 0259 00 4 STUD LOCKING 0 850 X 0 188 HEX SST TK0588 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 19 214 4893 00 6 SPRING TORSION 0 1260D X 0 0941D DOOR RIGHT O 018DIA 8X345 RO7SPRG4 20 200 4560 00 4 COVER SMALL MODULES 0 036 SST TK1943 200 4560 00 21 214 4892 00 6 SPRING TORSION 0 1260D 0 0941D DOOR LEFT 0 018DIA 8X345 RO7SPRG3 22 105 1132 00 4 LEVER EJ ECT 0 048 THK SSTL SMALL MODULE TK1943 105 1132 00 23 210 0185 00 12 WASHER SHLDR 0 375 OD X 0 115 ID X 0 093 THK TK0588 210 0185 00 24 366 0815 00 6 KNOB EJ ECTOR LEVER PC ABS SILVER GRAY TK6181 366 0815 0
118. CD Drive assembly CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures CD drive interface board CD drive CD drive ribbon cable 0 Phillips J 230 CD drive screw 4 a ribbon cable D T 15 Torxdrive screw 2 Figure 6 20 CD drive amp bracket removal Fan Assembly Removal 1 Locate module to be removed Locate the Fan assembly in the locator diagram Internal Modules Figure 6 8 page 6 19 Additional modules to be removed m Trim all m Bottom cover m Left and Right covers 2 Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its bottom is down on the work surface and its left side is facing you CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 35 Removal and Installation Procedures 3 Remove the fan assembly See Figure 6 21 page 6 36 CAUTION Take care when handling the fan assembly the fan blades are brittle and can be easily damaged a Disconnect the fan from processor display board Disconnect the fan s two power cables J130 and J170 located on the processor board b Remove the two T 15 Torxdrive screws securing the fan assembly to the top main chassis c Liftthe fan assembly up and out from the chassis 4 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps a through c to reinstall the fan assembly Disconnect from J 130 Disconnect from
119. Connecta less than 2 ns delay 50 2 coaxial cable between the 1 32 CLK signal output of the pattern generator and the TRIGGER DIRECT connector on the TDS8000 or CSA8000 5 Connect a less than 2 ns delay 50 Q coaxial cable between the DATA output of the pattern generator and the DIGITAL IN DC COUPLED input on the laser transmitter 6 Connect a single mode fiber optic cable between the OPTICAL output of the laser transmitter and the OPTICAL INPUT on the variable optical attenuator CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 103 Optical Sampling Modules OPTICAL INPUT 0A5002 OPTICAL OUTPUT gt Laser T transmitter Fiber optic cables 12 Gb 6 OPTICAL pattern 2 OUTPUT CSA8000 TDS 8000 generator ie S E DC COUPLED gm dm 2X Attenuators DATA CLOCK OUTPUT 1 32 CLK 50 coaxial cable 50 coaxial cable Figure 4 29 80C01 and 80C03 clock recovery optical sensitivity range and recovered clock timing jitter hookup 7 Connect a single mode fiber optic cable between the OPTICAL OUTPUT of the variable optical attenuator and the OPTICAL INPUT of the 80COX CR Optical Sampling Module 8 Connect a less than 2 ns delay 50 coaxial cable between the CLOCK OUTPUT of the 80COX CR Optical Sampling Mod
120. Drag cursors to measure waveforms on screen Drag the Horizontal Reference to move the point around which horizontal scaling expands and contracts the waveforms Drag the Waveform Icon vertically to position waveform Right click on a waveform or its icon for handy access to often used setup controls and properties Drag ground reference icon to add offsetto a waveform Drag across the waveform area to zoom the boxed waveform segment to full screen width Front Panel I O Map Compartments for large modules up to two channels Compartments for small gt modules up to eight channels ANTISTATIC CONNECTION for wrist strap 1 MQ to ground CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Fa Back ps RES RET RA mem Floppy disk drive accessible Cay 54 257 from Windows 98 ccc 23 25 ty xu O c EDO we eo OF INTERNAL CLOCK OUTPUT 07 DC CALIBRATION OUTPUT O F EXTERNAL 10 MHZ REFERENCE INPUT TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER PRESCALE DIRECT PROBE input input POWER 2 15 Operating Instructions Rear Panel 1 0 Removable hard disk drive to provide T 5252 22 r individual environment for each user or to Secure data press to release ram CDROM drive accessible from _____
121. GHz 12 5 GHz 20 GHz and 30 GHz bandwidth settings During reference receiver curve calculation however the definition is changed to match the industry standard definition which was authored assuming electrical bandwidths where 3 dB 20 log swing RUE vertical swing 9 DC This definition is used for reference receiver settings OC12 OC48 192 2 xGBE and 1063 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 89 Optical Sampling Modules This procedure checks the minimum optical bandwidths and the reference receiver frequency responses of an 80COX Optical Sampling Module NOTE To optimize performance make sure that all connections are clean and secure and that all components of the system are in good condition Optical fiber can gradually degrade the system performance as it is repeatedly flexed over time Equipment Tektronix CS A8000 TDS 8000 required Calmar FP L 01 optical impulser item 25 Tektronix 045002 variable optical attenuator item 24 Single mode fiber optic cable 2 m FC to FC connectors item 30 Optical attenuator 10 dB FC FC female male connectors item 28 Cable coaxial 1 m male to male SMA connectors item 11 Prerequisites See page 4 19 Before performing this procedure be sure you have completed the Dark level amp Vertical Equivalent Optical Noise procedure on page 4 83 Setup Install the test hookup see Figure 4 26 and preset the C
122. Hz optical bandwidth Bandwidth and reference receiver calibration is performed with a sub picosecond and optical impulse and a fourier transform method m 12 The electrical sampler is adjusted to approximately 7 5 GHz 3dB bandwidth and signal is routed through a hardware filter designed to result in the combined system having an 12 STM 4 Reference Receiver response m OC48 The electrical sampler is adjusted to 7 5 GHz 3dB bandwidth and signal is routed through a hardware filter designed to result in the combined system having an OC48 STM 16 Reference Receiver response These adjustments must be made at the factory m OC192 The electrical sampler is adjusted to give the desired response and signal is not routed through any filter signal is sent through the straight through path The sampler bandwidth and response is optimized during the calibration such that the combined system will have an OC192 STM 64 Reference Receiver response m 12 5 GHz The sampler bandwidth and response is set during the calibration such that the combined system will have an Optical Bandwidth 6dB 12 5 GHz m 20 GHz The sampler bandwidth and response is set during the calibration such that the combined system will have an Optical Bandwidth 6dB 20 GHz For major functional circuit blocks refer to Figure 9 5 on page 9 5 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Theory of Operation 80C02 Optical Sampli
123. Instruments and Sampling Modules Diagrams RIFOCS interchange Single mode able female Average P ower Monitor M 40 GHz optical BW reverse terminated Fiber i Fiber 8 User Optical RIFOCS male Input NRZ DATA Lower noise sampler also tuneable to achieve 0C 192 Ref Receiver without filter Coaxial only unfiltered path gt 40 GHz or OC 192 various Reference Receiver rates 2 x Diode Sampler USERA WO PANEL of Plugsim 2 ueyurey sue Figure 9 13 80C05 Optical sampling block diagram CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 9 13 Diagrams RIFOCS interchange Single mode able female OQ gLL User Optical RIFOCS male Input NRZ DATA Average Power Monitor gt 30 GHz optical BW not reverse terminated dg i Fiber Lower noise sampler tuneable to achieve 0C192 or 10 66 Gb Ref Receiver rates without filter RF Switch Coaxial only unfiltered path gt 30 GHz or OC 192 various Reference Receiver rates 55 GHz Sampler Figure 9 14 80C06 Optical sampling block diagram 9 14 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Diagrams Power LED Input Output 7 Figure 9 15 80 01 block diagram CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules LED Driver Curtain Boar 9 15 Diagrams Symbols Graphic symbols and class designation letters are based on ANSI S
124. LAY 75 80 SHORE BLACK MATT TEXTURED 2491 UT11 01 Figure 10 7 Optical modules 10 18 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Fig amp Index Tektronix part Serial no Serial no Mfr number number effective discont d Qty 4 description code part number 1 384 1838 00 1 SHAFT SCREW LOCKDOWN 303 557 05 05 TK0588 384 1838 00 2 214 4081 00 1 LOCKDOWN SCREW MOUNT 0 080 AL 5Y400 214 4081 00 3 211 3008 00 2 SCREW MACHINE 2 56 X 0 281 PNH SST PASS 0 01 211 3008 00 8 4 015 1022 01 1 TERMINATOR COAXIAL 50 OHM 0 5W SMA 61162 50 3205 5 335 0370 00 1 MARKER IDENT ANTI STATIC LABEL 0 005 POLY 0 805 335 0102 00 6 211 0088 00 8 SCREW MACHINE 2 56 X 0 281 FLH 82 DEG STL BK 0KBOl ORDER BY OXD POZ DESCRIPTION 7 380 1151 00 1 HOUSING SAMPLING MODULE TRIGGER PRESCALE 5Y400 380 1151 00 LIMITING PREAMP 8 211 0087 00 2 SCREW MACHINE 2 56 X 0 188 FLH 82 DEG SST POZ 1AW87 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 9 333 4392 00 1 PANEL FRONT TRIGGER PRESCALE LIMITING PREAMP AL 5Y400 333 4392 00 ALLOY 10 335 0485 00 1 MARKER DENT LABEL MKD 80401 PRESCALE 0 805 335 0485 00 MODULE 2 760 X 810 LEXAN Figure 10 8 80A01 module CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 10 19 Mechanical Parts List Figure 10 9 Accessories Replaceable Parts List Fi
125. Main View waveform top graticule are a full screen width apart 10 divisions See Figure 4 9 on page the 4 15 m One period of the internal clock signal a square wave in the Mag view bottom graticule is about five horizontal divisions on screen Matches the waveform in the top graticule See Figure 4 9 m Rotating the Horizontal SCALE knob clockwise to 500 ns div expands the waveform in the bottom graticule to double the period about 10 horizontal divisions per waveform period and returning the Horizontal SCALE knob to 1 us div returns the period to about five divisions Leave the Horizontal Scale set to 1 us div 4 14 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Brief Procedures Left Mag time base Right Mag time base marker marker Main time base view lt Mag time base view lt PS gt 2 Figure 4 9 Mag time base verification 8 Verify that the Mag2 time base operates a Push the Magl button to remove the display of the Magl time base b Perform steps 6 and 7 but use the Mag2 button instead of the Magl End of Functional Test Procedures Perform the Hardware and Operating System Tests These procedures verify the instrument hardware functions A diagnostics program called QAPlus Win is used to make the verifications No equipment is required QAPlus WIN QAPlus WIN is a comprehensive software application used to check and verify the operation of the PC hardwar
126. OARD 01963 G81 3505 LAAUS 119 6298 00 1 MOUSE LOGITECCH WHEEL MOUSE 46628 830306 001 119 6107 00 STYLUS STYLUS FOR TOUCH SCREEN 03217 T1100 10 20 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Cont Fig amp index Tektronix number number 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 0157 00 12 1568 00 12 1569 00 15 0552 00 15 0553 00 15 1001 00 15 1002 00 15 0565 00 16 1791 00 67 1338 00 71 0438 00 119 6241 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 11 0434 00 15 1020 01 15 1020 01 11 0157 00 12 1568 00 12 1569 00 15 1001 00 15 1002 00 11 0435 00 19 4514 00 119 4515 00 Qty description ADPTR RF PRCN 2 4MM OR 1 85MM MALE TO 2 92 FEMALE 80E01 ONLY MAINFRAME OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES CA ASSY SSP ELEC 1 METER LONG EXTENDER CA ASSY SSP ELEC 2 METER LONG EXTENDER ADPTR APC ELEC 3 5MM MALE TO FEMALE ADPTR SMA ELEC MALE TO FEMALE SLIDE ON MALE ATTENUATOR FIX 2 1 ATTENUATION 50 OHM SMA SERIES CONNECTORS ATTENUATOR FIX 5 1 ATTENUATION 50 OHM SERIES SMA CONNECTORS POWER DIVIDER 50 OHM 3 SMA FEMALE CONNECTORS RACKMOUNT KIT OPTION 1R CSA TDS8000 SERIES FIXTURE CAL SAMPLING HEAD CAL UNIT MANUAL TECH SERVICE CSA8000 TDS 8000 DISK DRIVE WINCHESTER 2 5 IN 6 4GB SINGLE PLATTER 9 5 MM IDE MHH2064AT DUAL DELAY LINE DL 11 PROBE P6209 4 0 GHz ACTIVE FET PROBE STATIC ISOLATOR SIU 800
127. OR TO ACQ SPACER SUPPORT 0 250 X 0 171 X 0 375 CKT BD NYLON CKT BD SUBASSY POWER REAR CKT BD SUBASSY POWER FRONT PANEL MODULE FRONT W HARDWARE ITEMS 18 THROUGH 23 CKT BD SUBASSY FRONT PANEL CONTROL BD SWITCH KEYPAD ELASTOMERIC FRONT PANEL KNOB CAP 0 925 DIA KNOB CAP SILVER GRAY 0 650 DIA X 0 520 H KNOB CAP SIVER GRAY 0 425 DIA X 0 520 H SUBPANEL FRONT 6 380 X 7 700 ALUMINUM LEXAN LABEL COMPONENT KIT DISPLAY MODULE ITEMS 25 THROUGH 30 FLEX CIRCUIT POWER FLEX CIRCUIT SILVER INK MODULE ASSY TOUCH PANEL ITEMS 25 amp 26 CABLE ASSEMBLY FLAT FLEX DISPLAY ADAPTER MODULE ASSY LCD DISPLAY ITEMS 27 THROUGH 30 CKT BD SUBASSY DISPLAY ADAPTER W HARDWARE CA ASSY SP RIBBON CPR 28 AWG 9 5 L 1X5 0 049CTR ASSY FAN SIX FANS ASSEMBLY CA ASSY RIBBON DISPLAY CKT BD SUBASSY CONNECTOR CONVERSION CABLE ASSY IDE CABLE ASSEMBY HARD DRIVE Mfr code 0 01 80009 04956 1943 0 01 06009 80009 06009 80009 1943 0 01 2250 06009 06915 80009 80009 80009 80009 2376 1163 1163 1163 1943 80009 07416 80009 1DM20 80009 80009 060D9 0 9P9 060D9 80009 060D9 Mfr part number OBD 650 4018 05 MHK 2060AT 437 0479 00 211 1081 00 174 3925 00 679 4378 00 174 4320 00 671 4657 00 407 4706 00 10310188 0 FD 05HF5630 174 4241 00 CPST 4 01 679 4761 00 679 4760 00 614 0968 00 679 4689 00 260 2724 00 366077000 366 0771 00 366 0772 00 3
128. Offset 0 mV 250 mV 7mV 7 mV Offset 0 mV 450 mV mV 11 mV Offset 1100 mV 4650 mV 18 7 mV 18 7 mV Offset 1100 mV 4850 mV 147 mV 14 7 mV Offset 1100 mV 1100 mV 9 7 mV 9 7 mV Offset 1100 mV 1350 mV 147 mV 14 7 mV Offset 1100 mV 41550 mV 18 7 mV 18 7 mV DC Vertical Voltage deviation from linear least squares fit C1 Setthe Vin 450 mV 10 mV 10 mV 350 mV 10 mV 10 mV 250 mV 10 mV 10 mV 150 mV 10 mV 10 mV 50 mV 10 mV 10 mV 50 mV 10 mV 10 mV 150 mV 10 mV 10 mV 250 mV 10 mV 10 mV 350 mV 10 mV 10 mV 450 mV 10 mV 10 mV DC Vertical Voltage deviation from linear least squares fit C2 Set the Vin 450 mV 10 mV 10 mV 350 mV 10 mV 10 mV 250 mV 10 mV 10 mV 150 mV 10 mV 10 mV 50 mV 10 mV 10 mV 50 mV 10 mV 10 mV 150 mV 10 mV 10 mV 4250 mV 10 mV 410 mV 4350 mV 10 mV 10 mV 450 mV 10 mV 10 mV Rise time Cl Model 80202 28 5 80203 80E 041 17 5 ps C2 Model 80E02 none 28 ps 80 03 80E 041 none 17 5 ps 4 26 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Performance Tests 80E00 Test Record Cont Performance Test Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum Analog Bandwidth 80201 C1 Max power 50 MHz ref none 3 dB Min power 50 MHz ref none 3dB Random Noise Displayed C1 Vert scale 2 mV 80E01 none 2 3 mV 1 mV 80E02 none 800 uV 1 mV
129. PRODUCTS SANYO DENKI NEC CORPORATION UNIVERSAL PRECISION PRODUCT POLYCAST INC SKS DIE CASTING amp MACHINING INC Address MICROWAVE CONNECTOR DIV 140 4TH AVE 6136 NE 87TH AVENUE 2200 US HWY 27 SOUTH PO BOX 1980 4 THOMAS ST 3065 BOWERS PO BOX 58130 6520 N BASIN AVE 6505 KAISER DR 7133 TELEGRAPH RD PO BOX 750 1880 SW MERLO DRIVE 605 JEFFERSON RD 8000 S FEDERAL WAY PO BOX 6 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL CO DIV TWO PANASONIC WAY 605 JEFFERSON RD DIVISION COOPER INDUSTRIES INC PO BOX 14460 BUSSMAN PARTS CASEY LAKEY 14525 SW WALKER ROAD 41440 CHRISTY ST DIVISION OF ILLINOIS TOOL WORK ST CHARLES ROAD 5720 C 121ST AVE STE 110 14150 SW KARL BRAUN DR PO BOX 500 456 SEASTROM STREET 5858 WILLOW LANE ATTN ALICIA SANFORD 516 18TH AVE 210 N BRINTON LAKE RD 585 EAST MAIN STREET C O TJ BO LIAISON 5 78 210 NEC BUILDING 1 1 SHIBA 5 CHOME MINATO KU 1775 NW CORNELIUS PASS RD 14140 SW 72ND AVE SUITE 100 1849 OAK ST City state zip code WALTHAM MA 02254 PORTLAND OR 97220 RICHMOND IN 47374 IRVINE CA 92718 SANTA CLARA CA 95051 8130 PORTLAND OR 97217 FREMONT CA 94555 MONTEBELLO CA 90640 6537 BEAVERTON OR 97006 WHIPPANY NJ 07981 BOISE ID 83707 0006 SECAUCUS NJ 07094 WHIPPANY NJ 07981 ST LOUIS MO 63178 BEAVERTON OR 97006 FREMONT CA 94538 ELGIN IL 60120 VANCOUVER WA 98682 BEAVERTON OR 97077 0001 TWIN FALLS ID
130. Prerequisites on page 4 34 Setup Install the test hookup 1 Install the 80 module into the left most small module compartment of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument see Figure 4 12 on page 4 40 2 Connect the synthesized signal generator to a 1 0 meter cable 3 Connect the remaining end of the 1 0 meter cable to a SMA power divider Connect two 0 5 meter cables to the two remaining SMA power divider connectors 4 Connect one of the 0 5 meter cables to Channel 1 of the S0EOX module Connect the remaining 0 5 meter cable to the TRIGGER DIRECT INPUT CSA8000 TDS 8000 000000000 00 Synthesized signal generator 959 99 d 0 29 Channel 1 1 0 Meter precision cable RF Output 7 Power divider TRIGGER DIRECT INPUT E 0 5 Meter precision cables Figure 4 12 External direct trigger sensitivity test hookup 5 Set the synthesized signal generator frequency to 2 5 GHz 400 ps period 4 40 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Main Instrument Set the synthesized output to 400 mV peak to peak 200 mV displayed Make the following settings to the CSA8000 TDS8000 a Select Default Setup from the Utilities menu on the menu bar at top of display b Select C1 from the Waveform Selector menu on the controls bar at the bottom of the display left corner In the Trig Setup di
131. Refer to Table 1 12 page 1 12 Prerequisites Equipment Digital Multimeter Item 1 required DC Power Supply Item 2 SMA T male to 2 SMA female Item 8 Two 50 precision coaxial cables SMA connectors Item 10 Adapter SMA female to BNC male connectors Item 18 Adapter BNC to dual banana plugs Item 19 As listed on page 4 19 and under Prerequisites on page 4 53 i CAUTION To avoid damage to the electrical module do not exceed 2 volts input Setup Install the test hookup 1 4 56 Perform instrument and module compensation see Perform the Compensa tion on page 4 1 Set the output of a DC power supply to off or 0 volts Connect a SMA T to Channel 1 of the sampling module Connect a 50 Q precision coaxial cable to one side of the SMA T Connect a 50 Q precision coaxial cable to the remaining side of the SMA T See Figure 4 17 Connect one 50 Q precision coaxial cable to the output of a DC power supply through a dual banana connector Connect the remaining 50 Q precision coaxial cable to a digital multimeter See Figure 4 17 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Electrical Sampling Modules CSA8000 TDS8000 0 00 009900 0221 Digital multimeter 000000009 00 000 000000 DC power supply 50 Q Precision cable 50 Q Precision cable Figure 4 17 Vertical DC
132. S8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Adjustment Procedures 6 Verify that the DMM reads 0 0 V 0 1 mV GPIB cable CSA8000 TDS8000 Controller Synthesized signal generator Channel 1 50 Q Power divider Figure 5 2 Adjustment setup using the signal generator Internal 10 MHz Adjust Connect the instrument to a signal generator as shown in Figure 5 2 Setup Set the signal generator as follows m Frequency to 1 GHz m Amplitude to 1 0 V peak to peak m Output to on Preset the CSA8000 TDS8000 controls NOTE CSA8000 TDS8000 settings Acquisition Horizontal Measurement Trigger or Vertical menus are located in the Setups dialog which can be popped up by selecting the Setup Menu m Select C1 in the Waveform Selector W Acquisition menu Acquisition to Average 64 samples m Horizontal menu Timebase Scale to 250 ps division m Horizontal menu All Timebases Mode Lock to Int 10M Hz m Measurement menu Select Meas Timing Cross CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 5 5 Adjustment Procedures 5 6 m 00 12 13 14 Measurement menu select Statistics Set the calibration value to default by sending the following GPIB com mand CALCOMP DOUBLE InternallOMHzRefFreq 0e6 Enter the following GPIB command to turn the instrumen
133. SA8000 TDS8000 controls 1 Install the 80COX Optical Sampling Module into Channel 1 of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument GPIB cable CSA8000 TDS 8000 80C 0X Controller Rear trigger Optical impulser generator Variable optical attenuator OPTICAL OPTICAL OPTICAL adis lt OUTPUT DIRECT INPUT 10dB Optical attenuator TRIGGER DIRECT Fiber optic cable Fiber optic cable 50 Coaxial cable Figure 4 26 Minimum optical bandwidth and reference receiver frequency response hookup 4 90 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Optical Sampling Modules 2 Connect the 10 dB optical attenuator to the output of the optical impulse generator 3 Connect a fiber optic cable between the 10 dB optical attenuator and the input of the OA5002 variable optical attenuator 4 Connect a fiber optic cable between the output of the variable optical attenuator and the OPTICAL INPUT of the optical sampling module 5 Connect a 50 coaxial cable from the rear trigger SYN on the optical impulse generator to the TRIGGER DIRECT input on the TDS8000 or CSA8000 6 Start with about 30 dB of attenuation on the variable attenuator NOTE To avoid dispersing the narrow optical impulse signal keep all fiber lengths as short as possible Lengths that are 2 to 3 meters long are acceptable
134. Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures Procedures for External Modules The following procedures are found here and are listed in order presented Front Panel Knobs 1 Front Panel Knobs Trim all Bottom cover Left and Right covers Line Fuse and Line Cord Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed Use an angled tip tweezers Item 9 and locate the the front panel see Figure 6 2 on page 6 11 Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its bottom is down on the work surface and its front is facing you Remove the knob s Grasp any knob you want to remove and pull it straight out from the front panel about a 4 inch to create some clearance between the base of the knob and the front panel Insert the tweezers between the knob and front panel and use them to remove the knob See Figure 6 1 Reinstallation To reinstall align knob to shaft and push it in until it snaps apply pressure to the backs of the encoders while pushing the knob on the shaft CAUTION To prevent damage to the encoders located onto the circuit board Figure 6 1 Knob removal CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 9 Removal and Installation Procedures Trim and Carrying Handle 6 10 Locate module to be removed Locate the Trim in the locator diagram See Figure 6 7 page 6 18 Remove the front panel trim Use Figure 6 2 page 6 11 as a guide a b G
135. Service Manual Tektronix CSA8000 Communications Signal Analyzer TDS8000 Digital Sampling Oscilloscope 071 0438 01 Warning The servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid personal injury do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Refer to all safety summaries prior to performing service www tektronix com Copyright Tektronix Inc rights reserved Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved Tektronix Inc P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc WARRANTY Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment If this product proves defective during its warranty period Tektronix at its option will either repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product This warranty applies only to products returned to the designated Tektronix depot or the Tektronix authorized representative from which the product was originally purchased For products returned to other locations Customer will be assessed an applicable service charge The preceding
136. Sy 5 5 2 b SyxSy Syy Sy 5 5 72 x abscissa controlled value measured value S Sum x S 5 2 S Sum xy Sy Sum y n number of points 1 Set up the CSA8000 TDS8000 as follows a Select C1 from the Waveform Selector menu on the controls bar at the bottom of the display left corner b In the Acq Setup dialog box W set Acquisition Mode to Average 16 samples Inthe Vert Setup dialog box set Scale to 100 mV division set Offset to 0 mV CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 59 Electrical Sampling Modules 4 60 d In the Meas Setup dialog box m make sure the channel under test is selected in the Source menu select Meas 1 and then choose Meas gt Amplitude gt Mean Set the Vin 450 mV Read DVM measurement and record it in the Input Vin and the x columns Table 4 3 on page 4 61 Read mean measurement and record it in the Measured V mV and y columns Table 4 3 Repeat steps 2 3 for all other Vin Calculate Sx Sxx Sy and S y for each setting a Copy the Input V value to x column b Copy the Measured V mV value to y column c Calculate x2 and record in x column d Calculate xy and record in xy column e Add the up the x 2 y and xy columns and record the sums in the Sy Sy and Syy columns Calculate a b a Calculate a see algorithm on page 4 59 b Calculate b see algorithm on
137. T Debug Power On Debug VSB5 Figure 6 40 Location of debug pins Checking the Power Supply Voltages Power off the mainframe and remove any modules installed in it Power on the instrument and connect the reference lead of a digital voltmeter to chassis ground such as the top of the power supply Attach a 0 025 inch square pin to the probe tip of the other lead and insert it into a pin on one of the connectors The pins that should be carrying voltages are listed in Table 6 5 The location of the 1 and P2 connectors is shown in Figure 6 41 on page 6 73 Measure the power supply voltages with the voltmeter and compare each reading to the values listed in the tables If the voltages are within about 5 of the nominal voltages your power supply is functional 6 72 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Troubleshooting Table 6 5 Power supply voltages Front power distribution board P2 Pins A1 B1 C1 Pins A13 B13 C13 Pins A15 B15 C15 Pins A17 B17 C17 Pins A24 B24 C24 If the instrument Will Not Boot PC NEN P1 power supply 6 Rear power distribution Frontpower circuit board P2 power supply distribution circuit board Figure 6 41 Connectors J1 and J2 If there is a display on the VGA port but not on the LCD replace the display assembly LCD lamps and cable If the display adapter
138. Use a torque wrench when connecting the terminators adapters attenuator and power sensor in this setup Use 8 X 0 3 inch pounds of torque NOTE To perform the External direct trigger delay jitter short term optimized and locked to internal 10 MHz reference modes procedure you must upgrade to product software version 1 2 43 or higher Upgrade 1 2 43 is available as a download You can determine the software version of the instrument under test by selecting About TDS CSAS000 in the Help menu on screen For upgrade information see Contacting Tektronix on page xvii STOP Throughout these procedures when steps call for the display of setup dialog boxes you can display them from the Setup menu in the menu bar at the top of the screen These procedures assume you will display and dismiss the setup dialog boxes as needed CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 33 Main Instrument Time interval accuracy short term optimized and locked to internal 10 MHz reference modes Equipment Synthesized signal generator Item 13 required 0 5 meter precision SMA cable Item 10 1 0 meter precision SMA cable Item 11 Power divider Item 9 80E0X sampling module Prerequisites As listed on page 4 19 and under Prerequisites on page 4 34 Setup Install the test hookup 1 Install the 80 module into the left most small module compartment of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument see Figure 4 10 on page 4
139. V Test Follow this procedure to make the Vertical DC accuracy checks 1 Select the DC supply voltage to the settings listed in Table 4 2 page 4 58 Press the CLEAR DATA button on the front panel Press the RUN STOP button on the front panel Record input voltage reading on the digital multimeter Dium ip 29 Record the voltage for the Mean measurement displayed on the CSA8000 TDS8000 screen 4 58 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Electrical Sampling Modules 6 Calculate DC voltage accuracy error input V meas V 7 CHECK that the error calculated in step 6 is within the limits listed Table 4 2 for the associated vertical scale and offset and DC voltage settings Enter the value on test record 8 Repeat steps 1 through 7 until all DC voltage and offset settings listed in Table 4 2 are checked for the channel under test 9 Change all settings in the setup to Channel 2 and then repeat steps 1 through 7 until all DC voltage settings and offset settings listed in Table 4 2 are checked End of Procedure Test Follow this procedure to make the DC vertical voltage accuracy single point compensated checks The gain of the 80E00 is equal to the slope of a regression line of the paired measurement readings in Table 4 3 with the Vin values plotted along the x axis and the measured values plotted along the Y axis Linear least squares fit algorithm y ax b where a NSy S
140. W ADHESIVE 80E03 MARKER IDENT LABEL 0 010 P OLY W ADHESIVE 80E 04 HOUSING ALUMINUM SAMPLING HEAD 80E01 PANEL FRONT ALUMINUM CHRO MATE W TEK SILVERGRAY MARKER IDENT LABEL 0 010 P OLY W ADHESIVE 80E01 Mfr code 0 01 2601 2563 2601 0 01 1163 1163 1AW87 5Y400 5Y400 5Y400 0 05 0 05 0 05 5Y 400 5Y 400 0 05 Mfr part number ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 386 7293 00 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 391 0239 00 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 366 0804 00 ROSPBKNB 366 0804 00 ROSPBKNB ORDER BY DESCRIPTION ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 380 1132 00 333 4340 00 335 0151 00 335 0152 00 335 0153 00 380 1138 00 333 4371 00 335 0339 00 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List Figure 10 6 Electrical modules CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 10 17 Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Fig amp index Tektronix part Serial no Serial no Mfr number number effective discont d Qty Name amp description code Mfr part number 7 1 200 4568 00 1 COVER OPTICAL MODULE 0 050 AL TK1943 200 4568 00 2 335 0370 00 1 MARKER IDENT ANTI STATIC LABEL 0 005 POLY 0 805 335 0102 00 3 211 0373 00 7 SCREW MACHINE 4 40 X 0 250 P NH STL CD PLT T10 93907 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 4 105 1115 00 2 LATCH ADJ USTABLE GRIP 16 10 511 16 94222 16 10 511 16 5 200 4104 00 1 CAP DUST E
141. a more 3 Click the Whats This button in the main display or in a robust dialog box The button varies in form as shown at right description After clicking the mouse pointer changes to the following icon R 4 click the control you want described bubble pops up describing the control See below Win Daaba Hak twr e Hur 3 Tagger Sauce Erana Dect Enana intemal Check wigger Dick th s and zekect tre rick frequency fron the right Lice Cloth iigge vee arkir with TOA bo ssschronime ine penarstion of TOR ran pusas Level wae e CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Control elements amp resources m See Installation page 2 1 File alz fajne Run Stop Aca Mod Timing 20 0mV Edit Setup Utilities View C1 10 mY div What s This button for main display What s This button for dialog boxes Cursor Sas Wm Database Hist Mak TOR Dip Vet Hoz Trig Trigger Source External Direct 2 17 Operating Instructions Overview For in depth 5 Most dialog boxes whether setup or other types have a contextual Help button as shown right Click the button to open the CERES overviews help system with an over
142. ab turn off uncheck Track High and Track Low set High to measured High value in the Measurement box at the right of the display set Low to the measured Low value CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 65 Electrical Sampling Modules e turn on check Annotations There should be four dashed horizontal lines with the top and bottom lines superimposed on the high and low levels of the waveform showing that the high and low references are properly set for rise time measurement f turn off uncheck Annotations In the Acq Setup dialog box set Stop After to Run Stop Button Only Press the CLEAR DATA button Press the RUN STOP button to start acquisition cV Use the knobs in the front panel HORIZONTAL section to change the Scale to 10 ps division while adjusting the Position to keep the first rising edge of the step waveform centered on the display 9 Press CLEAR DATA 10 After about 20 seconds note the Mean value of the Rise measurement This is T sys the system rise time which is a combination of the step generator the 80 module rise times 11 Calculate T moa the 80 module rise time as follows 2 Dos T mo sys gen Where T gen is the step generator rise time 12 Check that T mod meets the tolerances in Table 4 4 13 Repeat the Setup and Test sections for Channel 2 Table 4 4 Computed rise time Module T computed 80E02 lt 28 p
143. able 1 12 page 1 12 Equipment required Cable coaxial 50 20 in 0 5m male to male SMA Item 31 Cable coaxial 50 Q male to male SMA Item 32 Attenuator 20 dB female to male SMA connectors Generator sinewave Item 27 Prerequisites As listed on page 4 19 and under Prerequisites on page 4 53 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 111 80A01 Trigger Preamplifier Module 4 112 Setup Install the test hookup 1 Install the 80A01 module into the left most small module compartment of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument see Figure 4 33 2 Install an 80E00 module into the small module compartment next to the 80A01 module of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument see Figure 4 33 3 Connect the clock output of a pattern generator item 27 item 31 to the 80A01 input using a coaxial cable item 31 4 Connect the 1 32 clock output of a pattern generator item 27 item 31 to the Trigger Prescale input of the oscilloscope front panel using a coaxial cable item 32 item 31 5 Connect the 80A01 output to a 6 db attenuator item 32 using a coaxial cable item 32 6 Connect the output of the 6 db attenuator to the input of the S0EOX sampling head as shown in Figure 32 CSA8000 TDS 8000 Pattern Generator 1 32 Clock TRIGGER 80A01 Out to PRESCALE 80E0x Ch3 INPUT Figure 4 33 80A00 test hookup 7 Power
144. accuracy test hookup 6 Set up the CSA8000 TDS8000 as follows a Select C1 from the Waveform Selector menu on the controls bar at the bottom of the display left corner b Inthe Trig Setup dialog box set Trigger Source to Internal Clock Inthe Acq Setup dialog box W set Acquisition Mode to Average 32 samples m under Stop After check the Condition box and select Average Complete from the pull down menu d the Horz Setup dialog box set Scale to 2 ns division W set Position to O this will revert to a minium non zero value set Horizontal Reference to 0 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 57 Electrical Sampling Modules e In the Meas Setup dialog box m make sure the channel under test is selected in the Source menu select Meas 1 and then choose Select Meas gt Amplitude gt Mean f In the Vert Setup dialog box set Scale to 100 mV division set Offset to 1100 mV Table 4 2 DC Voltage measurement accuracy DC power supply settings Offset settings Accuracy limits 1550 mV 1100 mV 18 7 mV 1350 mV 1100 mV 147 mV 1100 mV 1100 mV zE9 7 mV 850 mV 1100 mV 147 mV 650 mV 1100 mV 18 7 mV 450 mV 0 11 mV 250 mV 0 7 0 0 2 mV 250 0 7 450 0 mV 650 1100 18 7 mV 4850 1100 147 mV 1100 mV 1100 2597 mV 1350 mV 1100 mV 147 mV 1550 mV 1100 mV 18 7 m
145. al 6 43 Figure 6 26 Microprocessor 1 6 45 Figure 6 27 Processor board removal 6 47 Figure 6 28 T 10 screws and threaded posts 6 49 Figure 6 29 Acquisition circuit board assembly removal 6 50 Figure 6 30 Large module interface circuit board removal 6 52 Figure 6 31 Small and Large module chassis removal 6 54 Figure 6 32 Module door spring removal 6 56 Figure 6 33 Module slot door removal 6 57 Figure 6 34 Module ejector handles removal 6 59 Figure 6 35 Spring arm position 6 60 Figure 6 36 Electrical module hardware removal 6 61 Figure 6 37 Optical module cover removal 6 63 Figure 6 38 80401 parts 1 6 64 Figure 6 39 Location of power on and over current LEDs 6 71 Figure 6 40 Location of debug pins 6 72 Figure 6 41 Connectors Jl and 2 6 73 Figure 9 1 CSA8000 TDS8000 series block diagram 9 1 Figure 9 2 80E01 Sampling module block diagram 9 2 Figure 9 3 80E02 and 80E03 Sampling module block diagram 9 3 Figure 9 4 80E04 TDR Sampling module block diagram 9 4 Figure 9 5 80C01 Optical sampling block diagram
146. al Tekprobe S MA Levels 1 and 2 Hot switching is permitted on this real time accessory interface Prescaled triggering on signal applied to dedicated front panel connector with Holdoff Auto Normal Metastability R eject On Off External prescaled trigger specifications apply only under the condition that no other trigger source is applied to respective connectors Short term optimized mode and locked to internal 10 MHz reference specifications only apply under the condition that there is no external 10 MHz reference applied to the front panel connector 50 AC coupled input resistance divide by eight prescaler ratio fixed level zero volts External prescaled 2 5 Vpp trigger absolute maxi mum input External prescaled The limits are as follows trigger sensitivity Frequency range Sensitivity 2 3 GHz 800 MV op 3 10 GHz 600 MV op CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules System Specifications Table 1 3 System Trigger Cont Description Characteristics External prescaled Frequency range Sensitivity trigger sensitivity typ cal pee 10 12 5 GHz 1000 MV pp typical External prescaled 1 5 ps RMS 10 ppm of horizontal position or better trigger delay jitter Short term optimized mode External prescaled 1 0 ps RMS 5 ppm of horizontal position typical trigger delay jitter Short term optimized mode Typical External prescaled 2 5 ps RMS 0 10 ppm
147. al Modules 80A01 Module Locate module to be removed Locate the Front Panel assembly Figure 6 10 page 6 23 Additional modules to be removed m Trim Front panel CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 21 Removal and Installation Procedures 2 Remove the Front Panel assembly See Figure 6 10 page 6 23 3 Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its bottom 1s down on the work surface and its front panel is facing you a Remove the six T 15 Torxdrive screws that secure the Front panel assembly to the front chassis b Grasp the top of Front Panel assembly and pull forward to allow access to the ribbon cable connector on the front panel board c Use the inch flat bladed screwdriver to carefully lift J1 cable connector lock up to disconnect J1 flex cable from the display module assembly See Figure 6 11 page 6 24 Note the connector s pin 1 index mark and the black stripe on the cable for later reassembly d Pull the Front Panel assembly forward and remove from the instrument 4 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps a through d to reinstall the front panel assembly 6 22 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures 6 23 NS Front panel assembly 5 J 1 ribbon cable Front panel square opening 2 15 Torxdrive gt screw 6 Nu oo
148. allation Procedures 6 44 Microprocessor 1 Locate module to be removed Locate the Front Panel board in the locator diagram Internal Modules Figure 6 8 page 6 19 Additional modules to be removed m Trim m Bottom cover Left and Right covers CAUTION The microprocessor is susceptible to static discharge damage Service this component only in a static free environment Observe standard handling precautions for static sensitive devices while servicing the chassis Always wear a grounded wrist and foot straps while servicing the microprocessor NLX or processor boards 2 Remove the microprocessor See Figure 6 26 page 6 45 a b Disconnect the fan power cable J401 from the NLX board Push down and pull out on the holding bracket located nearest to the outer edge of the circuit board Pull out and unlatch the remaining bracket Lift the fan heatsink assembly out from the microprocessor Lift the microprocessor socket locking lever upward Remove the microprocessor 3 Reinstallation To reinstall the microprocessor to the NLX board as follows Install the microprocessor in the socket Lower the socket locking lever Make sure the fan heatsink assembly is positioned with the fan cable toward the outer edge of the circuit board Place the fan heatsink assembly on the microprocessor to allow you to latch the bracket to the tab that is nearest to the center of the circuit board Set the remaining
149. alog box select External Direct select Metastablility Reject m select Auto Mode d Inthe Vert Setup dialog box set Scale to 20 mV division set Offset to 0 e Inthe Horz Setup dialog box set Scale to 200 ps division m set Horizontal Reference to 0 set Position to 19 ns Test Follow this procedure to make the direct trigger sensitivity check 1 In the Meas Setup dialog box a make sure the channel under test is selected in the Source menu b select Meas 1 and then choose Select Meas Amplitude Amplitude select Meas 2 and then choose Select Meas gt Timing gt Frequency Adjust the synthesizer signal generator level until the amplitude measure ment readout on the instrument screen indicates the amplitude is 100 mV Set the signal generator frequency to 100 MHz Adjust the Horizontal Scale to allow at least two full periods to be displayed Verify that the frequency read out on the instrument screen is within 10 from the true value CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 41 Main Instrument 6 Setthe signal generator frequency to each of the following values adjust the horizontal scale to the corresponding sec div setting and repeat steps 4 and 5 m 800 at 500 ps division m 1 GHz at 500 ps division m 2 GHz at 200 ps division m 3 GHz at 100 ps division End of Procedure 4 42 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Main Instrument
150. and Locked to 10 MHz Reference The 10 MHz reference may be internal or external Strobe placement accuracy for a given horizontal interval and position on same strobe line per table below Contribution from 80E 04 sampling module is included in specification lt 20 ps div 1 ps 1 of interval gt 21 ps div 8 ps 0 1 of interval Strobe placement accuracy for a given horizontal interval and position on same strobe line per table below Contribution from 80 04 sampling module is included in specification Range Time Interval Accuracy lt 20 ps div 1 ps 1 of interval gt 21 ps div 8 ps 0 01 of interval Horizontal deskew range and resolution 500 ps to 100 ns on any individual channel in 1 ps increments 1 The total number of samples contained in a single acquired waveform record memory length in IEEE 1057 2 2 1 80E02 sampling module is included in this specification CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules System Specifications Table 1 3 System Trigger Description Trigger sources Auto normal mode Characteristics External Direct Edge Trigger External Precsaled Trigger Internal Clock Trigger and Clock Recovery with appropriately equipped optical modules Normal mode wait for trigger Auto mode Trigger automatically generated after 100 ms time out Slope or select Edge mode Triggers on positive slewing edge Edge mode Triggers on ne
151. ate other than None In this preliminary setup the clock recovery circuitry is enabled for the S0COX CR Optical Sampling Module but the 71058000 or CSAS000 instrument timebase receives its trigger events from the TRIGGER DIRECT input signal and not the actual recovered clock 2 Setthe data rate of the D3186 Pulse Pattern Generator to the rate setting for the clock recovery rate that you selected in step 1 see Table 4 10 3 Adjust the Horizontal SCALE control on the front panel of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument to the setting listed in the table for the clock recovery rate that you selected in step 1 see Table 4 10 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Optical Sampling Modules Table 4 10 Clock recovery settings TDS8000 or Optical sampling 5 8000 module Clock recovery rate 03186 rate setting scale setting 80C01 CR OC 12 0 62208 Gb s 500 ps div OC 48 2 48832 Gb s 100 ps div 80C03 CR FC 1063 1 0625 Gb s 200 ps div GBE 1 2500 Gb s 200 ps div OC 48 2 48832 Gb s 100 ps div 2 5 Gb s 2 5000 Gb s 100 ps div At this point in the procedure the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument is triggered from the 1 32 clock from the D3186 Pulse Pattern Generator The clock signal from the 80COX CR Optical Sampling Module that is connected to C3 on the 80E02 Sampling Module should be synchronous with the signal from the pulse pattern generator see Figure 4 31 If the signals are not synchronous see Fig
152. ator Tektronix Part number 174 1341 00 Tektronix Part number 174 1428 00 Tektronix Part number 015 1020 01 Anritsu Wiltron 69187B Anritsu Wilton ML2437A Anritsu Wilton ML2425A 11900 11900B Tektronix Part number 015 0572 00 Tektronix Part number 103 0090 00 HP8490D w option 10 Gore Tex 0 025 0 Tektronix Part number 015 1001 00 Tektronix 80C02 Sampling Module Tektronix 0A5002 Calmar FPL 01 Optical Impulser J DS Uniphase Model 4208 Advantest 03186 12 Gb s Pulse Pattern Generator 28 Attenuator optical 30mm 10 dB single mode FC to FC female to male Tektronix part number 119 5118 00 29 Cable delay coaxial Coaxial cable 50 Q 2 ns delay with SMA male each end Tektronix part number 015 0560 00 4 20 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Performance Tests Table 4 1 Equipment Required Cont Item number and description 30 Cable fiber optic 012 31 Cable coaxial 80401 only Qt 2 32 Cable coaxial 80401 only Minimum requirements Single mode 2 m FC PC to FC PC 50 4 ns delay with SMA male at each end 50 1 ns delay with SMA male at each end Part number or model Tektronix part number 174 1910 00 Tektronix Part number 015 0561 00 Tektronix Part number 015 0562 00 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 21 Performance Tests 4 22 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampl
153. be displayed CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 51 Main Instrument 5 Verify that the frequency read out on the instrument screen is within 10 from the true value 6 Setthe signal generator frequency to each of the following frequencies and the horizontal scale to the corresponding sec div and repeat steps 3 through 5 m 3GHzat 100 ps division m 5GHzat50 ps division m 10 GHz at 20 ps division End of Procedure 4 52 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Electrical Sampling Modules These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the electrical sampling modules and are listed as checked specifications Refer to Table 1 11 on page 1 11 Prerequisites Be sure you have performed the following prerequisites and the Prerequisites on page 4 19 before doing any procedures in this section m Install the 80EOX modules in one of the electrical sampling slots in the CSA8000 or TDS8000 instrument Check 80E0X module push buttons Push the select buttons channels 1 and 2 and observe that the yellow indicators lights to Power on Push them again and observe that the lights turn off NOTE Use a calibrated torque wrench when connecting the terminators adapters attenuator and power sensor in this setup Use 8 x 0 3 inch pounds of torque STOP Throughout these procedures when steps call for the display of setup dialog boxes you can display them from the Setup me
154. bient temperature between 20 C and 302 C Nominal freq response is specified for optical input signals of modulation magnitude such that 2 mW 200 uWp for 80C03 or less signal is applied at the sampler input for 80C05 at 40 GHz 7 Theoptical channel noise with no optical noise input Dark Level 8 Clock recovery versions reduce the power reaching the vertical channel splitter to clock recovery produces loss Therefore the non clock recovery modules more closely exhibit the typical noise performance CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 31 80C00 Modules Specifications Table 1 19 Optical modules Clock recovery option CR Name Characteristics Effective wavelength Range range 1270 nm to 1600 nm 1270 nm to 1600 nm 700 nm to 1650 nm 1270 nm to 1600 nm Operating data rates 80C01 622 08 MHz 1000 ppm OC 12 STM 4 2 48832 GHz 1000 ppm 0 48 5 16 80C02 9 95328 Gb s 1000 ppm 0 192 5 64 80C03 1 0625 Gb s 1000 ppm FC 1063 1 2500 Gb s 1000 ppm 2 48832 Gb s 1000 ppm 0 48 5 16 2 5000 Gb s 1000 ppm 2X GBE 80C04 CR1 9 95328 60 5 1000 ppm 0 192 5 64 80C04 CR2 9 95328 Gb s 1000 ppm 0 192 5 64 10 664 Gb s 1000 ppm FEC The incoming data stream must be of non return to zero format NRZ and for OC 192 STM 64 must have a data sequence content which provides both isolated 1s and multi consecutive mark sequen
155. cations Table 1 19 Optical modules Clock recovery option CR Cont Name Characteristics Jitter performance of the system while using the optical module clock recovery as the trigger source is warranted only while no active signal is applied to the main instrument s External Trigger or Prescaler input 5 Internal use for trigger results in a total system jitter of sum of squares therefore the displayed waveform may normally exhibit slightly more than 1 ps RMS jitter Table 1 20 Optical modules Mechanical Name Characteristics Construction material Chassis parts constructed of aluminum alloy front panel constructed of plastic laminate circuit boards constructed of glass laminate Cabinet is aluminum Weight 80C01 1 13 kg 2 5 105 80C01 CR 1 34 kg 2 95 lbs 80C02 0 95 kg 2 1 Ibs 80C02 CR 1 22 kg 2 70 165 80C03 1 13 kg 2 5 Ibs 80C03 CR 1 34 kg 2 95 lbs 80C 04 0 95 kg 2 1 Ibs 80C04 CR1 1 22 kg 2 70 165 80C04 CR2 1 22 kg 2 70 165 80C 05 1 22 kg 2 70 lbs 80C 06 1 22 kg 2 70 Ibs Overall dimensions Height 25 6 mm 1 0 in Width 166 7 mm 6 5 in Depth 307 7 mm 12 0 in 1 34 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 80C00 Modules Specifications Table 1 21 Optical modules Environmental Name Temperature Characteristics Installed and operating 10 C to 40 C Reference receivers frequency response tolerances 30 GHz mo
156. cause personal injury or lead to further damage to the instrument Table 6 1 External inspection check list Item Cabinet front panel and cover Front panel knobs Connectors Inspect For Cracks scratches deformations damaged hardware Missing damaged or loose knobs Broken shells cracked insulation and deformed contacts Dirt in connectors Repair Action Repair or replace defective module Repair or replace missing or defective knobs Repair or replace defective modules Clear or wash out dirt 80 0 male fiber con nections Carrying handle and cabinet feet Accessories Lint or dust on all male fiber connections Correct operation Missing items or parts of items bent pins broken or frayed cables and damaged connec tors Clean all male fiber connections with a lint free cleaning cloth Repair or replace defective module Repair or replace damaged or missing items frayed cables and defective modules Flat Panel Display Cleaning The portable mainframe display is a soft plastic display and must be treated with care during cleaning display A CAUTION Improper cleaning agents or methods can damage the flat panel Avoid using abrasive cleaners or commercial glass cleaners to clean the display surface Avoid spraying liquids directly on the display surface Avoid scrubbing the display with excessive force CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Inst
157. ces that is 2 3 4 and so forth logical 1s in a consecutive row NOTE a fixed pattern of 10101010 does not meet that requirement the 80C02 CR clock recovery function may not properly lock to such a pattern The 80C02 CR will however typically lock to a 11001100 pattern this is equivalent to a 2 48832 GHz optical square wave Optical sensitivity Module Maximum Minimum range clock recover 80C01 5 0 3 16 mW typical 10 0 dBm 100 uW typical optical input power 80C02 7 dBm 5 0 mW typical 10 0 dBm 100 uW typical 7 5 dBm warranted 80003 4 0 dBm 400 uW warranted 16 0 dBm 25 uW warranted 80C04 7 dBm 5 0 mW typical 10 0 dBm 100 uW typical 7 5 dBm warranted Clock and data 80C01 gt 300 mVpp typical electrical output 80C02 Serial DATA output gt 700 typical amplitudes Serial CLOCK output 1 5 Vip typical 1 16th CLOCK output 600 MV pp typica 80C03 gt 350 MV pp typical 80C04 Serial DATA output gt 700 mV pp typical Serial CLOCK output 1 5 typical 1 16th CLOCK output 600 MV pp typica 1 32 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 80C00 Modules Specifications Table 1 19 Optical modules Clock recovery option CR Cont Name Clock and data rise time and fall times Characteristics 80C01 lt 200 ps 80C02 Serial DATA output 30 ps Serial CLOCK output 30 ps 1 16th CLOCK output 300 ps 80C03 250 ps
158. connector side c Remove the cover from the chassis 3 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps a through d to reinstall the front panel assembly 1 Lift back edge of the cover to clear the rear connector Locking tab 8 2 Slide the cover back to free the locking tab at the front edge of the cover 3 Rotate and lift Optical connector cover from module Figure 6 37 Optical module cover removal CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 63 Removal and Installation Procedures 80A01 module 1 Orient the module Set the 80401 module so that its left side is down on the work surface and its right side is facing you CAUTION Static discharge can damage any semiconductor in the instrument or N sampling module To prevent damage from static discharge wear wrist and foot grounding straps while handling the module chassis Service should be per formed in a static free work station by a qualified service technician Minimize handling of static sensitive components 2 Remove the front panel See Figure 6 38 page 6 64 a Remove two coaxial terminators on the front panel connectors b Remove two phillips screws that secure the front panel to the cover Remove the front panel Lock down shaft Shaft bracket Antistatic label Terminators ES Front panel Label Figure 6 38 80A01 parts removal 3 Remove the cover See Figure 6 38 page 6 64 6 64 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 In
159. cover to the chassis c Slide the chassis out toward the rear of the cover Front panel Figure 6 36 Electrical module hardware removal CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 61 Removal and Installation Procedures Exchanging electrical sampling module Replacing the sampling 6 62 module chassis Reinstalling exchange module serial number A If it is determined that a sampling module failure is caused by an internal part you must exchange the complete sampling module chassis to Tektronix The customer will keep the cover and attaching hardware Sampling module exchange can be made with either your local Tektronix service center or central Tektronix exchange in Beaverton Oregon 1 Transport the chassis sampling modules with terminations on the inputs 2 Transport the chassis sampling modules in their original containers and store the sampling modules on a metal or conductive surface 3 When handling the exposed chassis sampling module only do not touch any exposed component on the circuit board Grasp the exposed module by the edges of the circuit board or the rear or front housings Program the serial number printed on the sampling module cover into the new replacement sampling module chassis 1 Reinstall the chassis into the cover following the procedure on page 6 61 2 Install the electrical sampling module into one of the instrument s slots 3 Connect a GPIB cable to the
160. covers m Front and Rear Power Distribution Boards 2 Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its top is down on the work surface and its bottom is facing you 3 Remove the Acquisition assembly The Acquisition assembly includes the Acquisition board and Electrical Front End board See Figure 6 29 page 6 50 a Remove the 5 16 inch nut that secures the TRIGGER PRESCALE SMA cable to the front panel b Remove the nine T 15 Torxdrive screws securing the Acquisition assembly to the chassis NOTE Six Acquisition assembly screws are 0 312 inch long Three Acquisition assembly screws are 1 750 inch long The 1 750 inch screw locations are marked on the circuit board c Disconnect the two SMB connectors that are connected to the trigger hybrid located on the front edge of the Acquisition circuit board d Disconnect two coaxial cables from 18 and J16 located on the Acquisi tion circuit board e Disconnect J10 ribbon cable connector f Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its front panel surface is facing you Push the module slot covers in to access the slot connectors and attaching hardware threaded posts for later reassembly Make sure you reinstall the Torxdrive screw and threaded posts in the correct position The 3 6 inch hex threaded posts have etched lines around their mounting holes Interchanging the threaded posts with the Torxdrive screws could cause damage to your module connector See refe
161. ct trigger level accuracy These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the system trigger and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications Refer to Table 1 3 on page 1 3 Equipment required Synthesized signal generator Item 13 0 5 meter precision SMA cable Item 10 1 0 meter precision SMA cable Item 11 Power divider Item 9 80E0X sampling module Prerequisites As listed on page 4 19 and under Prerequisites on page 4 34 Setup Install the test hookup 1 Install the 80 module into the left most small module compartment of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument see Figure 4 11 on page 4 37 2 Connect the synthesized signal generator to a 1 0 meter cable 3 Connect the remaining end of the 1 0 meter cable to a SMA power divider Connect two 0 5 meter cables to the two remaining SMA power divider connectors 4 Connect one of the 0 5 meter cables to Channel 1 of the S0EOX module Connect the remaining 0 5 meter cable to the TRIGGER DIRECT INPUT CSA8000 TDS 8000 Synthesized signal generator koe 93 gt 20 O Channel 1 1 0 Meter precision cable RF Output Power divider TRIGGER DIRECT INPUT 0 5 Meter precision cables Figure 4 11 External direct trigger test hookup 5 Setthe synthesized signal generator frequency to 2 5 GHz 400 ps period CSA8000
162. ctor cst Soest ge HER e ERE RR RS Channel Selection nete dcr b als DR ege Connector llamas bk ba es DR eges IDROnJIndicator ntes e igno CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules xi xiii XV XV xvi pipa OO NNNM DRE ee ARRUDA N eG Table of Contents Theory of Operation 80C00 Optical Sampling Module Operation 2 25 Attenuating Optical Signals 2 25 22 2 5 E pdt dates weed 2 26 Optical Input Connector 2 26 Clock Recovery 2 26 Hold Down Screws 2 27 80 01 Trigger Prescale Preamplifier Module Operation 2 27 Signal 2 28 Logic Conventions 22222452050 eS beak Rex badass awake ees 3 1 Mainframe Overview iss Re RS S Banas 3 1 Performance Verification Procedures Brief Procedures EI RN TREE 4 3 Perform the Diagnostics 4 3 Perform the 4 5 Perform the Functional Tests
163. d Optical modules The following subsections are included Preventing ESD Preparation Introduction plus general information on preventing damage to internal modules when doing maintenance Inspection and Cleaning Information and procedures for inspecting the instrument and cleaning its external and internal modules Removal and Installation Procedures Procedures for the removal of defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules Also included is a procedure for disassembly of the instrument for cleaning Troubleshooting Information for isolating failed modules Included are instructions for operating the instrument s internal diagnostic routines and troubleshooting trees Most of the trees make use of these internal diagnostic routines to speed fault isolation to a module Before servicing this product read the Safety Summary and Introduction at the front of the manual and the ESD information below instrument CAUTION Static discharge can damage any semiconductor component in this When performing any service which requires internal access to the instrument adhere to the following precautions to avoid damaging internal modules and their components due to electrostatic discharge ESD 1 2 Minimize handling of static sensitive circuit boards and components Transport and store static sensitive modules in their static protected containers or on a metal rail Label any package that contain
164. d Sampling Modules Repackaging Instructions This section contains the information needed to repackage the portable main frame for shipment or storage Packaging When repacking the instrument or sampling modules for shipment use the original packaging If the packaging is unavailable or unfit for use contact your local Tektronix representative to obtain new packaging Refer to Contacting Tektronix on page xvii for Tektronix s address email address and phone number Seal the shipping carton with an industrial stapler or strapping tape Shipping to the Service Center Contact the Service Center to get an RMA return material authorization number and any return or shipping information you may need If the instrument is being shipped to a Tektronix Service Center enclose the following information m The RMA number m Theowner s address m Name and phone number of a contact person Type and serial number of the instrument m Reason for returning complete description of the service required Mark the address of the Tektronix Service Center and the return address on the shipping carton in two prominent locations CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 81 Repackaging Instructions 6 82 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Options and Accessories This chapter lists available sampling modules standard and optional accessories available for the instrument as well as the pro
165. d Sampling Modules 4 43 Main Instrument 5 Setthe synthesized signal generator frequency to 2 5 GHz 6 Setthe Synthesized output to 800 mV peak to peak 400 mV displayed 7 Make the following settings to the CSA8000 TDS8000 a Select Default Setup from the Utilities menu on the menu bar at top of display b Select C1 from the Waveform Selector menu on the controls bar at the bottom of the display left corner c Inthe Trig Setup dialog box W select External Direct select Metastablility Reject W select Auto Mode d Inthe Vert Setup dialog box set Scale to 100 mV division set Offset to 0 e Inthe Horz Setup dialog box W set Scale to 200 ps division m set Horizontal Reference to 0 set Position to 19 ns set All Timebase Mode to Short Term Jitter Test Follow this procedure to make the direct trigger sensitivity check NOTE To use this procedure you must upgrade to product software ver sion 1 2 43 or higher Upgrade 1 2 43 is available as a download You can determine the software version of the instrument under test by selecting About TDS CSA8000 in the Help menu on screen For upgrade information see Contacting Tektronix on page xvii 1 Inthe Meas Setup dialog box a foreach of the following measurements make sure the channel under test is selected in the Source menu b select Meas 1 and then choose Select Meas Amplitude Amplitude 4 44 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instrume
166. d board in the locator diagram Figure 6 9 page 6 20 Remove the Large Module Interface circuit board following in this order Trim Bottom cover Left and Right covers Front and Rear Power Distribution boards Acquisition assembly 2 Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its top is down on the work surface and its bottom is facing you 3 Remove the Large Module Interface circuit board a Remove the two 3 16 inch hex threaded post from each optical module slot See Figure 6 28 page 6 49 Remove the two T 10 Torxdrive screws from each optical module slot Remove the T 15 Torxdrive screw located on the Large Module Interface circuit board See Figure 6 30 page 6 52 Lift up on the rear of the Large Module Interface circuit board and lift the board out of the instrument 4 Reinstallation Do in reverse order substeps a through d CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 51 Removal and Installation Procedures T 15 Torxdrive es screw 1 Large Module Interface circuit il board Figure 6 30 Large module interface circuit board removal Module Slot Doors 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed Locate the Module Slot Doors in the locator diagram Figure 6 9 page 6 20 Additional modules to be removed Trim Bottom cover Left and Right covers Front and Rear Power Distribution boards Acquisition assembly 2 Orien
167. d test conformance of optical interfaces to draft ITU T Recommendation G 691 which is scheduled to be completed in April 200 see ITU table A 1 G 691 from the WD 16 48 document from Study Group 15 dated February 2000 For convenience the scalar frequency response of the output amplitude for sinusoidal swept optical input has been interpreted from the published Bessel Thompson transfer function and listed below MHz dB Frequency Lower Nominal Upper 0 000 0 85 0 00 0 85 14932 0 96 0 11 0 74 2986 0 1 30 0 45 0 40 4418 8 1 87 1 02 0 17 5972 4 2 11 1 86 1 01 7465 0 3 86 3 00 2 16 8958 0 6 19 4 51 2 83 9953 28 1 87 5 71 3 55 10451 2 8 75 6 37 3 99 11944 0 11 53 8 54 5 56 13437 2 14 45 10 93 7 41 14930 4 17 41 13 41 9 41 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 80C00 Modules Specifications Table 1 18 Optical modules Acquisition Cont Name Characteristics FEC 10 66 GByte Reference Receiver setting frequency response This Reference Receiver is essentially identical to that for the OC 192 9 95328GB yte s rate with the following changes the frequency scale for the tolerance curves and nominal 3dB breakpoints are scaled linearly by the ratio of 10 664 GByte s 9 95328 GB yte s for example the 9 9536 Byte s reference receiver has a nominal 3dB response at 0 75 9 95328GHz 7 465GHz This 10 66GB yte reference receiver has a nominal 3dB response at
168. de and Optical power meter accuracy 320 C to 430 C Installed and non operating 22 C to 60 C Humidity Altitude installed Installed and operating 20 to 80 relative humidity with a maximum wet bulb temperature of 29 C ator below 440 C upper limit derates to 4596 relative humidity at 40 C non condensing Reference receivers frequency response tolerances 320 C to 430 C Optical power meter accuracy 20 C 80 RH to 430 C 80 RH Installed and non operating 5 to 90 relative humidity with a maximum wet bulb temperature of 29 C ator below 460 C upper limit derates to 20 relative humidity at 460 C non condensing Operating 3 048 m 10 000 feet Non operating 12 190 m 40 000 feet CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 35 80C00 Modules Specifications 1 36 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 80A01 Module Specifications 80A01 Trigger Prescale Preamplifier Module This section contains specifications for the 80A01 Trigger Prescale Preamplifier Module specifications are guaranteed unless noted as typical Typical specifications are provided for your convenience but are not guaranteed To meet specifications three conditions must first be met m The instrument must have been calibrated adjusted at an ambient tempera ture between 20 C and 30 C m The oscilloscope must have been operating continuously for 20 minutes
169. des Push the front panel button Acquisition MENU to display the Acq Setup dialog box Click each of the three acquisition modes and confirm that the following statements are true m Sample mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen Note that there is a small amount of noise present on the DC level W Average mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the noise reduced Envelope mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the upper and lower extremes of the noise displayed 8 Test all channels Repeat steps 2 through 7 until all input channels are verified 9 Remove the test hookup Disconnect the SMA cable from the channel input and the DC CALIBRATION output Verify Optical Input This verification is done without an input signal Channels Equipment re None quired Atleast one optical 80C00 series sampling module must be installed as outlined in its user manual Prerequisites 1 Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button 2 Setthe Trigger System In the UI application toolbar select Internal Clock from the Trig list box as shown below CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 9 Brief Procedures o gt email naci lat 3 Select the channel to test Push the channel button for the channel you want to test The button lights amber and the channel displays See Figure
170. division m set Horizontal Reference to 0 W set Position to 19 ns set All Timebases Mode to Short Term Jitter f Inthe Acq Setup dialog box set Acquisition Mode to Average Test Follow this procedure to make the time internal accuracy check 1 In the Meas Setup dialog box a forthe following measurements make sure the channel under test is selected in the Source menu b select Meas 1 and then choose Select Meas Amplitude Amplitude select Meas 2 and then choose Select Meas Timing Period 2 Adjust the synthesizer signal generator level until the amplitude measure ment readout on the instrument screen indicates the amplitude is 400 mV 3 Verify the period measurement readout indicates the period is 1 ns 9 ps 4 Inthe Horz Setup dialog box set All Timebases Mode to Lock to Int 10 MHz CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 35 Main Instrument 5 Verify the period measurement readout indicates the period is 1 ns 8 1 ps 6 In the Horz Setup dialog box set All Timebases Mode to Lock to Short Term Jitter 7 Setthe Horizontal Position to 100 ns and then repeat steps 3 through 6 8 Set the Horizontal Position to lus and then repeat steps 3 through 6 9 Repeat the setup from step 7e and the test for all channels for all 80E00 series modules installed End of Procedure 4 36 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Main Instrument External dire
171. duct options Table 7 1 Available sampling modules Module Product Electrical 80E01 80E02 80E03 80204 80001 Description 1 channel 50 GHz 7 ps high performance sampling module 2 channel 12 5 GHz 28 ps high performance sampling module 2 channel 20 GHz 17 5 ps high performance sampling module 2 channel 20 GHz 17 5 ps with high performance TDR sampling module 1100 nm to 1650 nm gt 20 GHz optical bandwidth at connector 80C01 CR 1100 nm to 1650 nm gt 20 GHz optical bandwidth at connector with clock recovery 80C02 1100 nm to 1650 nm gt 30 GHz optical bandwidth at connector 80C02 CR 1100 nm to 1650 nm gt 30 GHz optical bandwidth at connector with clock recovery 80C03 700 nm to 1650 nm 22 3 GHz optical bandwidth at connector 80C03 CR 700 nm to 1650 nm 22 3 GHz optical bandwidth at connector with clock recovery 80C04 80C04 CR1 Other 80A01 1100 nm to 1650 nm gt 20 GHz optical bandwidth at connector 1100 nm to 1650 nm 220 GHz optical bandwidth at connector with clock recovery 1 channel 8 14 GHz AC coupled 50 C limiting preamplifier module that increases the sensitivity of the oscilloscope prescale trigger input to 200 mV pk pk CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 7 1 Options and Accessories Standard Accessories Standard Table 7 2 lists the standard accessories that ship with the instrument NOTE Table 7 2 lists the standard
172. e in the portable mainframe This procedure use QAPlus WIN in to run its Quick Test to verify the instrument hardware To run QAPlus WIN you must have either a working keyboard or a working mouse or other pointing device and have Windows 98 running CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 15 Brief Procedures A Checking the Cooling Fan Operation 4 16 CAUTION Before running the QAPlus WIN tests be aware of the following problems and work arounds The QAPlus WIN discrete memory test fails if the system being tested contains more than 16 megabytes of RAM Since your product ships with more than 16 megabytes of RAM do not run the memory test from the Memory icon Use the Run Quick Test item from the Tests menu instead or use the Quick Test icon in the QAPlus WIN title box The QAPlus WIN hard drive test may report an incorrect number of tracks and cylinders for your hard drive This is an internal mapping problem but has no effect on the results of the test Bad sectors on your hard drive are still found and marked The installation program for QAPlus WIN stalls at the end of installation To continue after the installation stalls press CTRL ALT DEL highlight the QAPlus WIN installation program and then click End Task The QAPlus WIN keyboard test does not respond correctly to keys used by Windows 98 Keyboards made for use with Windows contain two or three keys specific to that operating s
173. e serial number at which the part was first effective Column four indicates the serial number at which the part was discontinued No entries indicates the part is good for all serial numbers 5 This indicates the quantity of parts used 6 Name amp Description An item name is separated from the description by a colon Because of space limitations an item name may sometimes appear as incomplete Use the U S Federal Catalog handbook H6 1 for further item name identification 1 Mfr Code This indicates the code of the actual manufacturer of the part Code to name and address cross reference is located after this page 8 Mfr Part Number This indicates the actual manufacturer s or vendor s part number Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1 1 1972 Mfr Code to Manufacturer The following table cross indexes codes names and addresses of manufacturers Cross Index _ or vendors of components listed in the parts list 10 2 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List Mfr Code to Manufacturer Cross Index Manufacturers cross index Mfr code Manufacturer 00779 AMP INC 01295 TEXAS INSTRUMENTS INC 01963 CHERRY ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS CO 02660 AMPHENOL CORP 03277 MOBILE PLANET 04713 MOTOROLA INC 04956 FUJITSU COMPUTER PRODUCTS OF AMERICA INC 05791 LYN TRON INC 060D9 UNITREK CORPORATION 06666 GENERAL DEVICES 06915 RICHCO 07416 NELSON
174. e test hookup 1 Install the 80E04 module into the left small module compartment of the CSA8000 TDS8000 2 Check the aberrations of channel 1 positive TDR polarity as follows 3 Connect a 50 coaxial terminator to channel 1 See Figure 4 23 NOTE To minimize extraneous aberrations use the recommended terminator listed in the above Equipment required table item 7 CSA8000 TDS8000 e pene 3 Channel 1 91 1 50 Q Termination o Figure 4 24 TDR system step response aberrations hookup 4 Press the DEFAULT SETUP button on the CSA8000 TDS8000 front panel 5 Set up the CSA8000 TDS8000 as follows a Inthe TDR Setup dialog box click on C1 Preset b In the Acq Setup dialog box set the Acquisition Mode to Average 128 samples c In the Horz Setup dialog box 4 78 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Electrical Sampling Modules m set Record Length to 2000 points W set Position to 1 us m set Scale to 100 ns division In the Meas Setup dialog box m make sure the channel under test is selected in the Source menu m select Measl then choose Select Meas Amplitude Mean Record for later use the High measurement value in mp making sure to take down the proper sign This will be used as HiRef the high reference level for aberration measurements The low reference level is 1 0 p rho
175. e to achieve 0 192 RF Switch i RF Switch Switch Reference Receiver um a 2 5 47 ad Filter 2 RF Switch Filter to achieve system OC48 Reference Receiver m E USER LO PANEL of Phagsin Coaxial only unfiltered path gt 20 GHz orOC 192 Reference Receiver 0 0 192 9 953 Built in O E 248832GHz CLK Discrete 401 Circuitry frontend 1 clock recovery E Figure 9 6 80C01 Optical sampling with clock recovery block diagram 9 6 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Diagrams Average Power gt 30 GHz optical BW not reverse terminated Single mode Fiber Fiber arb User Optical RIFOCS male Input NRZ DATA Lower noise sampler tuneable to achieve 0 192 Reference Receiver RF Switch Coaxial only unfiltered path gt 20 GHz or OC Reference Receiver 2 Diode Sampler 10 USERA WO PANEL of Plugsim Figure 9 7 80C02 Optical sampling block diagram CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 9 7 Diagrams gt 30 GHz optical BW 50 ohm reverse terminated to absorb finite reflections Fiber from relay and filter network this reduces raw OQ arb 24 2 1 Optical Spit 4 i conversion gain by 2x SC e Average Power MS e Single mode Single mode version User Optical Input NRZ RIFOCS mal DATA Lower noise sample
176. ectrical Sampling Modules negative aberration 1000 Min 0 1 Check that the aberrations for the entire 10 ns to 20 ps region before the edge from steps i and n are within 3 If recording data on the Test Record enter the largest positive or negative value 2 Check aberrations in the range of 400 ps to 5 ns after the edge aberrations within 3 a Change the Horizontal Scale to 50 ps division while adjusting Horizon tal Position to keep the rising edge of the step waveform centered on the display Press the front panel FINE button to turn it on Adjust the Horizontal Position knob so the waveform crosses the center vertical graticule at the 90 amplitude point of the rising edge The waveform should be crossing the center vertical graticule at 1 minor division below the center horizontal graticule This defines the beginning reference for post transition aberration measurements Press the front panel FINE button to turn it off In the Horz Setup dialog box m set Horizontal Reference to 50 m set Horizontal Scale to 1 ns division In the Meas Setup dialog box for 5 1 m Set G1 to 54 m Set G2 to 100 In the Meas Setup dialog box for Meas2 m Set G1 to 54 m Set G2 to 100 The Max and Min measurements are now set to include the region of 400 ps to 5 ns after the edge The aberration specification over this region is 3 which is 30 mp for 1 p step The reference level is HiRef
177. ects or parts of the product features and interface These documents may be of use for some service tasks the table below cross references each document to the instrument features and interfaces it supports See Related Documentation on page xvi for part numbers of printed documents To read about Refer to these documents Description Installation Specification amp Operation Main User Manual overviews Quick Reference Manual Electrical or Optical Sampling Module User Manual Online Help System GPIB Commands Online Programmers Guide ma Read the Reference for a quick overview of instrument features and their usage Read the User Manual for general information about your instrument procedures on how to put it into service specifications of its perfor mance maps of its user interface controls overviews and background on its features For more detailed usage information see Online Help System below Read these manuals for complete information aboutthe sampling modules you purchased how to install them in the instrument how to use them and how to protect them from ESD Depending on the modules ordered one or both of these manuals ship with this product Insert these manuals in back of the main user manual Access online help from the instrument for context sensitive information on virtually all con
178. eed to be cleaned Refer to Table 6 1 on page 6 3 m Badinternal O E RF amplifier de coupling Check tightness of all rigid cable interconnect BIOS error messages m Refer to the BIOS error message table Instrument locks up CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Power down the instrument then restart Replace the NLX assembly m Replace the Power PC circuit board assembly 6 69 Troubleshooting Equipment Required You will need a digital voltmeter to check power supply voltages as described on page 6 72 Testing might also be required to correct some faults Under those circumstances you will need the test equipment listed in the Performance Verification and Adjustment Procedures in this manual Isolating Failures between the 80 0 80 0 Modules or the Mainframe 6 70 To determine if the sampling module has failed or the mainframe failed perform the following 1 Perform the module compensation Refer to Perform the Compensation on page 4 5 2 Perform the measurement procedures you require to make your test 3 Ifthe the measurement fails Remove the sampling module and install it into another slot 4 Perform steps 1 and 2 then take the following action m If the measurement successfully functions there is a good chance the mainframe channel has failed Perform other mainframe diagnostics in this section m Ifthe measurement fails there is a good chance the sampl
179. egral clock recovery option with internal plumbing connection to the trigger front panel clock and data output m 2 communication with the mainframe for identification control and calibration compensation storage The system response depends on all of the components in the signal path from the front panel to the sampler Bandwidth and reference receiver responses are calibrated at the factory with a sub picosecond optical impulse applied to the front panel connector This insures that all components are included but also means that components can not be replaced without performing calibration Compensation performs a DC transfer curve characterization for each bandwidth reference receiver setting The curve data is stored in the module s EEPROM and used to generate a look up table in the mainframe This data corrects for linearity gain and offset errors in the sampler Reference receivers can be created in any of the following ways m A hardware filter inserted between the sampler and O E m Adjust the sampler s bandwidth m Adjust the O E response with the sampler set to a higher bandwidth The available bandwidth and reference receiver selections and the method used to set the bandwidth for 80 01 80C02 and 80 03 optical modules The power monitor is a second measure of the photodiode current that is independent of the sampler signal path Analog circuitry continuously senses the current flowing into the bias side of the p
180. el amp top 2 Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its bottom is down on the work surface and its front panel is facing you CAUTION To avoid damage to the front panel Standby On switch assembly do not set the Display module assembly on a work surface Sliding the instrument over the edge of the work surface could break off the Standby On switch assembly 3 Remove the Display assembly See Figure 6 13 page 6 27 a Remove the four 1 15 Torxdrive screws that secure the Display assembly to the chassis Grasp the top edge of the Display assembly and pull forward far enough to allow access to the flex cable connector Disconnect J8 flex cable from the display assembly Remove the display module assembly from the instrument See Figure 6 13 page 6 27 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures T 15 Torxdrive screw 4 icm 8 Flex cable Display assembly Figure 6 13 Display removal 4 Remove the Touch panel from the Display assembly See Figures 6 14 amp 6 15 pages 6 28 and 6 29 CAUTION To prevent degradation of the display sharpness this procedure must be performed in a dust free environment The service technician should wear cotton gloves to prevent finger oils from contaminating all surfaces of the display glass a Disconnect J1 J9 and J10 cables from the Display Adapter circuit board b
181. erify that they operate within limits therefore do not interpret any quantities cited such as about five horizontal divisions as limits STOP DO NOT make changes to the front panel settings that are not called out in the procedures Each verification procedure will require you to set the instrument to default settings before verifying functions If you make changes to these settings other than those called out in the procedure you may obtain invalid results In this case go back to step 1 and repeat the procedure Verify Electrical Input Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls Channels Equipment re One SMA cable such as Tektronix part number 174 1427 00 quired Prerequisites Atleastone electrical 80200 series sampling module must be installed as outlined in its user manual 1 Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button 2 Set the Trigger System In the UI application toolbar select Internal Clock from the Trig list box as shown below Diaz tema Lect fak CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 7 Brief Procedures 3 Hook up the signal source Connect the SMA cable from the DC CALIBRA TION output to the channel input that you want to test as shown in Figure 4 2 CSA8000 TDS 8000
182. ese diagnostics are described below The power on diagnostics check the basic functionality of the instrument at every power on If any failures occur at power on the screen displays the calibration and diagnostics property page The power on tests ensure that hardware is installed and can be accessed by the software The tests provide limited diagnostic information but do not provide any performance information The instrument diagnostics provide more extensive tests than the power on diagnostics The power on tests check the generic hardware including the keyboard mouse memory CPU and associated peripherals The interrupt lines and trigger lines are also checked If the instrument passes all the BIOS tests and Windows boots the primary tree calls for you to run QAPlus Win diagnostics software QAPlus Win is a comprehensive diagnostic software application to check and verify the operation of the PC hardware in the instrument To run QAPlus Win you must have a working keyboard a working mouse or other pointing device is optional and have the Windows operating system running Repair or replace any failed component identified by QAPlus Win CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Troubleshooting NOTE To run QAPlus Win you must have either a working keyboard or a working mouse or other pointing device and Windows running To run the QAPlus Win diagnostic software do the following steps 1 Exit the
183. ety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use U S Nationally Recognized UL3111 1 Standard for electrical measuring and test equipment Testing Laboratory Listing mainframe Canadian Certification CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement mainframe control and laboratory use Installation Overvoltage Terminals on this product may have different installation overvoltage category designations The Category installation categories are CAT III Distribution level mains usually permanently connected Equipment at this level is typically in a fixed industrial location CAT II Local level mains wall sockets Equipment at this level includes appliances portable tools and similar products Equipmentis usually cord connected CATI Secondary signal level or battery operated circuits of electronic equipment Pollution Degree A measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment around and within a product Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the external Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated Pollution Degree 1 No pollution or only dry nonconductive pollution occurs P roducts in this category are generally encapsulated hermetically sealed or located in clean rooms Pollution Degree 2 Normally only dry nonconductive pollution occurs Occasionally a temp
184. evers See Figures 6 34 amp 6 35 pages 6 59 6 60 8 Orient the small or large module chassis Set the optical chassis so the module ejector levers are facing you a Remove both T 10 Torxdrive screws that secure the ejector lever to the optical chassis b Remove both brass washers ejector lever and ejector spring 9 Reinstallation Perform the following procedure to reinstall the ejector levers and module slot doors a Place the ejector spring over the pem nut standoffs pivot and slider One spring arm is positioned next to the ejector lever spring tab The other spring arm is positioned to the left side of the stud post b Place the ejector lever over the ejector spring and pem nut standoffs pivot and slider NOTE Make sure the ejector lever is positioned correctly The ejector lever has a dimple protruding to accommodate the snap on handle When installing the ejector lever this dimple must be facing up from the optical chassis Refer to Figure 6 34 on page 6 59 Place brass shoulder washers over both pivot and slider mounting positions d Install both T 10 and Torxdrive screws to secure the pivot and slider mounting positions e Move the left spring arm to the right side of the stud post The right spring arm must be on the left of the lever tab Refer to Figure 6 35 page 6 60 6 58 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures
185. f the instrument Crne Press to access print dialog for printing the display Press to toggle the touch screen on and off Use the touch screen to control UI when you haven t installed a mouse gt 39455 ur cursors suser VERTICAL ACQUYSITION sm Select a waveform type Channel Reference or Math to display or adjust on screen selected button lights gt wem CREF End ED HORIZONTAL TRIGGER Press to display and select a waveform not yet displayed press to select among displayed waveforms C2 press again to turn a selected waveform off ST Button lights indicate displayed and selected waveforms 4 amp OFFSET Ga LEVEL q Pe SITIO ND C C 3 Press to display and select a time base view not T RESOLUTION READY selected or to select among displayed views Fa y press selected timebase again to toggle it off j except Main which is always on C A SCALE 4 SCALE b Turn knobs to vertically scale position and offset selected waveform 2 A knobs to Horizontally scale position and set record length of selected waveform Use controls to set trigger level and lights to monitor trigger state 2 14 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Operating Instructions Display Map Single Graticule View
186. frame 6 70 Checking the Power Supply Voltages 6 72 PPC and NLX PC 6 74 Firmware Updates snd gs to Sa ERGEBEN aie Se de SS EET 6 75 After zi cet ls dos ae a ta NE LE CELERE CLERO 6 76 BIOS Error Messages 2222224 ess tite eek ak Sees ob ae GRE CREER 6 77 BIOS Beep Codes ooi Sic sn sits ts ae siesta 6 78 Installing the Instrument Model and Serial Number 6 79 Update Restore the NLX Board 5 6 80 Repackaging Instructions 6 81 Packaging See ea c Ste eer ede dees 6 81 Shipping to the Service 6 81 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules iii Table of Contents Options and Accessories Standard Accessories ki 7 2 Optional Accessories 2220202 bb ee Seed PS RI ERR 7 3 np MC Mr T 7 4 Electrical Parts List Diagrams Symbols 72 ate eas 9 16 Mechanical Parts List Parts Ordering Information 10 1 Using the Replaceable Parts List 10 2 iv CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Table of Contents
187. from step 5e on page 4 79 of the setup procedure Calculate the peak aberrations in percent using the formulas with Max Min and HiRef in mp not W positive aberration Max HiRef 0 1 negative aberration Min HiRef 0 1 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 81 Electrical Sampling Modules 4 82 For example if Max 11 mp and HiRef 5 mp positive aberration 11 5 0 1 1 6 Check that the aberrations calculate in step i for the 400 ps to 5 ns region after the edge are within 1 396 If recording data on the Test Record enter the largest positive or negative value 3 Check the range 5ns after the edge aberrations within 4 196 Change the Horizontal Scale to 10 ns division Adjust Horizontal Position so the waveform rising edge is at the second vertical graticule assuming that the first graticule is the left edge of the display In the Meas Setup dialog box for Meas2 set Gate G1 to 15 In the Meas Setup dialog box for Meas set Gate G1 to 15 The Max and Min measurements are now set to include the region of 5 ns to 90 ns after the edge The aberration specification over this region is 1 which is 10 mp for a 1 p step The reference level is HiRef from step 5e on page 4 79 of the setup procedure Calculate the peak aberrations in percent using the formulas with Max Min and HiRef in mp not W positive aberration Max HiRef
188. g 80C05 80C05 80C06 module 50 GHz setti ng ng ng ng ng 12 5 GHz setting 80C03 module 2 5 GHz setting ng gt 20 GHz gt 12 5 GHz gt 30 GHz typical gt 29 GHz typical gt 28 GHz gt 20 GHz gt 12 5 GHz gt 2 3 GHz typical gt 30 GHz typical gt 29 GHz typical gt 28 GHz gt 20GHz gt 20 GHz gt 30 GHz gt 40 GHz gt 50 GHz typical CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 80C00 Modules Specifications Table 1 18 Optical modules Acquisition Cont Name Rise time typical For peak optical signal input which creates lt 2 mW modulation depth except 200 uWpp for 80C03 Rise time inte grated typical For optical signal in put displaying 15 mW peak impulse ampli tude Characteristics 80C01 module OC 12 STM 4 setting OC 48 STM 16 setting 150 ps 50 ps 187 ps 15 ps OC 192 STM 64 setting 4 ps 10 ps 12 5 GHz setting 40 ps 20 GHz setting lt 25 ps 80C02 module 30 GHz setting 16 ps 20 GHz setting lt 25 ps 12 5 GHz setting 40 ps OC 192 STM 64 setting 47 ps 10 ps 80C03 module 1063 setting 440 ps 35 ps GBE setting 373 ps 30 ps OC 48 STM 16 setting 187 ps 15 ps 80C04 module 30 GHz setting 16 ps 20 GHz setting lt 25 ps 10 66 Gb s setting 44 ps 10 ps OC 192 STM 64 setting 47 ps 10 ps 80C05 module 20 GHz setting lt 12ps 30 GHz setting lt 16 ps 20 GHz
189. g amp index Tektronix Serial no Serial no Mfr number number effective disconttd Qty 4 description code part number MAINFRAME STANDARD ACCESSORIES 8 1 161 0104 05 1 CA ASSY P WR 3 1 0MM Q 250V 10A 2 5 M 53109 198 010 OPTION AUSTRALIAN 2 161 0104 06 1 CA ASSY PWR 3 1 0MM SQ 250V 10A 2 5 M 53109 198 010 OPTION A1 EUROPEAN 3 161 0104 07 1 CA ASSY PWR 3 1 0MM SQ 240V 10A 2 5 M 53109 209010 OPTION A2 UNITED KINGDOM 4 161 0167 00 1 CA ASSY PWR 3 0 75MM SQ 250V 10A 2 5 M 53109 ORDER BY DESC OPTION A5 SWITZERLAND 5 161 0306 00 1 CA ASSY PWR 3 1 0MM SQ 250V 10A 2 5 M TK6253 92 2637 250 OPTION AC CHINA 1 CABLE ASSY PWER 3 18 AWG 92 L STANDARD CABLE SEE FIG 10 1 6 016 1268 00 1 POUCH PLASTIC POUCH TK2539 2122 STANDARD CABLE SEE FIG 10 1 1 020 2350 00 1 SOFTWARE KIT CONTAINS LICENSE CERTIFICATE EASY 80009 020 2350 00 RESTORE CERTIFICATE AUTHENTICITY WIN 98 AND WI 071 0433 00 1 ANUAL TECH USER CSA8000 TDS8000 TK2548 071 0433 00 071 0434 00 1 ANUAL TECH SAMPLING MODULE USER SHIPPED WITH 2548 071 0434 00 EACH ELECTRICAL SAMPLING MODULE ORDERED WITH THE MAINFRAME 071 0435 00 1 ANUAL TECH OPTICAL MODULE USER SHIPPED WITH TK2548 071 0435 00 EACH OPTICAL SAMPLING MODULE ORDERED WITH THE MAINFRAME 071 0436 00 1 MANUAL TECH PROGRAMMER CSA8000 TDS8000 TK2548 071 0436 00 071 0437 00 1 MANUAL TECH REFERENCE CSA8000 TDS8000 TK2548 071 0437 00 119 6297 00 1 KEYBOARD USB KEYB
190. gative slewing edge High frequency on off select Metastability R eject On Off select Variable trigger hold off range and resolu tion External direct trigger capabilities and conditions External direct trigger input characteristics External directtrigger input range External directtrigger maximum operating High Frequency ON mode Removes trigger hysteresis and improves sensitivity Should be used when trigger slew rate exceeds 1 V ns High Frequency OFF mode Retains trigger hysteresis and improves noise rejection atlow slew rates Metastability Reject On mode Upon detection of trigger and holdoff Collision time base will reject the sampled point Metastability Reject Off mode Allows metastable points caused by trigger holdoff collisions to display Adjustable 5 us to 50 ms in 0 5 ns increments When External Prescaled Trigger mode is used holdoff period applies to the Prescaled Circuit output Direct edge triggering on signal applied to dedicated front panel connector with Holdoff Level Adjust Auto Normal High Frequency On Off and Enhanced Triggering On Off controls External direct trigger specifications apply only under the condition that no other trigger signal is applied to respective connectors Short term optimized mode and locked to internal 10 MHz reference specifications only apply under the condition that there is no external 10 MHz reference applied to the front panel connector 50 Q in
191. ge The aberration specification over this region is 3 which is 30 mp for a 1 p step Since the reference is p the Max and Min values should be within 1 030 to 0 970 p to meet the 3 specification Calculate and take down for later use the peak aberrations in percent using the formulas with Max and Min in mp units not W positive aberration 96 1000 Max 0 1 negative aberration 1000 Min 0 1 For example if Max 989 and Min 1 003 p positive aberration 1000 989 0 1 1 1 negative aberration 1000 1003 0 1 0 3 NOTE The aberration can have either a positive or negative sign Both aberrations could have the same sign when the waveform does not cross the reference line in the region being checked In the Horz Setup dialog box W set Horizontal Reference to 50 W set Horizontal Scale to 2 ns division In the Meas Setup dialog box for Meas2 Region tab selected set Gate G2 to 49 Select 51 set Gate G2 to 49 The Max and Min measurements are now set to include the region of 10 ns to 200 ps before the edge As before the aberration specification over this region is 3 396 so the Max and Min values should be within 1 030 to 0 970 p Calculate the peak aberrations in percent using the formulas with Max and Min in mp units not p W positive aberration 96 1000 Max 0 1 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules El
192. gure 6 15 Display adaptor board removal Standby On Switch Flex 1 Locate module to be removed Locate the Standby On Switch flex circuit in Circuit Removal the locator diagram Internal Modules Figure 6 8 page 6 19 Additional modules to be removed m Trim front panel amp top Display assembly 2 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the work surface and its front is facing you 3 Remove the Standby On Switch flex circuit See Figure 6 16 page 6 30 a Peelthe Standby On switch flex circuit away from the front of the display assembly b Disconnect the flex circuit from J9 on the Display Adapter circuit board c Grasp the flex circuit and pull it out of the Display assembly 4 Reinstallation Do following procedure to reinstall the Standby On Switch a Remove the protective backing on the Standby On switch flex circuit CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 29 Removal and Installation Procedures b Slide the connector end of the Standby On switch flex circuit through the slot in the Display assembly Make sure the flex circuit connector aligns with J9 on the Display Adapter circuit board c Align the holes in the flex circuit to the two index posts on the front side of the Display assembly d Firmly press the flex circuit to the Display assembly chassis surface Display assembly Standby On switch flex circuit 9 0 Front view 0
193. han 2 51 ps set Timebase gt Position to 1 us set All Timebases Mode to Short Term Jitter Verify that the the RMS Jitter read out is less than 11 5 ps set All Timebases Mode to Lock Int 10 MHz Verify that the the RMS Jitter read out is less than 2 6 ps CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 45 Main Instrument 6 Repeat the setup from step 7e and the test for all channels for all 80 00 series modules installed End of Procedure 4 46 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Main Instrument External prescaled trigger delay jitter short term optimized mode and locked to internal 10 MHz reference mode These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the system timebase and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications Refer to Table 1 2 page 1 2 Setup CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Equipment required Synthesized signal generator Item 13 0 5 meter precision SMA cable Item 10 1 0 meter precision SMA cable Item 11 Power divider Item 9 80E0X sampling module Prerequisites As listed on page 4 19 and under Prerequisites on page 4 34 Install the test hookup 1 Install the 80 module into the left most small module compartment of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument see Figure 4 14 on page 4 47 2 Connect the synthesized signal generator to a 1 0 meter cable 3 Connect the remain
194. here may be a small amount of noise present on the baseline level W Average mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with any noise present reduced m Envelope mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the upper and lower extremes of the noise displayed 6 Test all channels Repeat steps 3 through 5 until all optical input channels are verified CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 11 Brief Procedures 4 12 Verify the Time Bases Work After verifying the channels you can now verify that the time bases function This verification is done using a front panel signal Equipment re quired One SMA cable such as Tektronix part number 174 1427 00 One 10x SMA attenuator such as Tektronix 015 1003 00 One electrical 80E00 series sampling module Prerequisites None 1 Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button 2 Hook up the signal source Connect the SMA cable from the Internal Clock output through a 10x attenuator to any 80E00 sampling module input channel as shown in Figure 4 6 CSA8000 TDS 8000 SMA cable from INTERNAL CLOCK output 80E 00 C3 input 10x attenuator Figure 4 6 Hookup for the time base tests 3 Setup the instrument a Push the Trigger MENU front panel button to display the Trig Setup dialog box Click Internal Clock u
195. hotodiode The signal is amplified by a programmable gain amplifier and input to an 8 bit AD converter The AD converter and amplifier are controlled through the I C interface Compensation performs two functions in the power meter First two offset inputs are adjusted in the amplifier so that the signal stays in range for all of the gain settings Next CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 3 5 Theory of Operation 80C01 Optical Sampling Module 3 6 offset is measured for all gain settings and stored so it can be subtracted from the raw measured current Because the measurements are made through independent paths the power monitor is useful in debugging module mainframe problems The module s main board only provides power and control bits to the clock recovery board A small fraction of the input signal is split off to applied to the clock recovery components The splitter is optical in the 80 01 and 80 02 and is electrical in the 80 03 The recovered clock is routed in coaxial cable through the rear connector to the module to the Optical Front End board in the mainframe The Optical Front End board has a switch that selects which modules clock will be applied to the trigger The control signal for that switch comes from the optical module The 80C01 module supports conformance testing of long wavelength 1100 1650 nm signals at 622 2488 and 9953 Mbps as well as general purpose testing up to 20 G
196. ignal From the Setup Menu select the Trig Setup dialog box Make the following changes a Select External Direct as the Trigger Source b In the Level section click the Set to 5096 button Select positive edge for the Slope Select the Meas Setup dialog box Make the following changes a Select Meas 1 in the scroll down control box b Click the Select Meas button CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 105 Optical Sampling Modules Procedure 4 106 Select Eye Pattern Optical Average Optical Power as the measurement for Be sure Main C1 15 selected as the Source 18 Select the Vert Setup dialog box and make the following changes a Select for Waveform b Setthe Wavelength to match the wavelength of the laser transmitter 19 Select the Wfm Database Setup dialog box a In the Databasel section select Main C3 as the Source b Check On for Databasel 20 Select the Meas Setup dialog box and make the following changes a Select Main C3 as the Source b Select Meas 2 in the scroll down control box Check the Use Wfm Database selection Follow this procedure to make the clock recovery optical sensitivity range and recovered clock timing jitter checks 1 In the Trig Setup dialog box select the clock recovery rate for that you want to test see Table 4 10 NOTE Leave External Direct selected as the Trigger Source even though you are selecting a r
197. ing GPIB command to set the instrument s DC calibrator offset cal constant to 1 DMM reading CALCOMP DOUBLE DcCalOffsetAdj 1 0 the DMM reading Example CALCOMP DOUBLE DcCalOffsetAdj 3 2e 4 8 Enter the following GPIB command to set the instrument s calibrator to 1 0 V CALIBRATE DCCALIBRATOR 1 0 Record the DMM reading reading 1 9 Enter the following GPIB command to set the instrument s calibrator to 1 0 V CALIBRATE DCCALIBRATOR 1 0 Record the DMM reading reading2 Calculate cal constant as follows 1 0 Reading2 Readingl 2 10 Enter the following GPIB command to set the instrument s calibrator Lsb cal constant CALIBRATE DOUBLE DcCalLsbAdj calculated result from Step 9 11 Wait 8 seconds then enter the following GPIB command to save the DC adjustments as follows CAL SAVE FACT MAI 12 Enter the following GPIB command to turn the instrument s cal constant protection on SYST PROT ON To verify that the DC calibration adjustment was successful complete the following procedures 1 Set the instrument s DC calibrator to 1 0 V and verify as follows CALIBRATE DCCALIBRATOR 1 0 2 Verify that the DMM reads 1 0 V 1 mV 3 Set the instrument s DC calibrator to 1 0 V and verify as follows CALIBRATE DCCALIBRATOR 1 0 4 Verify that the DMM reads 1 0 V 1 mV 5 Set the instrument s DC calibrator to 0 0 V and verify as follows CALIBRATE DCCALIBRATOR 0 0 CSA8000 amp TD
198. ing Modules Performance Tests CSA8000 TDS8000 Test Records This section contains test records that you can use to record the outcome of your performance verification checks Four records exist TDS CSA8000 Main Instrument Checks the main frame 90 00 Electrical Sampling Modules Checks all supported models of electrical sampling modules 80 00 Optical Sampling Modules Checks all supported models of optical sampling modules 80401 Trigger Prescale Limiting Checks the module listed left Preamplifier Module Do not enter values into these records rather make copies of the records and enter test results on the copies The test records provide entries for all checks found in the Performance Tests procedures CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 23 Performance Tests CSA8000 TDS8000 Main Instrument Test Record For each channel tested photocopy this page and record the performance test results for your CSA8000 TDS8000 main instrument test record CSA8000 TDS8000 Test Record Channel Instrument M odel 5 8000 7058000 Instrument S erial Number Certificate Number Date of Calibration Technician Performance Test Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum Time interval accuracy short term optimized mode Horizontal Position Setto 19 ns 0 991 ns 1 009 ns 100 ns 0 991 ns 1 009 ns 1 us 0 991 ns 1 009 ns Ti
199. ing end of the 1 0 meter cable to a SMA power divider Connect two 0 5 meter cables to the two remaining SMA power divider connectors 4 Connect one of the 0 5 meter cables to Channel 1 of the S0EOX module Connect the remaining 0 5 meter cable to the TRIGGER PRESCALE INPUT Synthesized signal generator CSA8000 TDS 8000 n ooo 000 000 0 M o00 0 000000000 00 00 RF Output bo 3 oO Channel 1 LO 1 0 Meter precision cable TRIGGER PRESCALE INPUT 0 5 Meter precision cables P ower divider Figure 4 14 External prescaled test hookup 4 47 Main Instrument 5 Setthe synthesized signal generator frequency to 2 5 GHz 6 Setthe Synthesized output to 1600 mV peak to peak 800 mV displayed 7 Set up the CSA8000 TDS8000 as follows a Select Default Setup from the Utilities menu on the menu bar at top of display b Select C1 from the Waveform Selector menu on the controls bar at the bottom of the display left corner c Inthe Trig Setup dialog box select External Prescaler select Metastablility Reject W select Auto Mode d Inthe Vert Setup dialog box set Scale to 100 mV division set Offset to 0 e Inthe Horz Setup dialog box W set Scale to 200 ps division m set Horizontal Reference to 0 set Position to 19 ns
200. ing module has failed Return to Tektronix Inc for repair CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Troubleshooting Isolating to a Board if If the mains power is on a red light see Figure 6 39 for its location is visible Power Will Not Come Up through the right side of the instrument 292 22 022 000 029 28 2 eS 200 QAR OO 00000 ee Lae Mains power on and over current LEDs are near the center of the power supply red glow from them is visible while looking through the side of instrument Figure 6 39 Location of power on and over current LEDs If the instrument thinks power is on a red light see Figure 6 39 means that there is an over current condition If the on standby pin pin C1 of P201 on the rear power distribution board or pin B162 on the riser board is low the instrument thinks power is on Remove boards one at a time to locate a fault the display floppy acquisition board front analog supply to acquisition board and rear power distribution boards the NLX board and the riser board If you remove the NLX board you must jumper the debug power on pins see Figure 6 40 The PPC board and the rear power distribution board are required for power to come up If removing the boards did not find the problem replace the power supply CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 71 Troubleshooting Debug RS
201. instrument WARNING Before performing any procedure that follows power down the instrument and disconnect it from line voltage Use a dry low velocity stream of air to clean the interior of the chassis Use a soft bristle non static producing brush for cleaning around components If you must use a liquid for minor interior cleaning use a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution and rinse with deionized water Clean the exterior surfaces of the chassis with a dry lint free cloth or a soft bristle brush If any dirt remains use a cloth or swab dipped in a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution Use a swab to clean narrow spaces around controls and connectors Do not use abrasive compounds on any part of the chassis that may damage the chassis Clean the On Standby switch using a dampened cleaning towel Do not spray or wet the switch directly CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Maintenance CAUTION Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents which might damage the plastics used in this instrument Use only deionized water when cleaning the menu buttons or front panel buttons Use a 7596 isopropyl alcohol solution as a cleaner and rinse with deionized water Before using any other type of cleaner consult your Tektronix Service Center or representative Inspection Exterior Inspect the outside of the instrument for damage wear and missing parts using Table 6 1 as a guide Immediately repair defects that could
202. ir 5 1 Required Equipment ee ee Nee e 5 2 Instrumentation Setup 5 2 Main Instrument Adjustments 5 3 DC Calibrator Adjust oo os sc ee ee eee ee 5 3 DC Calibrator Adjust Verification 5 4 Internal 10 MHz Adjust 5 5 Preventing ESD e eR eut tor AS eate ada ced aa RO aes 6 1 Inspection and Cleaning 25225222224 0 114 rd hes 6 2 Interior Cleaning vsus eds pet Ra a ees 6 2 Exterior Cleaning iesu UR REEL E one BU Bees 6 2 Removal and Installation Procedures 6 7 Preparation BE UM ES 6 7 Procedures for External Modules 6 9 Procedures for Modules 6 21 Exchanging electrical sampling module 6 62 Troubleshooting 5 6 6 67 service Level e lub ep RR ERGO QA M etd 6 67 Check for Common Problems 6 67 Equipment 6 70 Isolating Failures between 80E0X 80COX Modules or the Main
203. irements including EN 61326 EN55011 Class A Radiated Emissions EN55011 Class A Conducted Emissions IEC 1000 3 2 Power Harmonic Current Emissions Susceptibility The instrument meets or exceeds the EMC requirements of the following standards EN61326 1 European Community Requirements IEC 1000 4 2 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity 4 kV contact discharge 8 kV air discharge Performance criteria B CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 39 80A01 Module Specifications 1 40 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Installation NOTE The information found in this section is a subset of the Installation section found in CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User manual This section covers installation of the instrument addressing the following topics m Check the Environment Requirements on page 2 1 m Install the Sampling Modules on page 2 2 m Connect the Peripherals on page 2 4 Power On the Instrument on page 2 5 W Powering Off the Instrument on page 2 7 The basic operating software is already installed on the hard disk If reinstalla tion of software becomes needed see the following topic m Software Installation on page 2 7 Check the Environmental Requirements Read this section before attempting any installation procedures This section describes site considerations power requirements and ground connections for your instrument Site Considerations The instrument i
204. is bad the BIOS should report it using beep codes see Table 6 8 on page 6 79 If nothing is displayed is the display turned on At boot time and while using an external monitor connected to the NLX external video port press F2 to enter the BIOS setup The Advanced Video Configuration menu lets you select PCI LCD or AGP the NLX port on the rear panel The lower VGA port on the rear panel is the PCI video port driven by the same video controller as the LCD CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 73 Troubleshooting Booting Into Windows If the instrument will not boot press F8 to enter the start up menu and boot to the command prompt If you can boot to the command prompt use the MSDOS Edit program to edit the autoexec bat file to run the CMOS restore utility see Update Restore the NLX Board CMOS on page 6 80 If booting starts finds the hard disk but hangs displaying the Windows splash Screen 1 Select the AGP video port using the setup menu 2 Disable the busses and disconnect the PPC board by installing J840 and 1841 3 Ifthe system boots it will only boot to Windows the instrument application will not run to the external NLX video port replace the PPC board PPC and NLX PC Diagnostics 6 74 Power On Diagnostics QAPlus Win The primary diagnostics for the instrument are the power on diagnostics the QA Win32 diagnostics and the instrument diagnostics Procedures for running th
205. ken blis Remove and replace damaged tered condition circuit board Solder connections Cold solder or rosin joints Resolder joint and clean with isopropyl alcohol Capacitors Damaged or leaking cases Remove and replace damaged Corroded solder on leads or circuit board terminals CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Maintenance Table 6 2 Internal inspection check list Cont Item Inspect for Repair action Semiconductors Loosely inserted in sockets Firmly seatloose semiconduc Distorted pins tors Remove devices that have distorted pins Carefully straight en pins as required to fit the Socket using long nose pliers and reinsert firmly Ensure that straightening action does not crack pins causing them to break off Wiring and cables Loose plugs or connectors Firmly seat connectors Repair Burned broken or frayed wiring replace modules with defective wires or cables Chassis Dents deformations and dam Straighten repair or replace aged hardware defective hardware Cleaning Procedure Interior To clean the instrument interior do the following steps 1 Blow off dust with dry low pressure deionized air approximately 9 psi 2 Remove any remaining dust with a lint free cloth dampened in isopropyl alcohol 75 solution and rinse with warm deionized water cotton tipped applicator is useful for cleaning in narrow spaces and on circuit boards STOP If
206. l Clock Typical performance into 50 O termination 0 20 to 40 20 V low level 0 90 to 1 10 V high level CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 7 System Specifications 1 8 Table 1 7 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Ports Cont Specifications Characteristics DC calibration output DC voltage from low impedance drive programmable to 1 mV over 1 25 V range maximum Accuracy is 0 1 mV 40 196 External 10 MHz ref 5 V maximum erence input Table 1 8 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Data storage Specifications Characteristics Floppy disk drive 3 5 in floppy disk 1 44 Mbyte compatable with DOS 3 3 or later format for storing reference waveforms image files and instrument setups Hard disk drive ca 6 Gbytes pacity Table 1 9 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Mechanical Specifications Characteristics Construction material Chassis Aluminum alloy Cosmetic covers PC ABS thermoplastic Front panel Aluminum alloy with P C thermoplastic overlay Module doors Nickel plated stainless steel Bottom cover Vinyl clad sheet metal Circuit boards Glass laminate Cabinet Aluminum Weight 20 8 kg 45 Ib 12 oz Overall Dimensions Height 343 mm 13 5 in Width 457 mm 18 0 in Depth 419 mm 16 5 in The dimensions do notinclude feet rack mount kit or protruding connectors Overall mass pack 36 3 kg 80 Ib 1 02 aged product Overall Dimensions Height 622 mm 24 5 in packaged product
207. l connectors keep the connectors clean at all times Also insure that all connectors and jumpers attached to the inputs are clean prior to insertion To keep the optical input power to an appropriate level it may be necessary to attenuate the optical signal CAUTION To avoid damaging the optical input of the sampling optical to maintain the levels within performance range and to avoid clipping attenuate optical signals to less than 5 mW average power or 10 mW peak power at the wavelength with highest relative responsivity 80C03 modules can have deteriorated response for signals larger than 200 UWpp and the vertical response will eventually saturate for levels approaching 1 mW The optical sampling module front panel is shown in Figure 2 7 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 2 25 Operating Instructions Channel Selection channel has a SELECT channel button and a yellow channel light The button operates as follows m If the yellow channel light is on the channel is acquiring a waveform If you press the button and the channel is not currently being acquired for any channel or math waveform then the instrument activates turns on the channel m If you press the button and the channel is currently active as a channel waveform then the instrument selects the channel waveform m If the channel waveform is already selected when you press the channel button the instrument turns
208. less than 3 ps RMS of jitter added using the square root of the sum of the squares method An example follows If an 80 01 operating in clock recovery trigger mode exhibits 3 5 ps RMS of edge jitter with no EMC field applied and for an ideal jitterless input then for applied fields up to 3 V m the edge jitter degradation would typically result in a total RMS jitter of Jitter lt 3 5ps 3ps 4 61 5 EN 61000 3 2 AC Power Harmonic Current Emissions Radiated emissions may exceed the levels specified in EN 61326 when this instrumentis connected to a test object Australia New Zealand Complies with EMC Framework per the following standard Declaration of Conformity AS NZS 2064 1 2 Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions EMC General EMC To ensure compliance with EMC requirements only high quality shielded cables having a reliable continuous outer shield braid amp foil with full coverage low impedance connections to shielded connector housings at both ends should be connected to this product EC Declaration of Conformity Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official J ournal of the Low Voltage European Union Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC amended by 93 69 EEC CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 9 System Specifications Table 1 10 Certifications and compliances cont Category Standards or description EN 61010 1 A2 1995 Saf
209. limitation shall not apply within the European Economic Area where products may be returned for warranty service to the nearest designated service depot regardless of the place of purchase In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must provide the applicable office of Tektronix or its authorized representative with notice of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix or its representative with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix or its representative shall pay for the return of the product to Customer Customer shall be responsible for paying any associated taxes or duties This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment to repair any damage malfunction caused by the use of non Tektronix supplies or consumables d to repair a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases
210. ling Modules Optical Sampling Modules 7 Zoom into the 50 crossing point of the first rising edge on the C3 clock signal until the Horizontal SCALE is 10 ps div and the Vertical SCALE is 10 mV div See Figure 4 32 NOTE You can most easily zoom in on the 5096 crossing point by click dragging a rectangle around this edge using the mouse and then using the SCALE and FINE control knobs to adjust the settings to 10 mV div and 10 ps div 8 Check that the RMS jitter measurement for C3 is less than 8 ps RMS 9 Repeat this procedure from step 1 to check the recovered clock timing jitter for each of the clock recovery rates of the optical sampling module you are testing See Table 4 10 End of Procedure aane SS um mu mc i er ees mente Delitos az em C1 C3 3390 Drive ei B1 po MER e blan c1 2 d 187 7 40 REPRE Fur pa BE m ss Figure 4 31 Example of the display when the clock signal from the 80C0X CR Optical Sampling Module is synchronous with the data rate input from the pulse pattern generator Note the stable clock signal waveform Compare this with Figure 4 30 in which the clock signal is not synchronized CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 109 Optical Sampling Modules Tmgewd kam au
211. lly configured with clock recovery that supports Fibre Channel 1063 1 063 Gbps and OC 48 STM 16 2 488 Gpbs standards The 80C04 module is optimized for testing of long wavelength 1100 1650 nm signals at either 9 953 Gb s or 10 664 Gb s With its high optical bandwidth gt 28 GHz it is also well suited to general purpose high performance optical component testing m OC192 or 10 664 Gb s The electrical sampler is adjusted to give the desired response and signal is not routed through any filter signal is sent through the straight through path The sampler bandwidth and response is optimized during the calibration such that the combined system will have an OC192 STM 64 or 10 66 Gb Reference Receiver response m 20 GHz The sampler bandwidth and response is set during the calibration such that the combined system will have an Optical Bandwidth 6dB 20 GHz m 30 GHz The sampler bandwidth and response is set during the calibration such that the combined system will have an Optical Bandwidth 6dB 28 GHz The 80C04 can be optionally configured with clock recovery Opt CR 1 that supports 9 953 Gb s telecom standards For major functional circuit blocks refer to Figure 9 11 on page 9 11 The 80C05 module is designed to test long wavelength 1520 1580 signals This module is intended to be used as a test and measurement tool for high bandwidth telecommunications with its high optical bandwidth gt 40 GHz m
212. low MHz dB Frequency Lower Nominal upper 0 000 0 50 0 00 0 50 315 0 61 0 11 0 39 750 0 95 0 45 0 05 1125 1 52 1 02 0 52 1500 2 36 1 86 1 36 1875 3 50 3 00 2 50 2250 5 67 4 51 3 35 2500 7 25 5 71 4 17 2625 8 08 6 37 4 66 3000 10 74 8 54 6 35 3315 13 55 10 93 8 31 3750 16 41 1341 1041 5000 26 11 21 45 16 78 Scalar frequency response falls within Industry Standard Bessel Thompson reference receiver boundary limits 1 250 Gb s frequency response boundary limits are described in IEEE 802 32 section 38 6 5 this section refers to ITU G 957 for tolerances For convenience the scalar frequency response of the output amplitude for sinusoidal swept optical input has been interpreted from the Bessel Thompson transfer function and listed below MHz dB Frequency Lower Nominal Upper 0 000 0 50 0 00 0 50 187 5 0 61 0 11 0 39 375 0 95 0 45 0 05 562 5 1 52 1 02 0 52 750 2 36 1 86 1 36 937 5 3 50 3 00 2 50 1125 5 67 4 51 3 35 1250 7 25 5 71 4 17 1312 5 8 08 6 37 4 66 1500 10 74 8 54 6 35 1687 5 13 55 10 93 8 31 1875 16 41 13 41 10 41 2500 26 11 21 45 16 78 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 80C00 Modules Specifications Table 1 18 Optical modules Acquisition Cont Name Characteristics FC1063 Scalar frequency response falls within Industry Standard Bessel 1 0625 Gb s Thompson reference receiver boundary limits
213. lt your sampling module and connection accessory manuals Continue with the next section after installing the sampling modules Connect the Peripherals The peripheral connections are mostly the same as those you would make on a personal computer The connection points are shown in Figure 2 3 See Table 2 1 on page 2 4 for additional connection information WARNING Before installing peripheral accessories to connectors mouse keyboard etc power down the instrument See Powering Off the Instrument on page 2 7 Table 2 1 Additional accessory connection information Item Monitor Description If you use a non standard monitor you may need to change the the Windows 98 display settings to achieve the proper resolution for your monitor Printer Rackmount Connectthe printer to the EPP enhanced parallel port connector directly If your printer has a DB 25 connector use the adapter cable that came with your printer to connect to the EPP connector Refer to the CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Rackmount Installation Other Instructions for information on installing the rackmount kit Refer to the Application release notes readme txt in the C Program Files TDSCSA8000 System directory of the instrument for possible additional accessory installation information not covered in this manual 2 4 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Installation Description
214. lue vertical offset H 80C06 50 GHz setting 25 uW 6 of vertical value vertical offset Valid for calibrated wavelengths and for user calibration CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 21 80C00 Modules Specifications 1 22 Table 1 18 Optical modules Acquisition Cont Name DC vertical difference accuracy typical The accuracy of the difference between two cursors in the vertical scale of the same channel Characteristics 10 66 Gb s 12 5 GHz OC 192 STM 64 OC 48 STM 16 OC 12 STM 4 settings 2 of difference readi 20 GHz setting 4 of difference readi 30 GHz setting 6 of difference readi 80C03 all settings 2 of difference readi 80C05 40 GHz setting 896 of difference readi 80C06 50 GHz setting 2 of difference readi Valid for calibrated wavelengths and for user calibration Offset capabilities Open loop User assigned fixed offset value applied to channel Minimum optical bandwidths 80C01 module 20 GHz 12 5 GHz setting 80C02 module 30 GHz setti 80C02 CR GHz setti 80C02 and 80C02 CR 30 GHz setti 80C02 20 GHz setti 80C02 CR 80C04 module 30 GHz setti 80C04 CR1 80C04 CR2 30 GHz setti 80C04 amp 80C04 CR1 80C04 CR2 80C04 30 GHz sett 20 GHz setti 80C05 module 20 GHz setting 30 GHz setting 40 GHz settin
215. me interval accuracy locked to internal 10 MHz reference mode Horizontal Position Set to 19 ns 0 9919 ns 1 0081 ns 100 ns 0 9919 ns 1 0081 ns 1 us 0 9919 ns 1 0081 ns External direct trigger delay jitter short term optimized mode Horizontal Position Set to 19 ns none 1 5 ps 100 ns none 2 5 ps lus none 11 5 ps External direct delay jitter locked to internal 10 MHz reference mode Horizontal Position Setto 19 ns none 2 55 100 5 2 51 ps 1 us none 2 6 ps External prescaled trigger delay jitter Short term optimized mode Horizontal Scale Set to 20 ps none 1 5 ps External prescaled delay jitter locked to internal 10 MHz reference mode Horizontal Scale Set to 20 ps none 2 5 ps 4 24 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Performance Tests 80E00 Electrical Modules Test Record Photocopy this and the next three pages and use them to record the performance test results for your 80E00 Test Record Note that the designations and C2 channel 1 channel 2 in the test record may become C3 C4 C5 C6 or C7 CH8 depending on which compartment in the main instrument the module is installed 80E00 Test Record Module Model 80E01 80E02 80E03 80E04 Module Serial Number Certificate Number Date of Calibration Technician Performance Test Minimum Incoming Maximum Input Impedance C1 Impeda
216. mine very low level optical signals m 48 The electrical sampler is adjusted to approximately 12 5 GHz 3dB bandwidth and signal is not routed through any filter signal 15 sent through the straight through path The O E converter is designed by the vendor to match the OC48 reference receiver response curve The span adjustment provides limited adjustment of the frequency response It is adjustment at the factory such that the combined system will have during calibration such that the combined system will have an OC48 STM 64 Reference Receiver response This mode is synonymous with the 2 3 GHz maximum bandwidth setting m electrical sampler is adjusted and O E converter span voltage are the same values as in the OC48 mode The signal is routed through a hardware filter designed to result in the combined system having an FC1063 1 0625 Gb s Fibre Channel Reference Receiver response m The electrical sampler is adjusted and O E converter span voltage are the same values as in the OC48 mode The signal is routed through a CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 3 7 Theory of Operation 80C04 Optical Sampling Module 80C05 Optical Sampling 3 8 Module hardware filter designed to result in the combined system having an GBE 1 25 Gb s Gigabit Ethernet Reference Receiver response For major functional circuit blocks refer to Figure 9 9 on page 9 9 The 80C03 module can be optiona
217. mperature RH 96 Date of Calibration Technician Incoming Performance Test Minimum Incoming Maximum Dark level 100 pW 80C01 OC 12 STM 4 10 uW 10 UW OC 48 STM 16 10 uW 10 UW OC 192 STM 64 10 uW 10 UW 12 5 GHz 10 uW 10 UW 20 GHz 10 uW 10 uW 80C02 OC 192 STM 64 10 uW 10 UW 12 5 GHz 10 uW 10 UW 20 GHz 10 uW 10 uW 30 GHz 10 uW 10 uW 80C 04 OC 192 STM 64 10 uW 10 UW FEC 10664 10 uW 10 UW 20 GHz 10 uW 10 uW 30 GHz 10 uW 10 uW Clat5 uW 80C 03 FC1063 500 uW 500 nW GBE 500 uW 500 nW OC 48 STM 16 500 uW 500 nW C1at100 uW 80C 05 OC 12 STM 4 10 uW 10 UW 20 GHz 30 uW 30 UW 30 GHz 30 uW 30 UW 40 GHz 30 uW 30 UW at200 pW 80C06 50 GHz 25 uW 25 UW 4 28 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Performance Tests 80C00 Test Record Cont Incoming Performance Test Minimum Incoming Maximum Vertical equivalent optical noise C1at100 uW 80C01 OC 12 STM 4 none 12 UWrms Clock Recovery none 15 UWrms OC 48 STM 16 none 12 UWrms Clock Recovery none 15 OC 192 STM 64 none 12 UWrms Clock Recovery none 15 Wims 12 5 GHz none 12 Clock Recovery none 15 Wims 20 GHz none 25 UWims Clock Recovery none 25 UWrms 80C02 OC 192 STM 64 none 10 UWrms Clock Recovery none 12 UWrms 12 5 GHz none 10 Clock Recovery none 12 5 20 GHz no
218. mpling module unless noted otherwise To meet specifications three conditions must first be met m The instrument must have been calibrated adjusted at an ambient tempera ture between 20 C and 30 C m The oscilloscope must have been operating continuously for 20 minutes within the operating temperature range specified The instrument must be in an environment with temperature altitude humidity and vibration within the operating limits described in these specifications NOTE Sampling Interface refers to both the electrical sampling module interface and the optical module interface unless otherwise specified Table 1 11 Electrical sampling modules Descriptions Sampling module Description 80 01 1 channel 50 GHz 7 ps bandwidth 50 sampling module 80E02 2 channel 12 5 GHz 28 ps bandwidth 50 O low noise sampling module 80E03 2 channel 20 GHz 17 5 ps bandwidth 50 O sampling module 80204 2 channel 20 GHz 17 5 ps bandwidth 50 TDR sampling module with 35 ps single ended common mode and differential TDR capability CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 11 80E00 Modules Specifications Table 1 12 Electrical sampling modules Signal acquisition Specifications Real time accessory interface Characteristics Tekprobe SMA interface is provided through the electrical sampling module interface one per vertical channel Channel input connector 80202 80203
219. mplitude of 8 mW p p to 10 mW p p CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 101 Optical Sampling Modules 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Select Meas Dialog box and make the following changes a Select Measl b Click the Select Meas select Amplitude then select Mean Select 1 as the source d Click the Region e Enter 096 for G1 and 5 for G2 Press the MATH button on the front panel This will bring up the menu to define math functions on the waveforms Using the supplied symbols in the menu enter the following formula 100 Avg Intg CI Measl In the Num Avgs field enter 100 Check the box M1 On Click OK at the bottom of the menu Select Meas Dialog box and make the following changes a Select Meas2 b Click the Select Meas select Timing then select RISE c Make sure the box by ON is checked d Select Math M1 as the source NOTE The math M1 rise time measurement displayed in the right hand margin 4 102 e Setthe Bandwidth 50 GHz and note the risetime measurement displayed in the right hand margin Rise time should be 9 6 ps typical CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Optical Sampling Modules Clock Recovery Optical Sensitivity Range and Recovered Clock Timing Jitter This procedure checks the clock recovery optical sensitivity range for an 80C03 Optical Sampling Module and the recovered clock timing jitter on the 80C
220. mptom Diagnostic errors Possible cause s m Remove all electrical and optical modules from the instrument then diagnostics again If the instrument passes diagnostics check for the electrical and optical module thatis causing the failures The run diagnostics again m instrument fails the diagnostics without the installed modules replace the Acquisition assembly The run diagnostics again Compensation errors Modules not recognized Remove all electrical and optical modules from the instrument then run compensation again If the instrument passes compensation check for the electrical and optical module that is causing the failure m Verify that each module is completely installed into the slot If the instrument still fails compensation replace the Acquisition assembly m Module firmware incompatible with mainframe software version m Faulty module Refer to appropriate module service manual for further troubleshooting information Module not fully installed into the slot 80 0 modules have signals displayed 80 0 modules poor noise performance 80 0 modules frequency response exhibits a steep negative droop in its plot Module not fully installed into the slot Wrong channel is selected Waveform Selector and Setup menus Signal cable not connected properly m Replace optical cables Replace Optical assembly or Acquisition assembly m Male fiber fiber connections n
221. n reboot from the hard drive if so reinstall windows using the emergency startup disk and the procedure Windows 98 Reinstall Only on page 2 8 The instrument cannot reboot from the hard drive or you do not have an emergency startup disk available In either case you must rebuild your hard drive using the procedure System Hard Drive Rebuild on page 2 9 Any files or programs you have installed will be lost Windows 98 Reinstall Only If you can reboot from the instrument hard drive and you have your emergency startup disk you can reinstall Windows 98 from the hard drive This procedure is preferred over rebuilding the hard drive since the rebuild rewrites the entire hard drive 1 Power off the instrument Use the On Standby switch if possible if not use the principle power switch found at the back of the instrument CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Installation 2 Ifakeyboard is not connected to the instrument connect it 3 Insert your emergency startup disk in the instrument floppy drive 4 Poweron the instrument Make sure the principle power switch at the back of the instrument is set on Push the On Standby switch on the front panel 5 instrument should now boot from the emergency startup disk and present you with a selection menu Use the arrow and enter keys to choose Start the computer without CDROM support 6 At the prompt type c Then type cd windows options cabs 7 Type
222. n your sampling module user manual The sampling modules that you order with your instrument ship with the appropriate sampling module user manuals Read these manuals for instructions on how to install your sampling modules and then install them as outlined Sampling modules do not ship preinstalled NOTE To find sampling module user manuals check in the appendices of the CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual if user documentation is available Users are instructed to insert their sampling module user manuals there NOTE After first installing a sampling module s or after moving a sampling module from one compartment to another you should run compensation from the Utilities menu to ensure the instrument meets its accuracy specifications You must run a compensation accessed from the Utilities menu whenever the extender configuration is changed from that present at the last compensation In short if you install or remove an 80 00 extender run a compensation If you exchange a extender for one of a different length run a compensation For instructions on running a compensation see Perform the Compensation on page 4 5 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Installation Figure 2 1 shows compartments for both large and small sampling modules along with the plug in connector for the ESD wrist strap that you must use to install these modules Large module compartments 2 Small module compar
223. nce 49 5 0 5050 Baseline 80204 only 1 1 C2 Impedance 4950 5050 Baseline 80204 only 1 1 DC Voltage accuracy single point within 5 C of compensated temperature C1 Q 100 mV diV Input level Offset 1100 1550 mV 18 7 mV 18 7 mV Offset 1100 1350 mV 14 7 mV 14 7 mV Offset 1100 1100 mV 9 7 mV 9 7 mV Offset 1100 mV 850 mV 14 7 mV 14 7 mV Offset 1100 650 mV 18 7 mV 18 7 mV Offset 0 mV 450 mV 11 mV Offset 0 mV 250 mV mV 7 Offset 0 mV 0 mV 2mV 2 mV Offset 0 mV 4250 mV 7 7 mV Offset 0 mV 450 mV 11 mV Offset 1100 mV 650 mV 18 7 mV 18 7 mV Offset 1100 mV 850 mV 147 mV 14 7 mV Offset 1100 mV 1100 mV 9 7 mV 97 mV Offset 1100 mV 41350 mV 147 mV 14 7 mV Offset 1100 mV 41550 mV 18 7 mV 18 7 mV CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 25 Performance Tests 80E00 Test Record Cont Performance Test Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum C2 Q 100 mV diV Input level Offset 1100 1550 mV 18 7 mV 18 7 mV Offset 1100 1350 mV 14 7 mV 14 7 mV Offset 1100 mV 1100 mV 9 7 mV 9 7 mV Offset 1100 850 mV 14 7 mV 14 7 mV Offset 1100 650 mV 18 7 mV 18 7 mV Offset Z0 mV 450 mV mV 11 mV Offset 0 mV 250 mV 7 7 Offset 0 mV 0 mv 2 mV 2 mV
224. nd reference receiver frequency response checks NOTE The minimum optical bandwidth is not checked for the 80 03 Optical Sampling Module If testing this module go to step 10 in this procedure and continue with this procedure to check the reference receiver frequency responses 1 Inthe Vert Setup dialog box set Bandwidth to 12 5 GHz for an 80C01 and 80 02 optical sampling module Set bandwidth to 20 GHz for an 80C04 and 80 05 optical sampling module 2 Usethe Horizontal POSITION control to position the impulse at the first horizontal division This ensures that post impulse aberrations are included in the record See Figure 4 27 You may experience signal jitter if you try to display a signal that is not the first impulse and is late in relation to time zero 3 Adjust the Horizontal SCALE control so that the width of the impulse at its base is approximately 1 4 to 3 4 of a horizontal division on the display See Figure 4 27 NOTE If the width of the impulse is much greater than 3 4 of a horizontal division the resulting Fourier transform will not have enough frequency resolution if the width is much smaller that 1 4 of a horizontal division the amount of samples that fall on the impulse may be too coarse resulting in quantum errors in the resulting Fourier transform CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 93 Optical Sampling Modules 5enm Limes _____ ______ mx
225. nder Trigger Source in the Trig Setup dialog box The Internal Clock rate should be set to 200kHz Push the Trigger MENU front panel button again to dismiss the Trig Setup dialog box Push the channel button for the channel you connected to in step 2 The button lights and the channel display comes on See Figure 4 7 page 4 13 Turn the Vertical SCALE knob to set the vertical scale to 20 mV div The channel scale readout is displayed in the Control bar at the bottom of the graticule CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Brief Procedures VERTICAL amp POSITION v N 8 op Z OFFSET Channel lt buttons amp SCALE 57 M Q Figure 4 7 Channel button location 4 Set the time base Set the Horizontal SCALE to 1 us div The horizontal scale readout is displayed in the Control bar at the bottom of the graticule 5 Verify that the Main time base operates Confirm the following statements are true m One period of the internal clock signal a square wave is about five horizontal divisions on screen See Figure 4 8 on page 4 14 NOTE At some temperatures there may be extraneous data points beyond the first half cycle when viewing the front panel Internal Clock output as is done in this step This behavior may also occur when viewing multiple cycles in TDR mode In both cases this behavior is normal m Rotating the Horiz
226. ne 15 UW ms Clock Recovery none 20 UWrms 30 GHz none 30 UWrms Clock Recovery none 40 rms 80C04 OC 192 STM 64 none 10 UWrms Clock Recovery none 12 10664 10 UWrms Clock Recovery none 12 20 GHz none 15 UWrms Clock Recovery none 20 UWrms 30 GHz none 30 UWrms Clock Recovery none 40 UW ms 1 5 uW 80C03 FC1063 none 1 UWims Clock Recovery none 1 UWims GBE none 1 UWims Clock Recovery none 1 OC 48 STM 16 none 1 5 Wims Clock Recovery none 1 5 Wims C1at100 uW 80C05 OC 192 STM 64 none 15 Clock Recovery none 15 20 GHz none 25 UWims Clock 25 UWrms 30 GHz none 35 UWrms Clock Recovery none 35 UWrms 40 GHz none 70 UWims Clock Recovery none 70 UWrms at 200 uW 80C 06 50 GHz none 192 Clock Recovery none 192 UWims CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 29 Performance Tests 80C00 Test Record Cont Outgoing Maximum Incoming Performance Test Minimum Incoming Minimum Optical bandwidth 80C01 Bandwidth Setting 20 GHz 20 GHz none 12 5 GHz 125 GHz none 80C02 30 GHz 28 GHz none 20 GHz 20 GHz none 212 5 GHz 12 5 GHz none 80C04 30 GHz 28 GHz none 20 GHz 20 GHz none 80C05 Bandwidth Setting 40 GHz 40 GHz none 30 GHz 30 GHz none 20 GHz 20 GHz none OC 12 STM 4 622 Mb s Reference Receiver setting frequency response 80C01 module only Frequency MHz 0 000 93 3 186
227. ne or both large slots displaces the small slot functionality in the leftmost Channel 1 Channel 2 small slot The external trigger and all small slot channels feature a Tekprobe Level 2 probe CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 3 1 Theory of Operation Display Panel Front Panel Rear Panel Low Voltage Power Supply power connector for additional front end signal conditioning functions like high input impedance real time probes Processor System The processor system contains a dual Wintel Power PCC The basic instrument configuration supports up to eight channels labeled Ch1 through Ch 8 provides two external trigger inputs for direct and prescaled triggering through built in prescaler and is able to support two optional internal trigger sources associated with the large slot channels mapped onto electrical channels 1 and 2 Color LCD display Active matrix touch panel Display System Text and waveforms are processed by different parts of the display circuitry The display system sends the text and waveform information to the display panel Touch Panel The Display board sends information to the processor Any changes in their settings are reported to the processor system The front panel board reads the front panel switches and knob sensors Any changes in their settings are reported to the processor system The front panel board also turns the LEDs on and off and generates the bell signal Front panel
228. ng 80C02 module is optimized for testing of long wavelength 1100 1650 nm Module signals at 9 953 Gbps SONET OC 192 SDH STM 64 standards With its high optical bandwidth 230 GHz it is also well suited to general purpose high per formance optical component testing m OC192 The electrical sampler is adjusted to give the desired response and signal is not routed through any filter signal is sent through the straight through path The sampler bandwidth and response is optimized during the calibration such that the combined system will have an OC192 STM 64 Reference Receiver response m 12 5 GHz The sampler bandwidth and response is set during the calibration such that the combined system will have an Optical Bandwidth 6dB 12 5 GHz m 20 GHz The sampler bandwidth and response is set during the calibration such that the combined system will have an Optical Bandwidth 6dB 20 GHz m 30 GHz The sampler bandwidth and response is set during the calibration such that the combined system will have an Optical Bandwidth 6dB gt 30 GHz For major functional circuit blocks refer to Figure 9 7 on page 9 7 80C03 Optical Sampling 80C03 module supports conformance testing of both short and long Module bandwidth 700 1650 nm signals at 1 063 1 250 and 2 488 Mbps as well as general purpose testing with up to 2 3 GHz optical bandwidth Its amplified optical to electrical converter design enables the user to exa
229. ng Modules Electrical Sampling Modules d the Horz Setup dialog box set Record Length to 2000 points set Position to this will revert to a minimum non zero value m set Horizontal Reference to 0 e Inthe Vert Setup dialog box W set Scale to 35 mV division W set Offset to O Tests Follow this procedure for the 80E01 sampling module reference signals 1 10 In the Meas Setup dialog box a make sure the channel under test is selected in the Source menu b select Meas 1 and then choose Meas Amplitude Amplitude Set the RF signal frequency listed in the Frequency column Table 4 6 on page 4 71 Set the RF signal level listed in the Reference Set Level dBm column Table 4 6 In the Horz Setup dialog box set the CSA8000 TDS8000 Horizontal Scale to Frequency where Frequency is the RF signal frequency Press the CLEAR DATA button on the front panel of the CSA8000 TDS8000 Press the RUN STOP button on the front panel of the CSA8000 TDS8000 Record amplitude reading readout and use the value as AMPLITUDE Volts in the step that follows Convert Volts to dBm as follows Vp AMPLITUDE 2 Vrms Vp SQRT 2 P1l Vrms Vrms 50 dBm 10 log P1 0 001 Record dBm in SOEO Measured level column Table 4 6 on page 4 71 Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all frequencies listed in the Frequency column Table 4 6 on page 4 71 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4
230. nstallation Se ccc OOM ES ED gt ca gt sO Switch ofS 9 Figure 2 5 On Standby switch location 7 Wait for the boot routine and low level self test to complete 8 Follow any instructions on the screen The internal setup software will automatically configure your instrument and install all required devices depending on the installed accessories Powering Off the Instrument The instrument has a built in soft power down function that safely powers down the instrument when you push the On Standby button You do not need to close the UI application or Windows 98 before using the On Standby button To completely remove power to the instrument first soft power down the instrument using the On Standby button and then set the power switch on the rear panel to off You can restore the UI application to the screen by clicking its button in the Windows Task bar Software Installation This section describes how to install the system software found on the CSA8000 amp TDS8000 System Rebuild CD that accompanies this product The instrument ships with the product software installed so only perform these procedures if reinstallation becomes necessary Description product software comprises two parts m Window 98 Windows 98 comes preinstalled on the instrument Windows 98 is the operating system on which the use
231. nstruments and Sampling Modules XV Preface Related Documentation xvi The instrument electrical sampling modules and optical sampling modules come with the following manuals CSAS000 TDS800 User manual Tektronix part number 071 0443 XX CSAS000 TDS800 Reference manual Tektronix part number 071 0437 XX 90 01 80 02 80 03 and 80E04 Electrical Sampling Modules User manual Tektronix part number 071 0434 XX 60C00 Series Optical Sampling Modules User manual Tektronix part number 071 0435 XX CSAS000 TDS800 Rackmount Kit Instructions Tektronix part number 071 0696 XX 60A01 Trigger Prescale Preamplifier Module Tektronix part number 071 0438 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Preface Contacting Tektronix Phone Address Web site Sales support Service support Technical support 1 800 833 9200 Tektronix Inc Department or name if known 14200 SW Karl Braun Drive P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA www tektronix com 1 800 833 9200 select option 1 1 800 833 9200 select option 2 Email techsupport tektronix com 1 800 833 9200 select option 3 1 503 627 2400 6 00 a m 5 00 p m Pacific time This phone number is toll free in North America After office hours please leave voice mail message Outside North America contact a Tektronix sales office or distributor see the Tektronix web site for a list of offices CSA8000 amp TDS
232. nts and Sampling Modules Main Instrument select Meas 2 and then choose Select Meas Eye Pattern Optical RMS Jitter Dismiss the database notification that pops up check the Use Wfm Database box in the Source tab check Display Database in the Wfm Database dialog box NOTE The CSA8000 TDS8000 will select whichever the two databases that is not in use Turn on Display Database for the database that shows the current channel in the Source box Deselect Database On for the other database 2 Adjust the synthesizer signal generator level until the amplitude measure ment readout on the instrument screen indicates the amplitude is 400 mV 3 Setthe Horizontal Scale to 20 ps division and position the rising edge until it goes through the center of the display where the center horizontal and vertical graticules cross 4 Verify that the the RMS Jitter read out on the instrument screen is less than 1 5 ps 5 In the Horiz dialog box NOTE Position the rising edge until it goes through the center of the display applies to steps a through g in order to measure jitter a set All Timebases Mode to Lock Int 10 MHz Verify that the RMS Jitter read out is less than 2 5 ps set Timebase Position to 100 ns set All Timebases Mode to Short Term Jitter Verify that the the RMS Jitter read out is less than 2 5 ps set All Timebases Mode to Lock Int 10 MHz Verify that the the RMS Jitter read out is less t
233. nu in the menu bar at the top of the screen These procedures assume you will display and dismiss the setup dialog boxes as needed Input impedance These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the signal acquisition and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications Refer to Table 1 12 page 1 12 Equipment required Digital multimeter Item 1 Cable coaxial 50 20 in 0 5m male to male SMA Item 10 Adapter SMA female to BNC male connectors Item 18 Adapter BNC to dual banana plugs Item 19 Prerequisites As listed on page 4 19 and under Prerequisites on page 4 53 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 53 Electrical Sampling Modules 4 54 Setup Test Install the test hookup 1 Install the 80 module into the left most small module compartment of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument see Figure 4 16 2 Connect the Digital multimeter to Channel 1 of the 80E0X module See Figure 4 16 Digital multimeter CSA8000 TDS8000 000000009 00 Figure 4 16 Input impedance test hookup 3 Set up the CSA8000 TDS8000 as follows a Select C1 from the Waveform Selector menu on the controls bar at the bottom of the display left corner In the Trig Setup dialog box select Internal Clock 200 KHz In the Vert Setup dialog box set Offset to 0 0 V In
234. odules Removal and Installation Procedures T 20 Torxdrive screw 2 Top cover trim Acquisition trim 5 15 Torxdrive screw 3 T 15 Torxdrive screw 4 Left side trim Front panel trim 00970 00 00 pO 000 slide the flat end of a soldering aid into the side slot on the trim ring Press in then lift up to hook it underneath then pry up D Soldering aid R LOO To remove the trim ring 00008 2 200000000 Figure 6 2 Trim removal 1 Remove the bottom cover See Figure 6 3 page 6 12 Bottom Cover 6 11 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its top is down on the work surface and its bottom is facing you 2 Remove the five T 15 Torxdrive screws that secure the bottom cover to the instrument a Remove the bottom cover from the instrument b 3 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps a and b to reinstall the cabinet feet Wauuwuunuuawanaauua Bottom cover T 15 Torxdrive screw 5 Bottom cover removal Figure 6 3 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 12 Removal and Installation Procedures Cover
235. odules Specifications Table 1 13 Electrical sampling module 80E04 TDR system Cont Specifications Characteristics TDR system re 80204 lt 35 ps each polarity flected rise time TDR system incident 80E04 28 ps typical rise time TDR step maximum 80E04 200 kHz repetition rate w TDR systemstep 80204 Aberrations step transition response aberrations 3 or less over the zone 10 ns to 20 ps before step transition 410 5 or less typical for the first 400 ps following step transition 3 or less overthe zone 400 ps to 5 ns following step transition 1 or less after 5 ns following step transition 1 std 1057 section 4 8 2 transition duration of step response 2 std 1057 section 4 8 4 overshoot and precursors Table 1 14 Electrical sampling modules Timebase system Characteristics DC 200 kHz maximum lt 19 ns no extender cable present external direct trigger operation Specifications Sampling rate Horizontal position range minimum deskew adjust range between channels Table 1 15 Electrical sampling modules Power consumption Specifications Characteristics Power dissipation 80E01 11W 80E02 80E03 18W 80204 32W CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 15 80E00 Modules Specifications Table 1 16 Electrical sampling modules Mechanical Specifications Characteristics 80E01 80E02 80E03 and 80E04 0
236. of horizontal position or better delay jitter locked to internal 10 MHz refer ence mode External prescaled 1 6 ps RMS 0 05 ppm of horizontal position typical delay jitter locked to internal 10 MHz refer ence mode Typical External prescaled Enhanced Triggering Metastability R eject on Zero typical trigger metastability Internal clock trigger Rate selectable at 25 50 100 and 200 kHz internally and is provided rates to the trigger to the TDR stimulus drives in the small sampling module interfaces and to the Internal Clock Out connector on the front panel 1 The input resistance at the external direct trigger input and the maximum input voltage Maximum signal input for maintaining calibrated time base operation 3 Section 4 10 2 in IEEE standard number 1057 The minimum signal levels required for stable edge triggering of an acquisition CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 5 System Specifications Table 1 4 System Environmental Description Characteristics Dynamics Random vibration operating 0 10 g rms from 5 to 500 Hz 10 minutes each axis 3 axis 30 minutes total operating Random vibration nonoperating 2 00 g rms from 5 to 500 Hz 10 minutes each axis 3 axis 30 minutes total non operating Atmospherics Temperature Operating 10 C to 440 C Nonoperating 22 C to 60 Relative humidity Operating 20 to 80 with a maximum wet
237. on AC China 220 V 50 Hz Option 99 No power cord shipped Service offerings Option C3 Three years of calibration services Option D3 Test Data for calibration services in Opt C3 Option R3 Repair warranty extended to cover three years Option D1 Calibration data report CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules IA Electrical Parts List The modules that make up this instrument are often a combination of mechanical and electrical subparts Therefore all replaceable modules are listed in Section 10 Mechanical Parts List Refer to that section for part numbers when using this manual CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 8 1 Electrical Parts List 8 2 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Diagrams This section describes the electrical operation of the CSA8000 TDS8000 instruments and modules using the major circuit blocks or modules Figure 9 1 shows the instrument module interconnections Floppy drive Riser NLX board RS adapter Processor Sound Touch Display board RETE 2 panal Ethernet Displa Inverter pay board Mouse adapter Keyboard board CD ROM GPIB ON STANDBY PC CardBus x 2 type 1 2 RS232 0 Diags Cal adjust lock CPU board EE interface sampling Small interface sampling Acquisition board Figure 9 1 CSA8000 TDS8000 series block diagram CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Ins
238. on for more information Theminimum level of signal applied to the input of an 80A01 that has its output connected to the Trigger Prescale input of the main instrument A coaxial cable Tektronix part number 015 0560 00 is recommended for the connection from the 80A01 output to the Trigger Prescale input of the instrument 3 Amplifier functions to 14 GHz but prescale trigger is nominally limited to 12 5 GHz for 200 mVpk pk sensitivity Table 1 23 Environmental specifications Specification Characteristics Temperature Operating 109 C to 40 C Humidity Non operating 5 to 90 relative humidity Operating 20 to 80 relative humidity Table 1 24 Mechanical specifications Characteristics 0 37 kg 13 02 Specifications Weight Overall dimensions Height 24 mm 0 95 in Width 74mm 2 90 in Depth 114mm 4 95 in Does include connectors connector savers connector covers push buttons or lock down hardware protruding from the front or rear panels Construction material Chassis aluminum alloy Front panel plastic laminate Circuit boards glass laminate Cabinet sleeve aluminum Cabinet covers aluminum 1 38 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 80A01 Module Specifications Table 1 25 Electromagnetic specifications Specification Emissions Characteristic The instrument meets or exceeds the EMC requirements ofthe following standards Emissions European Community Requ
239. onitor cable to the SCOPE ONLY VGA OUT rear panel connector If monitor has a display replace the LCD panel assembly m Connectan external monitor cable to the SVGA OUT rear panel connector if monitor has a display the BIOS may need to be setup m fthe BIOS is OK then replace the Power PC circuit board assembly m Connectan external monitor cable to the SVGA OUT rear panel connector If the monitor has no display replace the NLX circuit board assembly m monitor has no display when connected to the SVGA OUT rear panel connector replace the NLX circuit board assembly m Defective cable from front panel board to riser board m Defective cable from Power PC board to front panel board m Replace the front panel board m Defective hard disk drive m Incorrect hard disk type selected in the BIOS setup m Replaceable hard disk drive not installed m Power supply failure m Corrupted controller BIOS module firmware reinstall firmware Controller BIOS setup problem See BIOS Settings Replaceable hard disk drive or optionally field installed fixed hard disk drive not configured as bootable slave master hard disk drive Faulty benchtop controller Defective CD ROM Defective CD ROM drive cable Defective CD ROM board Incorrect CD ROM configuration in the BIOS setup 6 68 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Troubleshooting Table 6 4 Failure symptoms and possible causes Cont Sy
240. ontal SCALE knob clockwise expands the waveform on screen more horizontal divisions per waveform period counter clockwise rotation contracts it and returning the horizontal scale to 1 us div returns the period to about five divisions Leave the time base set to 1 us div horizontal POSITION knob positions the signal left and right on screen when rotated NOTE The signal will not move past the minimum position setting CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 13 Brief Procedures di ss bs 8511 Tirak __ 7 21 6 E eid 7 Tr anra F EE Eil ax i am wr e pr nr e ze uas Internal Clock gt Signal Pe gee cam d Control bar gt ore p e RE DRE oen mp es p Vertical scale Horizontal setting scale setting Figure 4 8 Main time base verification 6 Setup the Magl time base a Push the Horizontal View button on the front panel The Mag1 time base view will display under the Main time base view b Setthe Horizontal SCALE to 1 us div The horizontal scale readout is displayed in the Control bar at the bottom of the graticule and is now reading out the scale of the Magl time base view 7 Verify that the Magl time base operates Confirm the following statements brackets on the
241. ontrols Quick access 4ex front ii oe Lom ip ns m zac to waveforms and timebases for display and to their scale offset and position controls for adjustment CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Status Bar Trigger status and waveform count Readout Bar Toggle individual readouts on and off by clicking its button A Readout Right click any readout to display a short cut menu providing handy access to often used setup controls and properties for the feature associated with the readout Readouts Display up to five readouts in this area selectable from the Readout Bar 2 13 Operating Instructions Front Panel Map Quick Access to Most Often Used Features Turn knob to adjust most control fields in setup dialogs Press the Select button to switch among fields Press the Fine button to toggle between normal and fine adjustment Press to start and stop acquisition or clear all channel waveforms at once Press a Menu button to quickly access the setup dialog for its control group for more detailed set up Press to display measurement cursors and setthe knob and Fine adjust and Select buttons to control them Press to quickly return to instrument default control settings Press to automatically set up the instrument controls based on selected channels Press to display the cluster of Setup Dialogs for comprehensive Y Y set up o
242. or to I O port 80h attempts to initialize the video and writes the error in the upper left corner of the screen using both monochrome and color adapters If the POST completes normally the BIOS issues one short beep before passing control to the operating system CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Troubleshooting Table 6 8 Beep codes Beeps Description Refresh failure Parity cannot be reset First 64 memory failure Timer not operational Processor failure not used 8042 Gate A20 cannot be toggled Exception interrupt error Display memory R W error ROM checksum error not used I CMOS shutdown register test error I um Invalid BIOS for example POST module not found etc Installing the Instrument Model and Serial Number To install a model or serial number into the instrument do the following steps 1 Connect a PC with a GPIB interface to the GPIB interface of the instrument WARNING Make sure the unique identifier does not end in all zeros before generating or setting the key 2 Enter the following GPIB commands if necessary install a new instrument s model number SYST PROT OFF SYST PROT MAI MODE TDS8000 or S YST PROP MAI MODE CSA8000 SYST PROT ON 3 Enter the following GPIB commands if necessary install a new instrument s serial number SYST PROT OFF SYST PROP MALSER
243. orary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be expected This location is a typical office home environment Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of service Pollution Degree 3 Conductive pollution or dry nonconductive pollution that becomes conductive due to condensation These are sheltered locations where neither temperature nor humidity is controlled The area is protected from direct sunshine rain or direct wind Pollution Degree 4 Pollution that generates persistent conductivity through conductive dust rain or snow Typical outdoor locations Safety Certification Compliance Equipment Type Testand measuring Safety Class Class 1 as defined in IEC 1010 1 Annex H grounded product Overvoltage Category Overvoltage Category Il as defined in IEC 1010 1 Annex J Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2 as defined in IEC 1010 1 Note Rated for indoor use only 1 10 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 30200 Modules Specifications 80E00 Electrical Sampling Modules This section contains specifications for the 80 01 80202 80 03 amp 80E04 Sampling Modules All specifications are guaranteed unless noted as typical Typical specifications are provided for your convenience but are not guaranteed Specifications that are marked with the symbol are checked in Performance Verification in the service manual All specifications apply to all models of sa
244. other parts of the system Read the General Safety Summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions related to operating the system To Avoid Fire or Use Proper Power Cord Use only the power cord specified for this product and Personal Injury certified for the country of use Power cord needed only in the mainframe not modules Connect and Disconnect Properly Do not connect or disconnect probes or test leads while they are connected to a voltage source Ground the Product The mainframe is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Ground the Product The modules are indirectly grounded through the grounding conductor of the mainframe power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Observe All Terminal Ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratings and markings on the product Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product Do not apply a potential to any terminal including the common terminal that exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal Do Not Operate Without Covers Do no
245. oundary limits are described in ITU T G 957 Tables 1 1 and 1 2 For convenience the scalar frequency response of the output amplitude for sinusoidal swept optical input has been interpreted from the Bessel Thompson transfer function and listed below MHz dB Frequency Lower Nominal Upper 0 000 0 50 0 00 0 50 373 3 0 61 0 11 0 39 746 5 0 95 0 45 0 05 1119 7 152 1 02 0 52 1493 1 2 36 1 86 1 36 1866 3 3 50 3 00 2 50 2239 5 5 67 4 51 3 35 2488 3 7 25 5 71 4 17 2612 8 8 08 6 37 4 66 2986 0 10 74 8 54 6 35 3359 3 13 55 10 93 8 31 3732 6 16 41 13 41 10 41 4976 7 26 11 21 45 16 78 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 1 27 80C00 Modules Specifications 1 28 Table 1 18 Optical modules Acquisition Cont Name OC192 STM 64 9 953 Gb s Reference Receiver setting frequency response Characteristics Scalar frequency response falls within Industry Standard Bessel Thompson reference receiver boundary limits Tektronix manufactures and tests the 80C01 80C02 80C04 and 80C05 optical modules using 10 GByte reference receivers to have a new superior and tighter tolerance 0 192 5 64 Reference Receiver response ITU experts recently agreed on the minimum performance specifications for 10 Gbit s STM 64 0C 192 optical reference receivers San Antonio ITU Study Group 15 February 2000 These specifications are used to establish system interoperability an
246. page 9 15 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 3 9 Theory of Operation 3 10 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Performance Verification Procedures Two types of Performance Verification procedures can be performed on this product Brief Procedures and the more extensive Performance Tests You may not need to perform all of these procedures depending on what you want to accomplish m To rapidly confirm that the instrument functions and was adjusted properly just do the Perform the Diagnostics and Perform the Compensation procedures found under Brief procedures beginning on page 4 3 Advantages These procedures are quick to do require no external equipment or signal sources and perform extensive functional and accuracy testing to provide high confidence that the instrument will perform properly They can be used as a quick check before making a series of important measurements To further check functionality first do the procedures just mentioned and then do the procedure Perform the Functional Tests found under Brief Procedures on page 4 7 Advantages These procedures require minimal additional time to perform require no additional equipment other than connection hardware and more completely test the internal hardware of the instrument They can be used to quickly determine if the instrument is suitable for putting into service such as when it is first received m If more
247. ponse 80003 module only Frequency MHz 0 000 Nominal response dB 0 00 0 50 0 50 187 5 0 11 0 61 0 39 375 0 45 0 95 0 05 562 5 1 02 1 52 0 52 750 1 86 2 36 1 36 937 5 3 00 3 50 2 50 1125 4 51 5 67 3 35 1250 5 71 7 25 4 17 1312 5 6 37 8 08 4 66 1500 8 54 10 74 6 35 1687 5 10 93 13 55 8 31 1875 13 41 16 41 10 41 2500 21 45 26 11 16 78 FC1063 1 0625 Gb s Reference Receiver setting frequency response 80003 module only Frequency MHz 0 000 Nominal response dB 0 00 0 50 0 50 159 5 0 11 0 61 0 39 318 9 0 45 0 95 0 05 478 4 1 02 1 52 0 52 637 9 1 86 2 36 1 36 191 4 3 00 3 50 2 50 956 8 4 51 5 67 3 35 1063 5 71 7 25 4 17 1116 6 37 8 08 4 66 1275 8 54 10 74 6 35 1435 10 93 13 55 8 31 1595 13 41 16 41 10 41 2126 21 45 26 11 16 78 Recovered clock timing jitter 80C01 CR Rate OC 12 Hor Scale 500 ps none 8 ps RMS 0 48 100 ps none 8 ps RMS 80C03 CR Rate FC 1063 Hor Scale 200 ps none 8 ps RMS GBE 200 ps none 8 ps RMS OC 48 100 ps none 8 ps RMS 2 5 GB s 100 ps none 8 ps RMS 4 32 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Main Instrument These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the main instrument system that are listed as checked under System in Specifications Refer to Table 1 1 on page 1 1 Prerequisites Be sure you have performed the Prerequisites on page 4 19 before doing any procedures in this section NOTE
248. ptical sampling module that you are testing 12 Repeat steps 9 through 11 for each bandwidth and filter available for the optical sampling module Refer to Table 4 7 NOTE The filter and bandwidth settings for the optical sampling module you are testing are selected from the Filter or Bandwidth control boxes in the Vert Setup dialog box End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Optical Sampling Modules Table 4 7 Dark level and vertical equivalent optical noise limits Optical sampling module 80C01 80C02 80C03 80C04 80C05 80C06 Bandwidth or filter OC 12 STM 4 Dark level Vertical equivalent optical noise std Vertical equivalent optical noise CR lt 15 uWams OC 48 STM 16 lt 15 uWgus 0 192 5 64 12 5 GHz 10 uW 5 lt 12 uWp lt 15 uWams lt 15 uWgus 5 20 GHz 10 uW lt 25 uWems 25 uWgys OC 192 STM 64 10 uW lt 10 uWaus lt 12 12 GHz 10 uW 10 12 uWems 20GHz 10 uW lt 20 uWans 30GHz 10 uW 40 uWams FC1063 500 nW lt l uWgus lt l uWgus GBE 500 nW lt 1 1 5 0 192 5 64 10 uW 12 uWams FEC10664 10 uW 10 lt 12 20 GHz 10 uW lt 20 uWems 30GHz 10 uW 40 uWgys 0 192 5 64 10 uW 15 uWeams 20 GHz 30 uW lt 25 uWems lt 25 uWems 30 GHz 30 uW lt 35 uWems lt 35 50 GHz 25 uW 192
249. put resistance DC coupled only 1 5 V DC peak AC maximum input voltage 1Vpp trigger signal External direct trigger level range Adjustable between 1 0 V External direct trigger sensitivity 100 mV DC 3 GHz External direct trigger sensitivity 50 mV typical DC 4 GHz External direct trigger level resolution 1 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules System Specifications 1 4 Table 1 3 System Trigger Cont Description External direct trigger level accuracy Characteristics 50 mV 0 10 x level External direct trigger delay jitter short term optimized mode 1 5 ps RMS 10 ppm of horizontal position or better External direct trigger delay jitter short term optimized mode typi cal 1 0 ps RMS 5 ppm of horizontal position typical External direct delay jitter locked to internal 10 MHz refer ence mode External direct delay jitter locked to inter nal 10 MHz reference mode typical External direct trigger minimum pulse width External direct trigger metastability External direct trigger real time accessory interface External prescaled trigger capabilities External prescaled trigger input charac teristics 2 5 ps RMS 0 10 ppm of horizontal position or better 1 6 ps RMS 0 05 ppm of horizontal position typical 167 ps typical Metastability Reject on Zero typic
250. r tuneable to achieve 0C192 Reference Receiver without filter 2 Diode Sampler USER VO PANEL of Plugsin O E with TLA AGC amp 9 95328 GHz resonant filter Trig L M a Figure 9 8 80C02 Optical sampling with clock recovery block diagram 9 8 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Diagrams Average Power Monitor Built in OC48 Referen Ri 0 48 Reference Receiver Response in the OJE itself and amplified Fiber i conversion gain Single mode O I User Optical RIFOCS male Input NRZ DATA Filter to achieve system FC Reference Receiver Lower noise sampler tuneable RF Switch to achieve 0C192 Reference Hs Switch A 935 er 1 0 3 Receiver without filter 5 I Coaxial only unfiltered path gt 2 8 GHz or OC 48 Reference Receiver 2 Diode 0 Sampler Figure 9 9 80C03 Optical sampling block diagram 9 9 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Diagrams User Optical Input NR Z DATA USER VO PANEL of Plugsin Average P ower Monitor Built in OC 48 Reference N Receiver Response in the itself and amplified conversion gain Multi mode 90 Electrical 10 90 splitter Filter to achieve system OC12 Reference Receiver Lower noise sampler tuneable to achieve 0C192 Reference RF Switch ue T RF Switch Receiver without filter Filter
251. r interface application of this CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 2 7 Installation Software Release Notes 2 8 Operating System Reinstallation product runs The System Rebuild CD which can be used to rebuild the instrument hard drive includes the Window 98 operating system installation If you need to reinstall Windows 98 you may be able to do so without rebuilding the instrument hard drive See Operating System Reinstallation on page 2 8 for more information User Interface UI Application The UI application complements the hardware controls of the front panel allowing complete set up of all instrument features The System Rebuild CD includes the UI application installation as part of a complete hard drive rebuild Read the software release notes README TXT ASCII file if present on the System Rebuild CD before performing any installation procedures This file contains additional installation and operation information that supercedes other product documentation To view the README TXT file open the Notepad Windows accessory and open the file on the System Rebuild CD After installation you can also read the copy from a directory on the product C Programs Files TDSCSA8000 S ystem Use the following procedure if reinstalling Windows 98 becomes necessary NOTE Only do the reinstall if Windows 98 is missing or corrupted There are two possibilities for reinstall m The instrument ca
252. r soon The display type is different than what has been stored in CMOS Check Setup to make sure type is correct The CMOS checksum is incorrect CMOS memory may have been corrupted Run Setup to reset values CMOS Settings Wrong CMOS values are not the same as the last boot These values have either been corrupted or the battery has failed CMOS Date Time Not Set The time and or date values stored in CMOS are invalid Run Setup to set correct values DMA Error Error during read write test of DMA controller FDC Failure Error while trying to access diskette drive controller HDC Failure Error while trying to access hard disk controller Update Failed NVRAM was invalid but was unable to be updated Unlock Keyboard The system keyboard lock is engaged The system must be unlocked to continue to boot Keyboard Error Error in the keyboard connection Make sure keyboard is connected properly KB Interface Error Keyboard interface test failed Timer Error Timer Test failed Memory Size Changed Memory size has changed since the last boot If no memory was Serial presence detect SP D device data missing or inconclusive Do you wish to boot at 100 MHz bus speed Y N No Boot Device Available Off Board Parity Error CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules added or removed then memory may be bad System memory does not appear to be SPD memory System did not find a boot device A
253. r the tested 2 3 mV 800 uV 1 2 mV 1 2 mV 10 Repeat steps 1 through 7 for channel 2 End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 63 Electrical Sampling Modules Rise time 80E02 80E03 amp 80E04 These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the signal acquisition and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications Refer to Table 1 12 page 1 12 Equipment Step generator Item 3 required One 50 precision coaxial cable SMA connectors Item 10 Prerequisites As listed on page 4 19 and under Prerequisites on page 4 53 Setup Install the test hookup 1 Install the 80 module into the left most small module compartment of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument See Figure 4 18 2 Connect one end of a 50 Q coaxial cable to the INTERNAL CLOCK OUTPUT of the CSA8000 TDS8000 Connect the remaining end to the TRIGGER INPUT of a step generator 3 Connect the OUTPUT of the Step generator to Channel 1 of the sampling module See Figure 4 18 Turn on the step generator CSA8000 TDS 8000 Step generator 000000000 00 S Channel I 4 Step Generator remote head Internal clock output Trigger Input 50 Q cable Figure 4 18 Rise Time hookup 4 Set up the CSA8000 TDS8000 as follows a Press the DEFAULT Setup button b
254. r to Figure 6 26 for hardware locations CAUTION Note the locations of the T 10 Torxdrive screws and the 3 6 inch hex 6 48 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures CAUTION Do not interchange the small and large sampling module threaded N posts The large slot sampling module threaded posts are single threaded posts and the small slot sampling module posts are double threaded posts Installing the double threaded posts into the large module slot could damage the large module connector d 7 10 Torxdrive 3 16 inch hex double b screw 4 threaded post 4 F O Oe 1 2 iS Ono S O pea Small slot Jp Large slot 3 16 inch hex single T 10 Torxdrive threaded post 2 screw 2 Figure 6 28 T 10 screws and threaded posts g Remove the four 3 16 inch hex threaded post from each small module slot h Remove the four T 10 Torxdrive screws from each small module slot i Disconnect J6 ribbon cable connector from the large module circuit board j Disconnect the three coaxial cables connected to the front panel INTERNAL CLOCK OUTPUT DE CALIBRATION OUTPUT AND EXTERNAL 10 MHz REFERENCE INPUT k Disconnect the TRIGGER PROBE POWER ribbon connector from J25 on the Electrical front end board 1 Slide the Acquisition assembly back toward
255. rasp the trim ring by its top edge and pull toward you to detach the three plastic snaps Alternatively you can use a flat bladed screwdriver or other small prying tool to help you detach the snaps Swing the bottom of the ring upward and off the front panel Remove the acquisition trim Use Figure 6 2 page 6 11 as a guide a c Remove the six T 15 Torxdrive screws that secure the acquisition trim to the instrument Remove the knobs from the electrical and optical ejector levers Grasp the knobs with your fingers and pull straight out Remove the acquisition trim from the instrument Remove the carrying handle and the right left side trim panels Use Figure 6 2 page 6 11 as a guide a Remove the two T 20 Torxdrive screws that secure the handle to the instrument Remove the handle from the instrument Slide the side trim panels towards the rear of the instrument allowing the tabs to clear the cover openings then pull out to remove the panels from the instrument Remove the top cover trim Use Figure 6 2 page 6 11 as a guide c Remove the accessory pouch it snaps off Remove the four T 15 Torxdrive screws that secure the top cover trim to the instrument The T 15 Torxdrive screws also secure the snap studs to the top cover Remove the top cover trim from the instrument Reinstallation Do in reverse steps 2 through 5 to reinstall the appropriate trim CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling M
256. re Never attach a cable to a sampling module connector if the cable has a worn or damaged connector because you may damage the sampling module connector Use extra care when attaching or removing a cable from the connec tors Turn only the nut not the cable When attaching a cable to a sampling mod ule connector align the connectors carefully before turning the nut Use light finger pressure to make this initial connection Then tighten the nut lightly with a torque wrench NOTE For best repeatability and to prolong connector life use a torque wrench and tighten the connection to the range of 79 112 N cm 7 10 Ib in If the sampling module connectors will receive heavy use such as in a produc tion environment you should install adapters such as a Tektronix 015 0549 xx for 3 5 mm connectors on the sampling module to make connections to the device under test Each channel has a SELECT channel button and a yellow channel light The button operates as follows m If the yellow channel light is on the channel is acquiring a waveform m If you press the button and the channel is not currently being acquired for any channel or math waveform then the instrument activates turns on the channel m If you press the button and the channel is currently active as a channel waveform then the instrument selects the channel waveform m Ifthe channel waveform is already selected when you press the channel button the instrument t
257. represents approximately 180 phase shift Verify that the trigger is operating stable 4 38 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Main Instrument 3 Setthe slope to negative and verify the trigger is operating and that the waveform position changes by 150 ps to 250 ps 4 Setthe slope back to positive 5 In the Trig Setup dialog box a under Enhanced Triggering set Metastablility Reject to off unchecked Verify that the trigger is operating b Under Enhanced Triggering set Metastablility Reject to on checked and set High Frequency Triggering to on checked Verify that the trigger is operating c under Level adjust the trigger level between 100 mV to 100 mV Verify the waveform position changes between 25 ps and 40 ps as the level is changed between 100 mV to 100 mV With positive slope the waveform shifts to the right End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 39 Main Instrument External direct trigger sensitivity These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the system trigger and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications Refer to Table 1 3 on page 1 3 Synthesized signal generator Item 13 0 5 meter precision SMA cable Item 10 1 0 meter precision SMA cable Item 11 Power divider Item 9 80E0X sampling module Equipment required Prerequisites As listed on page 4 19 and under
258. rive from the cartridge and remove the cable assembly from the connector on the hard disk drive Remove 4 screws CI C Figure 6 19 Removing the hard disk drive from the cartridge CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 33 Removal and Installation Procedures 6 34 CD Drive 1 Locate module to be removed Locate CD Drive in the locator diagram Internal Modules Figure 6 8 page 6 19 Additional modules to be removed m Trim all m Bottom cover m Left and Right covers Remove the CD Drive assembly See Figure 6 20 page 6 35 Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its bottom is down on the work surface and its rear panel is facing you a Remove the two T 15 Torxdrive screws that secure CD Drive assembly to the rear chassis b Disconnect the CD Drive ribbon cable J230 from Riser board c Slide the CD Drive assembly with the cable attached toward the rear of the chassis and remove it from the instrument Remove the CD Drive bracket and Rom interface board See Figure 6 20 page 6 35 a Remove the four 0 phillips screws that secure the bracket to the CD Drive Remove the CD Drive from the bracket b Remove the Interface board from the CD Drive by pulling the Interface board straight back until they separate Reinstallation Do in reverse steps 3 and 4 to reinstall the
259. rnal prescaled trigger sensitivity These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the system trigger and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications Refer to Table 1 3 on page 1 3 Equipment required Synthesized signal generator Item 13 0 5 meter precision SMA cable Item 10 1 0 meter precision SMA cable Item 11 Power divider Item 9 80E0X sampling module Prerequisites As listed on page 4 19 and under Prerequisites on page 4 34 Setup Install the test hookup 1 Install the 80 module into the left most small module compartment of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument see Figure 4 15 on page 4 50 2 Connect the synthesized signal generator to a 1 0 meter cable 3 Connect the remaining end of the 1 0 meter cable to a SMA power divider Connect two 0 5 meter cables to the two remaining SMA power divider connectors 4 Connect one of the 0 5 meter cables to Channel 1 of the S0EOX module Connect the remaining 0 5 meter cable to the TRIGGER PRESCALE INPUT CSA8000 TDS 8000 Synthesized signal generator 499 93 2011 Channel 1 A 1 0 Meter precision cable RF Output TRIGGER 0 5 Meter PRESCALE precision cables INPUT Power divider Figure 4 15 External prescaled trigger sensitivity test hookup 4 50 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling
260. roduct Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product A A CAUTION WARNING Protective Ground Referto Manual High Voltage Earth Terminal CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Service Safety Summary Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures Read this Service Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service procedures Do Not Service Alone Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present Disconnect Power To avoid electric shock switch off the instrument power then disconnect the power cord from the mains power Use Care When Servicing With Power On Dangerous voltages or currents may exist in this product Disconnect power remove battery if applicable and disconnect test leads before removing protective panels soldering or replacing components To avoid electric shock do not touch exposed connections CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules xiii Service Safety Summary xiv CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Preface This is the service manual for the CSA8000 Communications Signal Analyzer TDS8000 Digital Sampling Oscilloscope and the sampling and other modules that install in both instruments Read this preface to learn how this manual is structured what conventions it uses and where yo
261. ront panel clock recovery signals 2 26 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Operating Instructions Hold Down Screws Hold down screws secure the sampling optical module to the main instrument Once the hold down screws are loosened use the eject levers to remove the sampling optical module from a powered down main instrument Indicators on the hold down screws point in the direction that the latch is pointing 80A01 Trigger Prescale Preamplifier Module Operation 9 Hold down screw NOTE These are not comprehensive operating instructions consult the documen tation map on page 2 12 to find other sources of operating instructions This module is a one channel preamplifier module that can be installed in a small module compartment of a CSA8000 or TDS8000 Digital Sampling Oscilloscope The 80A01 is designed to increase the sensitivity of the prescale trigger input of these oscilloscopes to x 200 mVpt pi CAUTION To prevent damage to your module or instrument do not apply a signal outside the Maximum Input Voltage Swing for your module To prevent electrostatic damage to the instrument and sampling modules follow the precautions described in this manual and the manuals accompanying your instrument Always use a wrist strap provided with your instrument when handling modules or making signal connections The input circuitry in your module is very susceptible to damage from overdrive signals
262. rument do not apply a voltage outside the Maximum Input Voltage see page 1 12 for your sampling module To prevent electrostatic damage to the instrument and sampling modules follow the precautions described in this manual and the manuals accompanying your instrument Always use a wrist strap provided with your instrument when handling sampling modules or making signal connections The input circuitry in your sampling module is very susceptible to damage from overdrive signals and electrostatic discharge Never apply a DC or peak voltage greater than the Maximum Input Voltage see page 1 12 of your sampling module Only operate the instrument and sampling module in a static controlled environment Channel indicator SELECT channel button light yellow TEKPROBE connector TDR on indicator 80E 04 2 80 04 PROBE Hold down screw Signal connector Signal Connector PROBE POWER LECT SAMPLING 2 SUM 5 O SNTOFE 2 Left channel Right channel Figure 2 6 Sampling module 80E04 shown The input signal connectors for each channel let you connect signals that you want to sample To acquire a signal connect the signal to the sampling module through the Signal Connector input CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 2 23 Operating Instructions Channel Selection TEKPROBE Connector TDR On Indicator 2 24 Connector Ca
263. ruments and Sampling Modules Maintenance 6 4 Clean the flat panel display surface by gently rubbing the display with a clean room wipe such as Wypall Medium Duty Wipes 05701 available from Kimberly Clark Corporation If the display is very dirty moisten the wipe with distilled water or a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution and gently rub the display surface Avoid using excess force or you may damage the plastic display surface CAUTION To prevent getting moisture inside the instrument during external cleaning use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator Inspection Interior To access the inside of the instrument for inspection and cleaning refer to the Removal and Installation Procedures in this section Inspect the internal portions of the instrument for damage and wear using Table 6 2 as a guide Defects found should be repaired immediately If any circuit board is replaced check Table 5 1 on page 5 1 in Section 5 to see if it is necessary to adjust the instrument CAUTION To prevent damage from electrical arcing ensure that circuit boards and components are dry before applying power to the instrument Table 6 2 Internal inspection check list Item Inspect for Repair action Circuit boards Loose broken or corroded Remove and replace damaged solder connections Burned circuit board circuit boards Burned broken or cracked circuit run plating Resistors cracked bro
264. s 80E 03 80 04 175 ps End of Procedure 4 66 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Electrical Sampling Modules Analog bandwidth 80E01 Power Reference Characterization Setup These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the signal acquisition and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications Refer to Table 1 12 page 1 12 This check has two procedures that characterizes the reference signals The last procedure characterizes the 80E01 sampling module Equipment required Synthesized signal generator Item 13 Power meter Item 14 Power sensor Item 15 Adapter 2 4mm male to male Item 16 Adapter 2 4mm female to female Item 17 Attenuator 10 dB pad Item 20 Cable special power phase stability Item 21 Prerequisites As listed on page 4 19 and under Prerequisites on page 4 53 Install the test hookup to measure the power reference NOTE Use a torque wrench when connecting the terminators adapters attenuator and power sensor in this setup Use 8 X 0 3 inch pounds of torque 1 Connect the 10 dB attenuator to the Synthesized signal generator Connect the remaining end to the power sensor Connect the power sensor to the power meter See Figure 4 19 on page 4 67 Synthesized signal generator Power Sensor w attached cable RF Output 10dB Attenuator Power meter
265. s 1 Remove the left and right covers See Figures 6 4 and 6 5 pages 6 14 and 6 15 m Trim all m Bottom cover 2 Orient the instrument Set the instrument so its rear is on the work surface and the front of the instrument facing the technician NOTE All mounting screw holes are indicated by a star etched around the mounting hole a Remove the thirteen T 15 Torxdrive screws that secure the covers to the top and both sides of the chassis b Remove the nine T 15 Torxdrive screws that secure the covers to the bottom of the chassis Pull the bottom right cover down and slide to the right to remove from the instrument Pull the top left cover upward and slide to the left to remove from the instrument ii CAUTION Take care not to bind or snag the covers on the instrument s internal cabling as you remove or install 3 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps a through c to reinstall the cabinet CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 13 Removal and Installation Procedures m in Z395 ys 5 lt x shown lt T 15 Torxdrive Right side cover Cover removal Figure 6 4 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 14 Removal and Installation Procedures 22 Left side cover LEA unaunnananananana
266. s and Sampling Modules Options and Accessories Optional Accessories Optional The following accessories are orderable for use with the instrument at the time this manual originally published Consult a current Tektronix catalog for additions changes and details Table 7 3 Optional accessories Item DL 11 Dual Delay Line 510 800 Static Isolation Unit Sampling Module Extender 1 meter Sampling Module Extender 2 meter 3 5 Male to 3 5 Female SMA Slip on SMA connector 2X Attenuator SMA Male to F emale 5X Attenuator Male to F emale Power Divider BNC Female 75 Ohm to 50 Ohm Type N Minimum Loss Attenuator P6209 4 GHz Active FET Probe P6150 9 GHz Passive Probe Replacement hard disk drive CSA8000 amp TDS 8000 Service Manual CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Part Number DL 11 SIU 800 012 1568 00 012 1569 00 015 0552 00 015 0553 00 015 1001 00 015 1002 00 015 0565 00 131 0112 00 P6209 P6150 119 6241 00 071 0438 00 7 3 Options and Accessories Options 7 The following options be ordered for the instrument Option 1K Cart Option 1R Rack Mount Kit includes hardware and instructions for converting to rackmount configuration Tektronix part number 016 1791 XX International Power Cords Options Option A1 Universal Euro 220 V 50 Hz Option A2 UK 240 V 50 Hz Option A3 Australian 240 V 50 Hz Option A5 Switzerland 220 V 50 Hz Opti
267. s by turning them counterclockwise using a flat bladed screwdriver and remove the line fuses Reverse procedure to reinstall 6 Remove line cord Find the line cord on the rear cover Pull the line cord away to remove from the AC power connector Reverse procedure to reinstall 7 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps 5 and 6 to reinstall the line cord and then the line fuse CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures ue power cord connector Power switch AC power cord Line fuse holder Line fuses Figure 6 6 Line fuses and line cord removal CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 17 Removal and Installation Procedures Right side trim Carrying handle Rear foot Right side cover Top cover trim Left side cover i v 4 t 0 7 TF M Yoo oo 000 1 00 QQY o 2 ANG Chassis Acquisition trim Left side trim Front panel trim Front panel cover Figure 6 7 External modules CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 18 Removal and Installation Procedures Hard drive CD drive CD drive Interface board NC 5 Fan assembly S A NZA ANA
268. s designed to operate on a bench or on a cart in the normal position on the bottom feet For proper cooling at least two inches 5 1 cm of clearance is recommended on the rear and sides of the instrument You can also operate the instrument while it rests stood up on its rear feet If you operate the instrument while it is resting on the rear feet make sure that you properly route any cables coming out of the rear of the instrument to avoid damaging them CAUTION Keep the bottom of the instrument clear of obstructions to ensure proper cooling CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 2 1 Installation Operating Requirements Rackmount Requirements Specifications in chapter 1 list the operating requirements for the instrument Power source and temperature humidity and altitude are listed If this instrument is rackmounted see TDS8000 amp CSA6000 Rackmount Instructions for additional site considerations or operating requirements This document ships with the Option 1 R rackmount kit Install the Sampling Modules 2 2 AN AN Check Your Sampling Module Manual s CAUTION Do not install or remove any sampling modules while the instrument is powered on Always power the instrument down before attempting to remove or insert any sampling module WARNING Sampling modules are inherently vulnerable to static damage Always observe static safe procedures and cautions as outlined i
269. s static sensitive boards Discharge the static voltage from your body by wearing a grounded antistatic wrist strap while handling these modules Do service of static sensitive modules only at a static free work station Nothing capable of generating or holding a static charge should be allowed on the work station surface CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 1 Maintenance 5 Handle circuit boards by the edges when possible 6 Do not slide the circuit boards over any surface 7 Avoid handling circuit boards in areas that have a floor or work surface covering capable of generating a static charge Inspection and Cleaning 6 2 General Care A Interior Cleaning Exterior Cleaning Inspection and Cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage It also describes how to clean the exterior and interior of the instrument Inspection and cleaning are done as preventive maintenance Preventive maintenance when done regularly may prevent instrument malfunction and enhance its reliability Preventive maintenance consists of visually inspecting and cleaning the instrument and using general care when operating it How often to do maintenance depends on the severity of the environment in which the instrument is used A proper time to perform preventive maintenance is just before instrument adjustment The cabinet helps keep dust out of the instrument and should normally be in place when operating the
270. sensor to the power meter See Figure 4 21 on page 4 70 Synthesized signal generator Cable special power phase stability RF Output 10dB Attenuator 2 4 mm Female to F emale Adapter Power Sensor w attached cable Power meter Figure 4 21 Measure reference signals 3 Setthe synthesized signal generator to 43 dBm 4 Setthe signal frequency and the power meter frequency to each of the frequencies listed in the Frequency column Table 4 6 on page 4 71 5 Adjust the RF signal level until the reading on the power meter as close to 9 dBm as possible 6 Record the Synthesized signal generator set level reading in the Reference RF set level dBm column Table 4 6 on page 4 71 4 70 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Electrical Sampling Modules 7 Record the Power meter reading in the Measured RF level dBm column Table 4 6 on page 4 71 8 Calculate and record the Reference RF level in Table 4 6 for all frequencies listed as follows Measured RF level 2 4mm female to female adapter loss dB column in Table 4 5 on page 4 68 Table 4 6 DUT device under test reference response Frequency Reference Measured Reference 80 01 mea DUT set level RF level RF level sured level response dBm dBm 50 MHz 4 GHz 8 GHz 12 GHz 16 GHz 20 GHz 24 GHz 28 GHz 32 GHz 36
271. setup Follow the instructions on screen NOTE At a prompt you can type help at anytime to read a file that may be helpful in getting the Windows 98 operating system up and running System Hard Drive Rebuild If you cannot reboot from the instrument hard drive you must rebuild the instrument hard drive This process will return the hard disk to the its original condition present when the instrument shipped Since data and programs you may have installed are lost with this rebuild you should do the Windows 98 Reinstall Only procedure instead if you can See Windows 98 Reinstall Only on page 2 8 If you must rebuild the system hard drive use the System Rebuild CD that shipped with the instrument Follow the instructions in the booklet found in the CD case System Diagnostics In case of instrument problems you may wish to run the system diagnostics If so see the procedure Perform the Diagnostics on page 4 3 Windows Safe Mode If the instrument is turned off before the operating system boots or if you ve installed a third party product with a driver incompatible with instrument start up Windows 98 will open in Safe mode The touchscreen will be inoperable therefore you must install the standard accessory mouse and keyboard to operate the instrument When you have finished investigating and removed any barrier to Windows start up you can reboot If the instrument no longer boots to Safe mode you can remove the ke
272. ship from Tektronix with the 50 ohm terminator installed First all sampling modules to be diagnosed must be installed as outlined in their user manuals Prerequisites Second power on the instrument and allow a 20 minute warm up before doing this procedure 1 Run the compensation routines a From the application menu bar select Utilities and then select Com pensation In the Compensation dialog box the main instrument mainframe and sampling modules are listed The temperature change from the last compensation 15 also listed See Figure 4 1 on page 4 5 T aae M Dpr 60 0 8 Cements Click to select compensate Choose all as targets Figure 4 1 Compensation dialog box CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 5 Brief Procedures 4 6 Wait until the Status for all items you wish to compensate changes from Warm Up to Pass Fail or Comp Req d Under Select Action click the Compensate option button From the top pulldown list choose AII default selection to select the main instrument and all its modules as targets to compensate Click the Execute button to begin the compensation Follow the instructions to disconnect inputs and install terminations that will appear on screen be sure to follow static precautions see the user manual for your
273. standard 80C04 Long wavelength 1100 nm 1650 nm Unamplified O E converter with two user selectable optical bandwidths 20 GHz gt 28 GHz or two user selectable reference receiver responses OC 192 STM 64 for 9 953 Gb s Sonet SDH standards 10 66 Gb s for FEC 10 664 Gb s 80C05 Long wavelength 1520 nm 1580 nm Unamplified O E converter with maximum optical bandwidth in combination with the internal electrical sampler gt 40 GHz Calibrated only at 1550 nm There is one reference receiver setup selectable OC 192 for 9 95328 Gb s Sonet S DH standards No clock recovery option available 80 06 Long wavelength 1520 nm 1580 nm Unamplified O E converter with maximum optical bandwidth in combination with the internal electrical sampler gt 50 GHz It is calibrated only at 1550 nm Fixed bandwidth selection of 50 GHz No reference receiver setups No clock recovery option available Table 1 18 Optical modules Acquisition Name Characteristics Number of input 1 optical channels Internal fiber Characteristics 1 diameter 80 01 9 125 um single mode 80C 02 9 um 125 um single mode 80C03 62 5 um Corning 62 5 125 CPC6 specs multimode compatible with single mode fiber cladding 125 um buffer 900 um Internal fiber 80C04 80C05 amp 80C 06 9 um 125 um single mode diameter Fiber connector Rifocs UCI universal connector interface male connector 1 18 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules
274. state The specific voltages that constitute a high or low state vary among the electronic devices Mainframe Overview This mainframe overview describes the basic operation of each functional circuit block as shown in Figure 9 1 on page 9 1 General The instrument control system is a dual Wintel PowerPC based processor board The platform features VGA resolution flat panel display transparent touch screen and user front panel with direct access to commonly used scope functions The instrument is also equipped with a mouse pointing device to facilitate access to more advanced scope functions Input Signal Path signal enters the instrument through a direct coaxial connection to the input connector on a sampling module or a real time probe connected to the sampling module channel Acquisition System The acquisition system conditions the input signals samples them converts them to digital signals and controls the acquisition process under direction of the processor system The acquisition system includes the multi source trigger acquisition timebase and acquisition mode generation and control circuitry The acquisition board is located in the bottom compartment of the instrument and can accommodate four dual channel sampling Plug ins two one channel optical plug ins and a trigger holdoff subsystem Up to 8 vertical channels are accommodated simultaneously Channels 1 and 2 are either large or small slots The presence of an module in o
275. struments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures a Remove the six phillips screws that secure the cover to the chassis b Slide the chassis out toward the rear of the cover 4 Remove the lock down shaft and bracket See Figure 6 38 page 6 64 a Remove the two phillips screws that secure the bracket to its mount Remove it b Liftout the lock down shaft 5 Reinstallation Perform steps 2 through 4 in reverse to reassemble the 80401 module a Ifinstalling a replacement the front panel do the following steps before performing step 2 m Remove the backing from the front panel label m Align the holes and attach to the front panel b Ifinstalling a replacement cover do the following steps before perform ing step 3 m Remove the backing from the antistatic label m Install the antistatic label to the replacement cover CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 65 Removal and Installation Procedures 6 66 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Troubleshooting Service Level This subsection contains information and procedures designed to help you isolate faulty modules in the instrument If a module needs to be replaced follow the Removal and Installation Procedures located in this section Check for Common Problems Use Table 6 4 to quickly isolate possible failures The table lists problems related to the instrument and possible causes The list is no
276. t s cal constant protection off SYST PROT OFF Click Run Stop button should be green Measurement menu click Show Stats Record target value Mean value 1 where Mean is from the Statistics window Horizontal menu Timebase Position enter target value recorded in step 5 Click Run Stop button should be gray Measurement menu click Clear Stats Click Run Stop button should be green wait 8 seconds then click Run Stop again button should be gray Using the present Mean value from the Statistics window and the target value calculated in step 5 Calculate the error and the new cal constant Error mean target value 1 us New Cal Const Error 10e6 10e6 Input the new calibration constant into the instrument by sending the following GPIB command CALCOMP DOUBLE InternallOMHzRefFreq New Cal Const where New Cal Const is from Step 10 Wait 8 seconds then save the mainframe factory calibration constants by entering the following GPIB commands CAL SAVE FACT MAI Update the mainframe calibration time date temperature stamp by entering the following GPIB command CAL UPDATEINFO MAI Enter the following GPIB command to turn the instrument s cal constant protection on SYST PROT ON End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Maintenance This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective maintenance on the Mainframe Sampling Heads an
277. t Setup dialog box do the following a Setthe Scale to one of the following values m 100 uW div for an 80 01 80 02 80 04 80 05 Optical Sampling Module m 5 uW div for an 80C03 Optical Sampling Module m 200 uW div for an 80C06 Optical Sampling Module b Set Position to 0 0div c Set Channel Offset to 0 0W 8 In the Horiz Setup dialog box do the following a Set Scale to 1 000 ns div b Set Record Length to 500 9 In the Hist Setup dialog box do the following a Select Main as the Source b Check Enable Histogram Select Vertical d Close the Hist Setup dialog box CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Optical Sampling Modules Procedure Follow this procedure to make the Dark Level and Vertical Equivalent Optical Noise checks 1 Inthe Utilities menu select System Properties Check that the Mainframe Current On Time is greater than 0 33 hours 20 minutes NOTE The values in System Properties dialog box do not update while the dialog box is open Close the dialog box and reopen it to get updated values 2 Close the System Properties dialog box 3 In the Utilities menu select Compensation 4 Make the following selections in the Compensation dialog box a Under Select Action select Compensate b Select Module Select Chl 5 Click Execute and then click OK to the message box that appears 6 Waituntil the compensation is completed hour glass cursor reverts back to
278. t exhaustive but it may help you eliminate a problem that is quick to fix such as a blown fuse or loose cable Table 6 4 Failure symptoms and possible causes Symptom Mainframe will not power on Front panel light comes on mainframe powers on but one or more fans will not operate Possible cause s Power cord not plugged in Failed fuse Faulty power supply Faulty modules Main power switch rear panel not on Front panel power switch not on Monitor not connected properly Faulty fan cable Defective fan assembly Faulty power supply Mainframe powers on but no signal displayed Controller appears dead power light comes on but monitor screen s is are blank CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Wrong channel is selected Waveform Selector and Setup menus Module not fully installed into the slot Signal cable not connected properly m Wrong trigger input check signal cable and Setup menus are Direct or P rescale SO DIMMs incorrectly installed or missing Defective NLX board 6 67 Troubleshooting Table 6 4 Failure symptoms and possible causes Cont Symptom Flat LCD panel display blank Front panel LEDs do not light Hard disk drive related symptoms CD ROM related symptoms Possible cause s m External monitor plugged in but not powered on m External monitor plugged in look on external monitor for display m Connectan external m
279. t operate this product with covers or panels removed Use Proper Fuse Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product Avoid Exposed Circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Wear Eye Protection Wear eye protection if exposure to high intensity rays or laser radiation exists Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules xi General Safety Summary Symbols and Terms AN AN Xii Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry Provide Proper Ventilation Refer to the manual s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation Terms in this Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the p
280. t that has been replaced with a different or improved part your local Tektronix field office or representative will contact you concerning any change in part number Module Servicing Modules can be serviced by selecting one of the following three options Contact your local Tektronix service center or representative for repair assistance Module Exchange In some cases you may exchange your module for a reman ufactured module These modules cost significantly less than new modules and meet the same factory specifications For more information about the module exchange program call 1 800 TEK WIDE extension 6630 Module Repair and Return You may ship your module to us for repair after which we will return it to you New Modules You may purchase replacement modules in the same way as other replacement parts CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 10 1 Mechanical Parts List Using the Replaceable Parts List This section contains a list of the mechanical and or electrical components that are replaceable for the instrument Use this list to identify and order replacement parts The following table describes each column in the parts list Parts list column descriptions Column Description 1 Figure amp Index Number Items in this section are referenced by component number 2 Tektronix Part Number Use this part number when ordering replacement parts from Tektronix 3and4 Serial Number Column three indicates th
281. t the instrument Set the instrument so its top is down on the work surface and its front is facing you 6 52 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures 3 Remove the small module chassis See Figure 6 31 page 6 54 a Remove the nine T 10 Torxdrive screws from front panel grounding lug to the inside chassis When removing the top right T 10 Torxdrive screw make sure this ground nut is retained for later reassembly See Figure 6 31 page 6 54 CAUTION One of these Torxdrive screws secures 5 16 inch hex nut and b Remove the seven 5 16 inch hex nuts that secures the small module chassis to the instrument c Liftthe chassis up and out of the instrument 4 Remove the large module chassis See Figure 6 31 page 6 54 a Remove the four T 10 Torxdrive screws from the front panel b Remove the eleven 5 6 inch hex nuts that secure the optical module chassis to the instrument c Remove the snap on ejector lever handles d Liftthe back of the chassis up over the studs then slide the chassis to the rear and out of the instrument CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 53 Removal and Installation Procedures Lock nut 7 15 Small module i chassis Small module chassis removal Ground nut Ejector handle 6 d T 10 Torxdrive screw 9 Ground nut screw
282. table In the TDR mode a fast rise time step is generated internally for each channel and applied to the input signal path for that channel The acquisition portion of the TDR sampling module remains functional for monitoring the primary step and its reflected components The sampling module provides two self contained TDR channels The polarity of the output step can be selected independently for each channel This allows differential or common mode testing of two coupled lines as well as independent testing of isolated lines For major functional circuit blocks refer to Figure 9 4 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Theory of Operation 80 0 and 80COX CR _ 80COX and 80COX CR optical modules share the same mechanical package and Optical Sampling Modules built with a common circuit board Different functionality within the modules current and future modules is achieved by installing different O E modules filters and clock recovery boards along with setting the sampler bandwidth as demanded The key features supported in the module are one channel low noise adjustable bandwidth sampler allowing multiple bandwidth settings for optimizing noise verses bandwidth demands m An amplified or non amplified O E converter m Support for switch module with a straight through path and two filtered reference receiver paths between the O E converter and the sampler m An average optical power meter Int
283. tandard Y32 2 1975 Abbreviations are based on ANSI 1 1 1972 Logic symbology is based on ANSI IEEE Std 91 1984 in terms of positive logic Logic symbols depict the logic function performed and can differ from the manufacturer s data The tilde preceding a signal name indicates that the signal performs its intended function when in the low state Other standards used in the preparation of diagrams by Tektronix Inc are m Tektronix Standard 062 2476 Symbols and Practices for Schematic Drafting W ANSI Y14 159 1971 Interconnection Diagrams ANSI Y32 16 1975 Reference Designations for Electronic Equipment MIL HDBK 63038 1A Military Standard Technical Manual Writing Handbook 9 16 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Mechanical Parts List This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the instrument Use this list to identify and order replacement parts Parts Ordering Information Replacement parts are available through your local Tektronix field office or representative Changes to Tektronix instruments are sometimes made to accommodate improved components as they become available and to give you the benefit of the latest circuit improvements Therefore when ordering parts it is important to include the following information in your order m Part number Instrument type or model number m Instrument serial number Instrument modification number if applicable If you order a par
284. the Horz Setup dialog box W set Scale to 2 ns division set Position to this will revert to a minium non zero value m set Horizontal Reference to 0 In the Acq Setup dialog box set Acquisition Mode to Sample Follow this procedure to make the input impedance check 1 Setthe Digital multimeter to the ohm mode 2 Record InputR reading on the Digital multimeter 3 Reverse polarity and record InputR reading on the Digital multimeter CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Electrical Sampling Modules 4 Check average of InputR and InputR reverse 50 5 and 49 5 5 80204 Only Set the Digital multimeter to volt mode at the minimum range x 100 mV 6 80204 Only Record reading on the Digital multimeter as baseline voltage 7 80 04 Only Check baseline voltage for 1 mV Enter value on test record 8 Make the following settings and then repeat steps 1 through 7 to check channel 2 a Select the next channel to test if any from the Waveform Selector menu on the controls bar at the bottom of the display left corner b In the Vert Setup dialog box set Offset to 0 0 V End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 55 Electrical Sampling Modules DC voltage measurement accuracy These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the signal acquisition and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications
285. the channel off Clock recovery outputs optional A 80C01 CR OPTICAL SAN PLING MODULE m O AC COUPLED Hold down Channel indicator screws 2 light yellow DATA INTO S0Q clock CLOCK OPTICAL UT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT yea ea CLOCK RECOVERY nm D 5mW a g 10mWpeak FILTERS 622 MB s 2 488 Gb s 9 953 Gb s UCI optical SELECT input connector channel button Figure 2 7 Sampling module 80C01 CR shown Optical Input Connector The optical input connector uses a universal connector interface UCI that allows use of many standard fiber optic female connector styles Some of the standard UCI interfaces supported are FC ST SC and DIN Refer to a current Tektronix catalog for details Clock Recovery Outputs Optional clock and data recovery circuitry provides clock and data outputs the recovered clock is also internally routed to the main instrument trigger circuit The circuitry also provides front panel outputs normal and complemented clock and normal and complemented data 80 02 has data clock and 1 16 clock outputs Use 50 Q terminations provided with your optical sampling module on unused outputs You can disable the internal recovered clock from being used as the main instrument trigger by selecting external or internal clock triggering select the recovered clock rate without actually selecting recovered clock as the trigger source in order to activate the f
286. the time or difficulty of servicing the product or to repair damage or malfunction resulting from failure to perform user maintenance and cleaning at the frequency and as prescribed in the user manual if applicable THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Table of Contents Specifications Operating Information General Safety Summary Service Safety eb ee Eee Manual Conventions Related Documentation Contacting Tektronix System Specifications C er f1CatlODS x eis NG SCR ENSE E Reals Ge Bee ER en ey te 80E00 Electrical Sampling Modules
287. tical sampling module dustcap installed on the OPTICAL INPUT Equipment CSA8000 TDS 8000 required Terminator 50 O coaxial SMA male item 7 used with optical sampling modules with clock recovery CR Prerequisites See page 4 19 Setup Install the test hookup and preset the CSA8000 TDS8000 controls 1 Install the 80COX Optical Sampling Module into Channel 1 of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument see Figure 4 25 CSA8000 TDS 8000 80 0 Optical ee t 296 Sampling Module O Figure 4 25 Dark Level and Vertical Equivalent Optical Noise test hookup CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 83 Optical Sampling Modules 4 84 2 Install the black fibre optic dustcap onto the OPTICAL INPUT connector of the optical sampling module 3 Ifthe optical sampling module has clock recovery install 50 2 terminations on the outputs 4 Press the DEFAULT SETUP button on the TDS8000 or CSA8000 front panel Click Yes in the dialog box that appears 5 Select for the waveform source use the waveform selector button in the lower left corner of the application display 6 Inthe Trig Setup dialog box select Internal Clock for the Trigger Source NOTE If the Scale Position and Channel Offset control boxes are not displayed in the following step click the Basic button in the lower left part of the Vert Setup dialog box 7 Inthe Ver
288. time of this step response The procedure to do this follows 4 98 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Optical Sampling Modules Integrated Rise Time 80C06 This procedure checks the Integrated rise time of an 80C06 Optical Sampling Module NOTE To optimize performance make sure that all connections are clean and secure and that all components of the system are in good condition Optical fiber can gradually degrade the system performance as it is repeatedly flexed over time Equipment Tektronix CS A8000 TDS 8000 required Calmar FP L 01 optical impulser item 25 Tektronix 045002 variable optical attenuator item 24 Single mode fiber optic cable 2 m FC to FC connectors item 30 Cable coaxial 1 m male to male SMA connectors item 11 Prerequisites See page 4 19 Before performing this procedure be sure you have completed the Dark level amp Vertical Equivalent Optical Noise procedure on page 4 83 Setup Install the test hookup see Figure 4 26 and preset the CSA8000 TDS8000 controls 1 Install the 80COX Optical Sampling Module into Channel 1 of the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instrument CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 99 Optical Sampling Modules GPIB cable CSA8000 TDS 8000 80C 0X Controller Rear trigger 0 000 wale O 90 0 000 Optical impulser generator Variable optical attenuator 000 0 0
289. tments 4 Connect ESD wrist strap here NIE TRIGGER PROBE POWER Figure 2 1 Compartments for sampling modules Maximum Configuration You can install up to two large sampling modules and four small modules for a total of 10 inputs Of these 10 inputs only eight inputs can be active at one time see Figure 2 2 top two configurations Also note that installing a single large module in either compartment disables the first small module compartment This configuration see Figure 2 2 bottom configuration limits the input count to seven one from the large six from the small compartments Eight channels Two large modules and lt three small modules Eight channels No large and four J small modules Seven channels One large module 4 installed in either compartment and three small modules M CH1 CH2 CH 6 IE NA NA ET CH6 CH 1 N A CH 2 N A A IE CHT 1Not Available Figure 2 2 Maximum inputs in three configurations Install probes cables and other connection accessories to your sampling modules as appropriate for your application and sampling module Again CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Installation consu
290. to Male Adapter 2 4 mm Female to Female Adapter Power Sensor w attached cable Power meter Figure 4 20 Adapter characterization hookup Adapter Characterization Follow this procedure to characterize the reference level with the adapters Measurements 1 Set the signal frequency and the power meter frequency to each of the frequencies listed in the Frequency column Table 4 5 on page 4 68 2 Record the readings on the power meter in the Reference level with the adapters dBm column Table 4 5 on page 4 68 3 Calculate and record the 2 4 mm female to female adapter loss dB in Table 4 5 on page 4 68 for all frequencies listed as follows Reference level with adapters dBm Reference level dBm 2 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 69 Electrical Sampling Modules Setup Install the test hookup to measure reference signals NOTE Use a torque wrench while connecting the adapters power sensor in this setup Use 8 x 0 3 inch pounds of torque 1 Connect the cable to the Synthesized signal generator Connect the remaining end of the cable to the 1048 attenuator 2 Connect the remaining end of the 10 dB attenuator to a 2 4 mm female to fe male adapter Connect the remaining end of the 2 4 mm female to female adapter to the power sensor Connect the remaining end of the power
291. to Table 4 8 for the settings that match the module model Table 4 8 Minimum optical bandwidth limits Optical sampling module Bandwidth setting Bandwidth limit 80C01 20 GHz gt 20 GHz 12 5 GHz gt 12 5 GHz 80C02 30 GHz gt 28 GHz 20 GHz gt 20 GHz 12 5 GHz gt 12 5 GHz 80C04 30 GHz 228 GHz 20 GHz 220 GHz 80C05 40 GHz gt 40 GHz 30 GHz gt 30 GHz 20 GHz gt 20 GHz 10 In the Vert Setup dialog box select a Filter see the Table 4 9 for filters available for the various optical sampling modules 11 Do steps 2 through 7 12 Refer to Table 4 9 and check that the optical sampling module meets the limits listed for the tested filter 13 Repeat steps 10 through 12 for each of the filters available for the optical sampling module that you are testing End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 95 Optical Sampling Modules Table 4 9 Reference receiver frequency response limits Optical sampling module Filter Limits 80C01 OC 12 STM 4 MHz 08 Frequency Lower Nominal Upper 0 000 0 50 0 00 40 50 93 3 0 61 0 11 40 39 186 6 0 95 0 45 0 05 279 9 1 52 1 02 0 52 373 2 2 36 1 86 1 36 466 7 3 50 3 00 2 50 559 9 5 67 4 51 3 35 622 1 7 25 5 71 4 17 653 2 8 08 6 37 4 66 746 5 10 74 8 54 6 35 839 8 13 55 10 93 8 31 933 1 16 41 13 41 10 41 1244 2 26 11 21 45 16 78 80C01 80C03 OC 48 STM 16 MHz dB Frequency Lower Nominal Upper 0
292. trols and elements on screen Online help includes a setup guide of proce dures for applying all instrument functions See How to Use Online Help on page 2 17 Access this online guide from the instrument from its Help menu Quickly find the syntax for any command and copy the command if desired Read about communication error handling and other information on GPIB usage 1 Modules other than sampling modules such as the 80401 Trigger Prescale Preamplifier Module User Manual also have individual user manuals that insert in the main user manual 2 12 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Operating Instructions User Interface Map Complete Control and Display Menu Bar Access to data 1 0 printing online help system and set up functions Tool Bar Handy access to key features including the setup dialogs acquisition modes triggering modes m ee and online help se rper imt Rum ctm wen Measurements Bar Quick OA sen ao va re unn or access to the automated measurements by category click measurement buttons to measure the selected waveform t math waveforms display here along with cursors masks etc to analyze them Waveform Bar Access gt to waveform selection ET click waveform position drag and waveform properties right click TES Per Qo Cerne C
293. trumentation is connected and GPIB configured allow the instru mentation to warm up for at least 20 minutes before starting the DC Calibrator Adjust procedures Controller GPIB cable CSA8000 TDS 8000 Digital 500 multimeter Terminator T d 00 00 j Figure 5 1 Adjustment setup using the DC Calibrator Adjust Connect the instrument to a DMM as shown in Figure 5 1 1 Run the compensation routine described in Brief Procedures section on page 4 5 Enter the following GPIB command to verify communication between the controller and DUT IDN Should respond with Tektronix and Firmware Version Enter the following GPIB command to turn the instrument s cal constant protection off SYST PROT OFF Enter the following GPIB command to set the instrument s DC calibrator offset cal constant to 0 CALCOMP DOUBLE DcCalOffsetAdj 0 0 Wait 8 seconds then enter the following GPIB command to set the instrument s DC calibrator Lsb cal constant to 1 0 CALCOMP DOUBLE DcCalLsbAdj 1 0 Wait 8 seconds then enter the following GPIB command to set the instrument s DC calibrator output to 0 Volts CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 5 3 Adjustment Procedures 5 4 DC Calibrator Adjust Verification CALIBRATE DCCALIBRATOR 0 0 Record DMM reading 7 Enter the follow
294. truments and Sampling Modules 9 1 Diagrams e odule dp gt 4 Power Gain Zero 1 0 SAMPLER V lt SS Sampler Curtain Board Figure 9 2 80E01 Sampling module block diagram 9 2 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Diagrams R77 IDE tLIcUEST Rm IER I Sew ro de d wert wie Channel Select Channel Ident 1 Dual Sampler MIC Module a ChA a Y Probe Ch Power arge Amplifier Dual E Amplifier Power ChB Channel gt Ident Sampler SRD Bias Sampler ECB Curtain Boar Figure 9 3 80E02 and 80E03 Sampling module block diagram CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 9 3 Diagrams m TOR On cc MERE raisin MN r7 Chaol Select 4 SRD Bias Channel ET Delay Ident Dual Sampler Amplitud MIC Module p x ChA Step Charge 4 Ampliher H Ha hoger St ChB 3 Off TDR On
295. ts and Sampling Modules 6 37 Removal and Installation Procedures Low Voltage Power 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed Locate the modules Supply to be removed in the locator diagram Internal Modules Figure 6 8 page 6 19 Additional modules to be removed m Trim all m Bottom cover m Left and Right covers Front and Power rear distribution boards 2 Orient theinstrument Set the instrument so its bottom is down on the work surface and its right side is facing you 3 Remove the low voltage power supply See Figure 6 23 page 6 39 a Disconnect J930 ribbon cable connector from the PC processor board b Remove the two 15 Torxdrive screws securing the low voltage power supply to the right side chassis support c Remove the three T 15 Torxdrive screws securing the low voltage power supply to rear chassis d Grasp the low voltage power supply and carefully slide the assembly out of the mainframe 4 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps a through c to reinstall the low voltage power supply 6 38 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Removal and Installation Procedures T 15 Torxdrive screw 3 Low voltage power supply T 15 Torxdrive screw 2 Figure 6 23 Low voltage power supply removal CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 39 Removal and Installation Procedures 6 40 NLX Board 1 2 3
296. tween those settings the scale can be adjusted in smaller increments 1 20 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 80C00 Modules Specifications Table 1 18 Optical modules Acquisition Cont Characteristics Verticaloffsetrange 80 01 8mW 80002 z6mW 80C03 1mW 80004 6mW 80C05 15 mW 80C06 40 mW DC vertical accuracy 80C01 typical 12 5 GHz OC 192 STM 64 OC 48 STM 16 OC 12 STM 4 settings 25 uW 2 of vertical value vertical 20 GHz setting 25 uW 4 of vertical value vertical 80C02 12 5 GHz 25 uW 2 of vertical value vertical OC 192 STM 64 25 uW 2 of vertical value vertical 20 GHz setting 25 uW 4 of vertical value vertical offset 30 GHz setting 25 uW 6 of vertical value vertical offset 80C03 all settings 25 uW 2 of vertical value vertical offset 80C04 10 66 Gb s 25 uW 2 of vertical value vertical OC 192 STM 64 25 uW 2 of vertical value vertical 20 GHz setting 25 uW 4 of vertical value vertical 30 GHz setting 25 uW 6 of vertical value vertical 80C05 0C192 25 uW 2 of vertical value vertical offset 20 GHz setting 25 uW 4 of vertical value vertical offset 30 GHz setting 25 uW 4696 of vertical value vertical offset 40 GHz setting 25 uW 4896 of vertical va
297. u can find other information related to servicing this product Read the Introduction following this preface for safety and other important background information needed before using this manual for servicing this product Manual Structure This manual is divided into chapters which are made up of related subordinate topics These topics can be cross referenced as sections Be sure to read the introductions to all procedures These introductions provide important information needed to do the service correctly safely and efficiently Manual Conventions This manual uses certain conventions that you should become familiar with before attempting service Modules Throughout this manual the term module appears A module is composed of electrical and mechanical assemblies circuit cards interconnecting cables and a user accessible front panel Sampling modules such as electrical sampling and optical sampling modules refer to products Replaceable Parts This manual refers to any field replaceable assembly or mechanical part specifically by its name or generically as a replaceable part In general a replaceable part is any circuit board or assembly such as the hard disk drive or a mechanical part such as the I O port connectors that is listed in the replaceable parts list of Chapter 10 Safety Symbols and terms related to safety appear in the Service Safety Summary found at the beginning of this manual CSA8000 amp TDS8000 I
298. uisites tin UR e 4 53 4 53 DC voltage measurement accuracy 4 56 Random noise displayed 4 62 Rise time 80E02 80 03 amp 80E04 4 64 Analog bandwidth 80E01 4 67 TDR system reflected rise time 80E04 4 75 TDR system step response aberrations 80 04 4 78 Optical Sampling Modules 4 83 Dark Level amp Vertical Equivalent Optical 4 83 Minimum Optical Bandwidth amp Reference Receiver Frequency Response 4 88 Integrated Rise Time 80006 4 99 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Table of Contents Clock Recovery Optical Sensitivity Range and Recovered Clock Timing Jitter 4 103 80A01 Trigger Prescale Limiting Preamplifier Module 4 111 Prerequisites Success Eee Er Ree T RU ep I ARR oe E ENDE 4 111 System Trigger Sensitivity 1 4 111 Adjustment Procedures Maintenance Adjustment Interval 5 1 Adjustment Environment 5 1 Adjustment After Repa
299. uivalent tool to pull the keypad support guides Remove the keypad from the front panel board Keypad support guide 9 Keypad e i EM Alignment Pry point access hole OW Off Pry point access hole Front panel board x Figure 6 12 Front panel board amp keyboard removal CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules T 15 Torxdrive screw 8 Pu P p 9 os pe A vA at 79 6 25 Removal and Installation Procedures A Display Assembly A 6 26 CAUTION When removing or installing the keypad make sure you do not touch the switch contact with your fingers The oils in your fingers will degrade or damage the switch contacts To help prevent damage to the keypad use cotton gloves when removing or installing the keyboard pad 3 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps to reinstall the Keypad front panel board and the front panel assembly Then see the following instructions a b m Make sure the keypad is aligned properly on the Front Panel board Make sure the ribbon cable is routed correctly when installing the Front Panel into the chassis Insert the two floppy disk support tabs into the front panel square openings Both left front panel tabs must go into the chassis slots See Figure 6 10 page 6 23 Locate module to be removed Locate the Display assembly Figure 6 13 page 6 27 Additional modules to be removed m Trim front pan
300. ule and the Channel 3 input on the 80E02 Sampling Module 9 Connect a less than 2 ns delay 50 Q coaxial cable between the DATA OUTPUT of the 80COX CR Optical Sampling Module and the Channel 4 input on the 80E02 Sampling Module 4 104 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Optical Sampling Modules 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 The D3186 Pulse Pattern Generator must use its own reference clock Set the following data signal parameters on the pattern generator m AC coupled DATA output mode 2 V m Amplitude 0 700 V Offset 1 00 V m PRBS23 pattern m NRZ data format m Balanced duty cycle crossing set to the default 50 level Data rate to 2 48832 Gb s the data rate will be changed depending on each specific data rate to be tested later in the procedure Set the variable optical attenuator for minimum attenuation Allow the TDS8000 or CSA8000 and its modules to warm up for at least 20 minutes in an environment that has had less than 1 C variation throughout the warm up cycle Press the DEFAULT SETUP button on the TDS8000 or CSA8000 instru ment Press the SELECT ON OFF button on the 80COX Optical Sampling Module so that the adjacent indicator lights This turns on Channel 1 C1 on the 80COX CR Optical Sampling Module Press the SELECT ON OFF button on the 80E02 Sampling Module so that the adjacent indicator lights This turns on Channel 3 C3 which displays the CLOCK s
301. ure 1 Setup the instrument From the application menu bar select Utilities and then select Diagnostics The Diagnostics dialog box displays See below ubi Level ns Leal CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 3 Brief Procedures 4 4 2 Select a diagnostics suite c In the dialog box click the Subsytem Level tab Select the all the entries by clicking the first entry Control Proc and dragging down to select the rest All entries should be highlighted as shown above In the Run box leave Loop and Halt on Failure unchecked 3 Verify that the diagnostic suite passes a b Click the Run button to execute the diagnostics The diagnostics may take several minutes to complete Verify that Pass appears as Status in the dialog box when the diagnostics complete If instead an error number appears as Status rerun the diagnostics If Fail status continues after rerunning compensation and you have allowed warm up to occur the module or main instrument may need service End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Brief Procedures Perform the Compensation This procedure uses internal routines to verify that the instrument compensates properly Equipment re For electrical sampling modules quired m 50 ohm terminators part number 015 1022 xx Quantity to match number of electrical channels to compensate The sampling modules
302. ure 4 30 check that the D3186 data rate is set to a data rate that matches the clock recovery rate set for the 80COX CR Optical Sampling Module see Table 4 10 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 4 107 Optical Sampling Modules 4 108 TUS Opa wo G EN Figure 4 30 Example of the display when the clock signal from the 80C0X CR Optical Sampling Module is not synchronous with the data rate input from the pulse pattern generator Note the unstable washed out clock signal Compare this with Figure 4 31 in which the clock signal is synchronized 4 Once you have verified that the recovered clock signal C3 is locked with the incoming data select the Trig Setup dialog box and select Clock Recovery as the Trigger Source 5 If you are checking an 80C03 Optical Sampling Module do the following procedure to check the clock recovery optical sensitivity range a Adjust the variable optical attenuator until the Average Optical Power AOP measurement for C1 is 400 uW 4 0 dBm b Check that the clock signal remains stable c Adjust the variable optical attenuator until the Average Optical Power AOP measurement for C1 is 25 uW 16 0 dBm d Check that the clock signal remains stable e Skip to step 7 6 If you checking an optical sampling module other than 80 03 set the Average Optical Power AOP to 125 uW 9 0 dBm CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Samp
303. urns the channel off The TEKPROBE connector provides support for accessories requiring TEKPROBE SMA support at levels 1 and 2 The connector provides power and control to attached accessories by the main instrument On modules with TDR capability the red TDR ON light indicates whether the step generator is sending out a step through the signal connector The main instrument turns this on or off CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Operating Instructions 80C00 Optical Sampling Module Operation Attenuating Optical Signals ZN NOTE These are not comprehensive operating instructions consult the documen tation map on page 2 12 to find other sources of operating instructions NOTE Proper operation of 80C04 modules requires that the operating system software installed on the main instrument is version 1 1 0 or greater To display the version installed select About TDS CSA8000 from the Help menu of the main instrument CAUTION To avoid damaging your optical sampling module handle your optical sampling module carefully at all times and take the following precautions Do not drop your sampling optical since damage and misalignment of the photodiode optical assembly can result Store the sampling optical in a secure location when not in use Replace the protective cap on the input connector when the sampling optical is not in use To prevent loss of optical power or damage to the optica
304. ver bits General Tool 620 440 2 Screwdriver handle ex Accepts Torx driver bits and 3 16 Standard tool or tended length 10 5 to socket tip Used for removing the Xcelite 99X10V 12 inches T 10 screws and 3 16 inch hex posts N S 48706 from the electrical and optical module Slots 3 T 10 Torx tip Used for removing the electrical or General Tool optical module chassis Torx driver 640 235 bit for T 10 size screw heads 4 T 15 Torx tip Used for removing most the instru General Tool ments screws Torx driver bit for 640 247 T 15 size screw heads 5 T 20 Torx tip Used for removing the handle General Tool hardware Torx driver bit for T 20 640 250 size screw heads 6 3 16 inch socket tip Used for removing the 3 16 inch hex Standard tool posts from the electrical and optical module slots 7 18 inch flat bladed screw Screwdriver for unlocking cable Standard too driver connectors 8 0 phillips screwdriver Screwdriver for removing small Standard too phillips screws CD floppy amp hard drive 9 Angle Tip Tweezers Used to remove front panel knobs Standard too 10 3 16 inch open end wrench Used to remove the rear panel nut Standard too posts 11 5 16 inch open end wrench Used to remove the rear panelnut Standard too posts 12 Coaxial cable connector Used to remove coaxial connectors Amp 58095 1 tool from d subminiature connector housings CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and
305. view of the dialog box that s currently displayed See below Color To use the online help Cont Control elements amp resources 16 66ns aH Help Cursos Setup dialeg box Line this desi do ned up the Cursor properties amd Setup Dialog spes This gathers all osnirois dor cursor such az cursor funchbon avi mndcurzcr 2 Ses n on dhari orro do yoi Lo die net El eam more aboul cursor controls Bl Gato siep py miep procedure ror setting Jp controls Click or touch here 2 18 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Operating Instructions Overview To use the online help Cont Control elements amp resources dig deeper 6 You can search for in depth help using methods with which most users of PCs are familiar from the application menu bar select Help and then select Contents amp Index See right 7 Fromthe online help finder see below choose from the three tabs TULIT T Find boob and Open Dio click antes piar indes morer Lobo dialog bos cenae L dee T M Cia AA pen F Cinal sirg T Cunze inge 8 Click the book icons to expose topic
306. y do the procedures that follow m A list of tools required to remove all modules W Procedures for removal and reinstallation of the electrical and mechanical modules W disassembly procedure for removal of all the major modules from the instrument at one time and for reassembly of those modules into the instrument Instructions for doing the actual cleaning are found under Inspection and Cleaning at the beginning of this section WARNING Before doing any procedure in this subsection disconnect the power cord from the line voltage source Failure to do so could cause serious injury or death NOTE Read Equipment Required for a list of the tools needed to remove and install modules in this instrument See Table 6 3 page 6 8 Read the cleaning procedure before disassembling the instrument for cleaning CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 6 7 Removal and Installation Procedures 6 8 Equipment Required Most modules in this instrument can be removed with a screwdriver handle mounted with a size T 15 Torx 9 screwdriver tip Use this tool whenever a procedure step instructs you to remove or install a screw unless a different size screwdriver is specified in that step All equipment required to remove and reinstall each module is listed in the first step of its procedure Table 6 3 Tools required for module removal Item No Description Part Number 1 Screwdriver handle Accepts Torx dri
307. yboard and mouse if desired CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 2 9 Installation 2 10 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Operating Instructions Before doing service read the following operating instructions These instruc tions are at the level appropriate for servicing these instrument and assume you are familiar with Microsoft Windows based products NOTE These are not comprehensive operating instructions consult the documen tation map that follows to find other sources of operating instructions Additional instructions are integrated into the service procedures found in later sections of this manual For instance the procedures found in the section Performance Verification contain instructions for making the front panel settings required to check each instrument characteristic included there Also the general instructions for operating these instrument s internal diagnostic routines are found in Section 6 Maintenance You may also find the Product Description in Section 1 useful for understanding how the instrument functions NOTE Instructions for powering on and off of this instrument and installing its software are found in the section Installation which precedes this section CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules 2 11 Operating Instructions Documentation Map The instrument ships with documents individually tailored to address different asp
308. ystem These are usually located on either side of the space bar QAPlus WIN does not trap these keys when performing the keyboard test Do not press them Power on the instrument and visually inspect the left side panel of the instrument to verify that all six cooling fans are rotating Equipment re None quired Prerequisites The instrument must be powered on and running CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Instruments and Sampling Modules Brief Procedures Checking the Hardware check the hardware and Windows 98 operation system of this instrument and Operating System perform this procedure to run the QAPlus Win diagnostics from the Windows 98 Optional Start menu Equipment re None quired Prerequisites The instrument must be powered on and warmed up for 20 minutes 1 Exit the instrument User Interface UI application before running the external diagnostics select Exit in the File menu 2 Click Start then click Programs and then Sykes Diagnostics in the Start Menu Finally click QAPlus Win 3 Click the Quick Test button to run the diagnostics suite a Follow any instructions appearing on screen Ignore nonapplicable tests for example ignore any Media tests that check speakers and wav audio files b When testing completes several minutes proceed to step 4 4 Check test results in scrollable results listing in the lower left corner of the QAPIlus test window tests should pass 5

TEK TDS 8000, CSA 8000 Service

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents